JP2022173355A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of imparting a moderate profit to a player.

SOLUTION: When a game round in which a jackpot occurs is completed, an opening/closing execution mode is started. In the opening/closing execution mode, a special electric winning device is opened and closed, and game balls are put out when game balls enter the special electric winning device. The total number of rounds of round games in an opening/closing execution mode by a high-frequency winning mode is measured by utilizing a round number counter for measurement, an area for management, and an object round number area provided in a RAM 64. In this case, as a value of the object round number stored in the object round number area becomes larger, an opening period and an ending period in the opening/closing execution mode become longer. As the value of the object round number becomes larger, a closing period of a special electric winning device in one round game in the opening/closing execution mode becomes longer. As the value of the object round number becomes larger, a putout speed of game balls becomes slower.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a changing pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. A configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally displayed on the display screen, and a transition to a special game state advantageous to the player is made. Then, when the state shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example, See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-125488

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is preferable that a moderate profit is given to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of awarding a moderate profit to a player.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 includes special transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player;
Predetermined period varying means for varying a predetermined target period included in the special game state according to the player's advantage;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a moderate profit to the player.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the first special figure, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the second special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining a fluctuation duration in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special electric start processing in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing special electric open processing in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric closing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing in main side MPU. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing main side command correspondence processing in the sound and light side MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the period setting process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for determining an effect pattern in the sound and light side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a data table for game round effects, which is a selection target when a small winning result is not obtained; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a movie image dedicated to the longest period displayed on the pattern display device, and (b) is a time chart showing the timing at which the display of the remaining time image is started. (a) to (c) are time charts for explaining how symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row of the symbol display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of a data table for game round production. (a) is a flow chart showing final stop period selection processing in the main MPU, (b) is a flow chart showing opening period selection processing in the main MPU, and (c) is a flow chart showing interval period selection processing in the main MPU. (d) is a flowchart showing selection processing of an ending period in the main MPU. (a) to (e) per unit time when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of game rounds in the low-frequency support mode. 4 is a time chart showing how the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode in the state occurs step by step. It is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the main side RAM used for managing the payout rate; 10 is a flow chart showing a payout rate monitoring process in the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry management processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period setting process in main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining a fluctuation duration in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination performed by the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area of main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the period setting process in main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining a fluctuation duration in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a base arrangement table in the fourth embodiment; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an additional arrangement table; It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first base arrangement table in the fifth embodiment; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second base arrangement table; (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third base arrangement table; (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a fourth base arrangement table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining a fluctuation duration in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing for acquiring a variable duration period executed by the main MPU in the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal period table; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a shortened period table; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first base arrangement table in the seventh embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second base arrangement table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third base arrangement table. It is an explanatory view for explaining. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining a fluctuation duration in the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (g) are time charts showing settings in the non-restricted state, the first restricted state, and the second restricted state, respectively. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision performed by main side MPU in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision performed by main side MPU in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing in main side MPU. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the main side RAM used for managing the total number of rounds in the tenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management processing in main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing selection processing of a final stop period in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing selection processing of an opening period in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special electric start processing in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing special electric open processing in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric closing in main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of release in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the closing period in main side MPU. (a) and (b) are time charts showing how the execution mode of the round game changes according to the number of target rounds stored in the number of target rounds area. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing ending period selection processing in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an opening period selection process executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing ending period selection processing in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the pattern display device in the twelfth embodiment; (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the display mode of the symbols changes when the game-turn effect is executed while the symbol row is maintained. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for determining an effect pattern in the sound and light side MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of a data table for game round production. 10 is a flowchart showing extension setting processing in the sound and light side MPU; (a) and (b) are time charts showing how the execution period of the symbol waiting display is extended. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing pending information acquisition processing executed by the main MPU in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing destination identification processing in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining a fluctuation duration in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining a variable duration period executed by the main MPU in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision performed by main side MPU in a 15th embodiment. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the period setting process in main side MPU62, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU62. (a) is a flow chart showing final stop period selection processing in the main MPU, (b) is a flow chart showing opening period selection processing in the main MPU, and (c) is a flow chart showing interval period selection processing in the main MPU. (d) is a flowchart showing selection processing of an ending period in the main MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is regulated according to the occurrence frequency of the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing management processing executed by the main MPU in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception process in MPU of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process in MPU of a payout control apparatus.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided at the lower right corner of the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled to shoot a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 1, the firing operation device 28 is provided so as to protrude forward from the base surface of the front door frame 14, and has an operation base 29a and an operation handle 29b. The operation handle 29b is formed in an annular shape, and is rotatably supported by the operation base 29a while being sandwiched between the front and rear of the operation base 29a. The rotation axis of the operating handle 29b extends in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the operating handle 29b has a portion on which a player's finger is placed when rotating the operating handle 29b. The operating handle 29b is urged toward the initial position by a spring (not shown), and is rotated rightward against the urging force when the player rotates it rightward. As the amount of rotation toward the right side increases, the shooting strength of the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 increases.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, and a round display section 39. etc. are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 , one game ball is put out, and when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, ten game balls are put out and sent to the special electric winning device 32. When one game ball is entered, 15 game balls are put out.

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail about the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display portion 37a and a second special figure display portion 37b. The display area of the first special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special figure display portion 37b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the area of the display area including the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b is also narrower than the display surface 41a.

In the first special figure display portion 37a, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the first operation opening 33 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display portion 37b, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

In addition, the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but it is not limited to this Instead, it may be constituted by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and multiple types of characters A configuration in which is displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of colors are displayed, or the like is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display part 37c and a second special figure reservation display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The number of game balls winning the first operation port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first special figure reservation display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls winning the second operation opening 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device 90 which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or other display device having a display surface, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the first special symbol display unit 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33, the variable display or predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. Along with being performed, when the fluctuation display of the pattern or the predetermined display is performed in the second special figure display part 37b based on the winning to the second operation port 34, the fluctuation display of the pattern or the predetermined display is performed accordingly. . In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effects triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effects during the opening/closing execution mode, which will be described later, after winning is won, etc. is done.

The display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display of the symbols will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. FIG. 4 is a view showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 4( a ) to 4 ( j ), the patterns, which are one type of pattern, include nine main patterns with numbers “1” to “9”, and shell-shaped patterns. It is composed of a sub pattern consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is provided with three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. On the display surface 41a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the display surface 41a is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols. It's like In addition, as shown in FIG. 5A, the display surface 41a is provided with five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. .

When the symbols are varied and displayed on the display surface 41a based on the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts like this. Basically, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally predetermined symbols are statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. is terminated with Also, when the fluctuation display of the pattern ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a 5R high probability big hit result, a 10R low probability big hit result, or a 10R high probability big hit result, which will be described later, the same on any effective line A combination of odd numbered symbols or a combination of the same even numbered symbols is formed, and if the result of the internal lottery is a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small hit result, which will be described later, a predetermined pattern on any of the activated lines A combination (eg, "3.4.1") is formed.

In addition, based on the winning to any of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in any of the special figure display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41, and is terminated after displaying a predetermined result. Up to is equivalent to one game round. In addition, the pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner without being limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

When a big win or a small win is won in a winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33, the operation shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which a prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. Similarly, when a big win or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the second operation port 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible.

Returning to the description of FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes in the event that the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It has become. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

The round display portion 39 displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode. Here, the opening/closing execution mode includes a round number regulation mode that occurs when a big win is won and an opening/closing number regulation mode that occurs when a small win is won. The round number regulation mode is an opening/closing execution mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until either one of the elapse of a predetermined open continuation period and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls winning the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied. That is. The number of round games executed in the number-of-rounds regulation mode differs according to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the shift. In the round display section 39, the number of times of the round game is displayed or a display corresponding thereto is made. Further, the display on the round display section 39 is started when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ended when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated and a new game cycle is started. On the other hand, in the opening/closing number regulation mode, no round game is set, the opening/closing number of times of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the upper limit, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric prize winning device 32. is terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied. In the opening/closing number regulation mode, the round display portion 39 is maintained in a non-display state.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51 . A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge forward are vertically arranged below the window portion 51 . An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device 76, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) for main control of the game. The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box. It should be noted that the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving traces of its opening or provided with a trace structure for leaving traces of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the circuit board box are combined inseparably, and the structure of the joint part that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and peeling by leaving the adhesive layer on the adhesion target when peeling it off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of the fact that it has been sealed is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box is conceivable.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60.例文帳に追加The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are successively replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling a payout device 76, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power/shooting control device 78 is provided for controlling the launching of game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 . The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 62, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 60 .

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60, and a payout control device 77 is connected. A power supply/emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 , and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65 .

Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are connected to the input side of the MPU62. The various winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning-corresponding ball-entering portions such as the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35. A detection sensor is included, and the MPU 62 makes a prize winning determination for each ball entering portion. Also, in the MPU 62, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34. FIG.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 65, a payout control device 77 and a sound emission control device 80. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 80 . Details of these various commands will be described later. The MPU 62 transmits commands to the sound emission control device 80 by parallel communication.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the open/close door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34, A figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38 and a round display section 39 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display portion 37a, a second special figure display portion 37b, a first special figure reservation display portion 37c and a second special figure reservation display portion 37d. are all connected to the output side of the MPU 62 . Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the driving section 32b for the special electric so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the general electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure unit 37 is performed in MPU62 in the case of a game round and opening-and-closing execution mode. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is specified, the MPU 62 performs display control of the general unit 38. FIG. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the display control of the round display section 39 is executed in the MPU 62 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60 .

The power/emission control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like generate operating power necessary for each, and supply the generated operating power.

More specifically, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power-on power supply section 78a and a power-off power supply section 78b. The power-on power supply unit 78a is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply in a game hall or the like, and in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power. It has the function to The power-off power supply unit 78b is composed of a capacitor, and supplies power from the power-on power supply unit 78a when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (when power is being supplied from an external power supply). is charged by In addition, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or in a power interruption state (when the power supply from the external power supply is interrupted) such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power supply during power interruption 78b discharges the main power. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77 . Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 is not erased while the backup power is supplied from the power supply unit 78b for power failure. stored in memory.

Here, the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 temporarily stores information on the current game state and progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. be done. In this case, the backup power is supplied to these RAMs from the power supply section 78b for power interruption as described above, so that the current game can be played even in a situation where there is no power supply from the power supply section 78a for power supply. It is possible to store and hold the state, progress of the game, and unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period. On the other hand, the sound emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are not supplied with backup power from the power supply during power failure 78b. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the sound emission control device 80 and the RAM 94 of the display control device 90 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply section 78a is stopped. erased.

A relatively large capacity is ensured for the power supply section 78b for power interruption, and the information stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 before the power interruption is held for a predetermined period (for example, one day or two days). be. The power-off power supply unit 78b is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power failure power supply section 78b when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) that is different from the power supply unit 78b for power failure. In the power supply/launch control device 78, even after the stable DC power supply of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the control system can be discharged for a time sufficient to perform power failure processing by discharging from the power supply unit for power failure. is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving power source of the unit, at a normal value. As a result, main controller 60 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a launch control section 78c in addition to various power supply sections 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control section 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand touches the outer surface of the operating handle 29b and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the detection of the handle operation is sent to the firing control unit. 78c. Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the shooting control section 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operating handle 29b. In addition, the firing control unit 78c grasps whether or not the firing stop switch of the firing operation device 28 is operated according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and operates the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. 29b is grasped.

The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition establishment signal (for example, HI level signal) to the MPU 62 when a predetermined game ball launch condition is satisfied. Specifically, the firing control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle 29b is being touched by the player, and indicates that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. On the condition that the signal is received from the push sensor 28b, the condition establishment signal is continuously transmitted to the MPU 62. If any of the above signals is not received, the MPU 62 does not receive a condition fulfillment signal (for example, it becomes a LOW level signal). In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting the condition establishment signal.

In the MPU 62, when a predetermined firing period has passed in a situation where the condition establishment signal is received and the shooting of the game ball is permitted, a pulse-shaped shooting instruction signal is transmitted to the shooting control section 78c. When receiving a pulse-shaped launch instruction signal from the MPU 62, the launch control unit 78c drives and controls the game ball launching mechanism 27 once. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball shooting mechanism 27, one game ball is shot toward the game area PA each time a predetermined shooting period elapses. In addition, since the shooting intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of shooting, the game ball is shot with intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined firing period is measured by the MPU 62 . There are a plurality of patterns of the predetermined firing cycle. Specifically, the first cycle allows 100 game balls to be shot per minute, and the second cycle allows 90 game balls to be shot per minute. There are set two cycles, a third cycle in which 80 game balls can be shot in one minute, and a fourth cycle in which 70 game balls can be shot in one minute.

The audio emission control device 80 includes an audio emission control board 81 on which an MPU 82 is mounted. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

Based on the command received from the main controller 60, the MPU 82 determines the contents of the effects to be executed in the game rounds, opening/closing execution mode, and the like. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed so that an operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

The MPU 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 90 . The MPU 82 transmits to the display control device 90 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 60 and a command including the content of notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 60. Note that the display control device 90 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 60 without going through the sound emission control device 80 , and in relation to the main control device 60 , communication is performed rather than the sound emission control device 80 . It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the direction.

The display control device 90 includes a display control board 91 on which an MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. The MPU 92 performs display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 80 .

Although not shown, the display control board 91 includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 92 . The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the pattern display device 41 to display the image data. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63 and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the sound emission control device 80 are respectively referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63 and main RAM 64. The MPU 82 on the light side, the ROM 83 on the sound and light side and the RAM 84 on the sound and light side are called, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 of the display control device 90 are called the display side MPU 92, the display side ROM 93 and the display side RAM 94 respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side MPU 62 uses various counter information during the game to set the winning lottery, the display setting of the first special figure display portion 37a, the display setting of the second special figure display portion 37b, and the symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41. , Display setting of the general pattern display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. A jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3 used for a reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 is lost and fluctuating, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure. The display units 37a and 37b and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation continuation period of the game round in the symbol display device 41 are used. Furthermore, a general electric random number counter C4 used for lottery to determine whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is to be in the electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the RAM 64. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs. The special figure reservation area 122 includes a first special figure reservation area 125, a second special figure reservation area 126, and an execution area 127 for special figures.

The first special figure reservation area 125 comprises a first area 125a, a second area 125b, a third area 125c and a fourth area 125d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 125a to 125d as the reservation information on the first special figure side. In this case, in the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 125a→second area 125b→third area 125c→third area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the 4 areas 125d. Since the four areas 125a to 125d are provided in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation opening 33 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The second special figure reservation area 126 comprises a first area 126a, a second area 126b, a third area 126c and a fourth area 126d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 126a to 126d as the holding information on the second special figure side. In this case, in the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d, when winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 126a→second area 126b→third area 126c→third area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the 4 areas 126d. Since the four areas 126a to 126d are provided in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the second operation opening 34 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

Execution area 127 for special figures, when starting the variable display in one of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, hold information of the target to perform the right or wrong judgment and distribution judgment for special figures is stored. area. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a, the reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure reservation area 125 is for special figures is moved to the execution area 127 of On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display section 37b, the second special figure side reservation information stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure reservation area 126 is the special figure execution area 127.

Information corresponding to the general/universal random number counter C4 is stored in the general/universal pattern reservation area 123 when winning to the through gate 35 occurs. The general pattern reservation area 123 has a first area 128a, a second area 128b, a third area 128c and a fourth area 128d. is stored in one of the areas 128a to 128d as reserved information on the general map side. In this case, in the first area 128a to the fourth area 128d, when winning to the through gate 35 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area 128a→second area 128b→third area 128c→fourth area 128d is stored chronologically. Since the four areas 128a to 128d are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the through gate 35 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the general pattern reservation area 123 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more. may be

The normal map reservation area 123 is provided with an execution area 129 for the normal map. The execution area 129 for the normal map is an area in which pending information of the target for the propriety determination for support is stored when the variable display is started in the normal map display section 38a. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a, the reservation information stored in the first area 128a of the normal map reservation area 123 is moved to the execution area 129 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric random number counter C4 will be described. The general electric random number counter C4, for example, is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the general drawing reservation area 123 of the main side RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electrical accessory 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electrical random number counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the general electric role item 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which game balls are continued to be shot in a similar manner to the game area PA, the general electric role 34a of the second operation port 34 per unit time A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity open state in the general electricity open lottery using the general electricity random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5), but the probability is high. In the frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state when winning the general electric open state is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the open period for one time is set longer. there is In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the general electric open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closed period is set shorter than one open period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured period (that is, the 1 time fluctuation continuation period in the display section 38a) is set to be short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased.

In addition, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to be in the electric power open state per unit time is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the electric power open state is increased. In addition, after one general electric open lottery is performed, the securing period secured when the next electric open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 35) In a configuration where multiple types of variable display periods are prepared, in high-frequency support mode, a shorter secured period is more likely to be selected than in low-frequency support mode, or the average secured period is set to be shorter. good too. Furthermore, increase the number of open times, lengthen the open period, shorten the secured period after one electric power open lottery is held and the next electric power open lottery is held, such a secured period The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average period of and increasing the winning probability.

If the general power open state is won in the general power open lottery using the general power random number counter C4, the general power open state is entered. The general electric open state ends when the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the second operation opening 34. More specifically, the upper limit number is 10 in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas in the high-frequency support mode, it is more than the low-frequency support mode. 3 times. In addition, the duration of one opening of the general electric accessory 34a is 1 second in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 seconds in the high frequency support mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33, and the game ball enters the second operation opening 34. It is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the winning timing. Then, using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1, determination of winning or losing is performed.

The value of the random number that becomes a winner when judging the winning is stored in the main ROM 63 as a winning/failing table. In the hit/fail table, a big win result, a small win result, and a losing result are set as win/fail results. The jackpot result is a winning/failing result that can trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open/close, and can trigger a transition to at least one of the winning/failing lottery mode and the support mode. The small winning result is a winning result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, but does not trigger a transition to both the winning lottery mode and the support mode. The deviation result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode.

The success/failure table includes a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode. In other words, the pachinko machine 10, the holding information of the first special figure side obtained based on the winning to the first operation opening 33, and the second special figure side obtained based on the winning to the second operation opening 34 The same success/failure table is referred to with the pending information, and in either case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes in the success/failure lottery.

Specifically, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode has two random number values (for example, "5" and "305") that result in a big win, and random number values that result in a small win. are three (for example, "55", "355", "555"). The other values are random numbers that result in outliers.

The success/failure table for the high-probability mode has a larger number of random number values that result in a big win than the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420" , 470, 495, 520, 558, 575, 599). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in the jackpot winning in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in the jackpot winning in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the value of the random number resulting in the small win result is the same as in the case of the success/failure table for the low-probability mode.

It should be noted that the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may be partially included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the high-probability mode, or may not be included. .

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33, and the game ball enters the second operation opening 34. It is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the winning timing. Then, distribution determination is performed using the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is different.

The open/close execution mode executed when the jackpot is won is the round number regulation mode as already explained. The round number regulation mode includes a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the frequency of occurrence of winning to the special electric winning device 32 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high and low. and are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 are set with different open duration periods from when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. . Specifically, a long-term mode in which the open duration is set to a long period of 29 seconds, and a short-term mode in which the open duration is set to 0.5 seconds, which is a period shorter than the long period, are set. It is

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, 100 shots per minute, 90 shots per minute, 80 shots per minute, or 70 shots per minute are shot in the game area. A game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that a game ball is shot toward the PA. The shortest firing period is 0.6 seconds and the longest firing period is about 0.86 seconds. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to 10 pieces. Then, in the long-term mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the open continuation period is set to be longer than the product of the longest firing period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short-term mode, the time shorter than the product of the shortest shooting cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, the open continuation of the time shorter than the shortest shooting cycle of the game ball A period is set. Therefore, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long-term mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round game. When the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in the mode, it is expected that no prize will be won to the special electric prize winning device 32 . In addition, the open continuation period of the short-term mode may be the same or substantially the same as the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, and may be longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (i.e., the first cycle) and the longest of the game ball. The period may be shorter than the firing period of (that is, the fourth period).

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long-term mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short-term manner in each round game.

In the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric winning device 32, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, if the frequency of winning to the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher, it is not limited to the above value. is.

The opening/closing execution mode executed when the small winning is won is the opening/closing number regulation mode as already explained. In the opening/closing number regulation mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened twice in a short period of time. In this case, the upper limit number of conditions for ending the specified opening/closing number mode is set to 10, and the total open duration of the specified opening/closing number mode is the shortest shooting cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of the specified opening/closing number mode. is set to a time shorter than the product of Therefore, in the opening/closing number regulation mode, the round game is not executed, and whether or not the total number of winning prizes in the opening/closing number regulation mode is the upper limit is determined. is more likely to be opened and closed.

The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 63 as a distribution table. Contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b).

As shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), in the distribution table, as types of jackpot results, 10R low-probability jackpot results, 2R high-probability jackpot results, 5R high-probability jackpot results, and 10R A high probability jackpot result is set.

In the 10R low-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which 10 round games occur. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the low-probability mode is set regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This low-probability mode will continue at least until the next big win results, resulting in transition to the open/close execution mode. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is entered regardless of the support mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games played after the transition reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 80 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more. In this case, the low-frequency support mode is set. The low frequency support mode shifted after the end of the high frequency support mode continues until the next big win result and the shift to the opening/closing execution mode. In the open/close execution mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode regardless of whether the result of the big win or the result of the small win is the trigger.

In the 2R high-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a low-frequency winning mode in which two round games occur. In this opening/closing execution mode, since winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 cannot be expected, the number of game balls to be paid out is substantially zero. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is entered regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until the next big win results and the transition to the open/close execution mode is made accordingly. If the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and if the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. These support modes will continue until the next big win results and the resulting open/close execution mode is entered.

The 5R high-probability jackpot result is a high-frequency winning mode in which the opening and closing execution mode is a round game of 5 times. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is entered regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until the next big win results, resulting in transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is entered regardless of the support mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until the next big win results and the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

The 10R high-probability jackpot result is a high-frequency winning mode in which the opening and closing execution mode is a round game of 10 times. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is entered regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until the next big win results and the transition to the open/close execution mode is made accordingly. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until the next big win results and the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

As a distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), it is used when determining the distribution of the hold information on the first special figure side acquired based on the winning to the first operation port 33 The distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure used when determining the allocation of the pending information on the second special figure side acquired based on the winning to the second operation port 34 and are provided.

Specifically, each distribution table will be described. As shown in FIG. 8A, the distribution table for the first special figure includes 10R low probability jackpot results and A 2R high probability jackpot result, a 5R high probability jackpot result, and a 10R high probability jackpot result are set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, "0 to 39" corresponds to the 10R low probability jackpot result, "40 to 59" corresponds to the 2R high probability jackpot result, "60 to 79 ” corresponds to the 5R high probability jackpot result, and “80 to 99” corresponds to the 10R high probability jackpot result.

Here, when a small winning result is obtained, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by this, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened/closed twice in a short period of time. On the other hand, in the 2R high-probability jackpot result, the game shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number of times, and in each round game, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a short-term mode. That is, when either the 2R high-probability jackpot result or the small hit result is obtained, the operating mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game round when these game results are obtained, different stop results are displayed in the first special figure display part 37a, but the display area is set larger than the first special figure display part 37a. The stop result is displayed in an unidentifiable manner on the displayed pattern display device 41 . Specifically, in any of the game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a common symbol combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") on any of the activated lines. In addition, when a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained in the low frequency support mode, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by that is an opening and closing execution mode when a small hit result is obtained based on the winning of the first operation port 33. In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the pattern display device 41 or the like does not perform an effect indicating that it is a high probability mode, and the first operation port 33 is opened. An effect is executed in the same manner as after the opening/closing execution mode when a small winning result is obtained based on the prize winning. In addition, the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low frequency support mode in both cases of a 2R high probability big win result and a small win result in the low frequency support mode. With the above configuration, for example, in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, when the opening and closing execution mode that is the low frequency winning mode or the opening and closing execution mode that is the opening and closing number regulation mode occurs, the player , the game is played in anticipation that the opening/closing execution mode will be shifted to the high probability mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, the distribution table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. A certain jackpot result is set. In the distribution table for the second special figure, "0 to 39" corresponds to the 10R low probability jackpot result, "40 to 59" corresponds to the 5R high probability jackpot result, "60 to 99 ” corresponds to the 10R high probability jackpot result.

The distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure have the same probability of entering the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the probability of becoming the high-frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. More specifically, the distribution table for the first special figure can be in the low frequency winning mode, while the distribution table for the second special figure cannot be in the low frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the distribution table for the second special figure has a higher probability of shifting to the open/close execution mode in which the round game in the high-frequency winning mode occurs 10 times than the distribution table for the first special figure. Therefore, as a kind of jackpot result that can be selected when a jackpot is won, winning to the second operating port 34 occurs rather than winning to the first operating port 33 and internal lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player if an internal lottery is performed as a result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing a variable display of symbols, and the symbol display device 41 in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined big win result. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started in . Concretely, a combination of symbols with the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed with respect to the award correspondence result. Two kinds of expectation effects are set, namely reach display and advance notice effect.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. , the ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or hiding the combination of the ready-to-win symbols.

In the advance notice effect, after the symbols are variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows in a part of the symbol rows, or the ready-to-win display is performed. In the process, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, it also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. This advance notice effect can occur in any of the game rounds when the result is a big win or when the result is not a big win, but it is made to occur with a higher probability when the result is a big win than when the result is not a big win. is set.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Also, in game rounds corresponding to 2R high-probability big win results and small win results in which the same combination of symbols is not stop-displayed, reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Reach display is performed when

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the notice effect is made not by the main side MPU 62 but by the sound and light side MPU 82 . In this case, the sound and light side MPU 82 executes lottery processing of the notice performance so that the game round corresponding to the big win result is more likely to generate the notice performance than the game round corresponding to the result of losing. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 41 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS determines the variation continuation period of the game round (the variation continuation period in the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b, the variation continuation period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41) in the main side MPU 62 It is used in Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS determines the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b and at the start of the variation in the symbol by the symbol display device 41 obtained at the time of

<Regarding the prerequisite processing configuration in the main MPU 62>
Next, each process executed to progress the game by the main MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 62 can be roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until 1 sec has elapsed since the main process was started, without proceeding to the next process. In subsequent step S102, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 62 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated. determine whether or not there is In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, as initialization of the main RAM 64, the main RAM 64 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the sound emission control device 80 in order to recognize the current game state. Send to

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). In subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S113, interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 62 will be described. The main control board 61 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle. A circuit is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as frequency changing means for changing the period of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the activation timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main side MPU 62. . That is, a pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 62 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The main MPU 62 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of the pulse signal, and activates the timer interrupt process under at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. to run.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer Interrupt processing is activated. In other words, depending on the execution status of processing in the main MPU 62, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has passed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec has passed since the immediately preceding timer interrupt process was started.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific period such as 4 msec regardless of the contents of the process in the main MPU 62, the timer interrupt process is basically started at a specific period. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 62 is such that even if timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, The timer interrupt processing at the timing of 1 absorbs the amount exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

Now, in the timer interrupt processing, first, power failure information storage processing is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitor board 65, and when the occurrence of power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

In subsequent step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric random number counter C4, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In subsequent step S205, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the subsequent step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are read, and signals to the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 Execute processing to identify the presence or absence of a ball entry.

In the subsequent step S210, a timer update process is executed for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed. Details of the firing control process will be described later.

In the following step S212, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. conduct.

In the subsequent step S213, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The processing contents of the special figure special electric control processing will be described later in detail.

In continuing step S214, normal figure normal electric control processing is performed. In the general map general electric control process, when the prize to the through gate 35 has occurred, processing for acquiring the numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4 as the reservation information on the general map side is executed. In addition, when the hold information on the general map side is acquired in a situation where the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is not performed and the general electric accessory 34a is not in the open state where the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state , performs a general electric open lottery using the reservation information on the general map side and starts the variable display in the general map display unit 38a. The variable display is performed for a predetermined period of time, and after that, the stop result corresponding to the result of the electric power open lottery is displayed. Then, in the general electric open lottery, when the general electric open state is won, the stop result corresponding to the general electric open state winning is displayed on the general electric diagram display unit 38a, and then the electric open state is entered. The object 34a is opened in a predetermined manner (that is, the second operating port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner). If the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the general/universal electric open lottery, the display control of the general/universal diagram display unit 38a, and the general/universal electric open state as described above are performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, it is performed in a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode regardless of the type of the support mode before starting the opening/closing execution mode and the type of the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

In subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information pertaining to the first special figure display unit 37a to the first special figure pending display unit 37c Setting, setting of output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of pending information related to the second special figure display unit 37b to the second special figure pending display unit 37d, and the increase/decrease number of pending information related to the normal figure display unit 38a Output information to be reflected in the drawing reservation display section 38b is set. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, while setting the output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b , and sets output information for updating the display contents of the normal map display section 38a. Also, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the round display section 39 is set based on the processing result of the previous step S213.

In the subsequent step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and payout state reception processing is executed for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result. Further, in step S217, if the game ball should be put out based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, A payout output process is executed for setting a prize ball command as an output target in order to execute the payout of the game ball. In subsequent step S218, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processing of steps S207 to S218 is executed, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Launch control processing>
Next, the firing control process executed in step S211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not a condition fulfillment signal has been received from the launch control section 78c of the power supply/launch control device 78 (step S301). As already explained, the firing control section 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operating handle 29b is being touched by the player, and a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. is received from the push sensor 28b. If the condition establishment signal is not received (step S301: NO), the period measurement counter 64a (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S302). The cycle measurement counter 64a is a counter for the main MPU 62 to determine whether or not the firing cycle has passed while receiving the condition establishment signal from the firing control unit 78c.

If the condition establishment signal is received (step S301: YES), 1 is added to the value of the period measurement counter 64a of the main RAM 64 (step S303). Then, whether or not the value of the cycle measurement counter 64a after the addition of 1 is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the current firing cycle stored in the firing cycle area 64b (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64. (step S304). As already explained, the pachinko machine 10 is set with a plurality of shooting cycles. Specifically, the first cycle enables shooting of 100 game balls per minute, and 90 game balls per minute. , a third cycle in which 80 game balls can be shot in one minute, and a fourth cycle in which 70 game balls can be shot in one minute. there is Information corresponding to any one of the first to fourth cycles is stored in the firing cycle area 64b.

If the value of the cycle measurement counter 64a is greater than or equal to the value corresponding to the current firing cycle stored in the firing cycle area 64b (step S304: YES), a pulsed firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c ( step S305). When receiving a pulse-shaped launch instruction signal from the MPU 62, the launch control unit 78c drives and controls the game ball launching mechanism 27 once. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball shooting mechanism 27, one game ball is shot toward the game area PA in the shooting period measured by the main side MPU 62. be. In addition, since the shooting intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of shooting, the game ball is shot with intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b.

When the process of step S302 is performed, when the determination of step S304 is negative, or when the process of step S305 is performed, cycle setting process is performed (step S306). Although details will be described later, the cycle setting process executes processing for storing information corresponding to any one of the first to fourth cycles in the firing cycle area 64b.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control processing executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10) of the main side MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 has occurred, the processing for acquiring the reservation information on the special figure side is executed, and the reservation on the special figure side When the information is stored, a decision is made for the reserved information on the side of the special figure, and the decision is used as a trigger to execute a process for performing a game cycle operation. In addition, based on the result of the success/failure determination, the process of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the end of the game-playing operation, and the process during the opening/closing execution mode and at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, a hold information acquisition process is executed (step S401). In the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball to the first operation port 33 has occurred, read the number of reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 125, When the number of pending information is less than the upper limit value (specifically "4"), each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3, out of the first special figure holding area 125 It is stored in the area on the highest side where the hold information on the first special figure side is not stored. In addition, in the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball to the second operation port 34 has occurred, read the number of reservation information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 , When the number of the reservation information is less than the upper limit (specifically "4"), the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are set in the second special figure reservation area 126 It is stored in the area on the highest side where the pending information on the second special figure side is not stored.

In the acquisition process, when the hold information on the side of the first special figure or the hold information on the side of the second special figure is acquired, a hold command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display side MPU 92 . The display side MPU 92 receives the pending command, and changes the display of the number of pending information on the pattern display device 41 so as to correspond to the increase in the pending number. In this case, since the hold command includes information indicating which one of the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side has increased, the pattern display device 41 increases The display of the number of pending items corresponding to the side that did it is changed.

Further, when the number of pending information increases as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the first special figure pending display unit 37c and the second special figure pending display unit The display control is performed so that the display content corresponding to the increase in the number of reservations is changed to the side corresponding to the increase in the number of reservations among 37d.

In subsequent step S402, the information of the special special electric counter provided in the main side RAM64 is read, and in step S403, the special special electric address table stored in the main side ROM63 is read. Then, in step S404, the start address corresponding to the information of the special special electric counter is obtained from the special electric special electric address table.

As already explained, the special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for the game cycle and a process for controlling the opening/closing execution mode. As processing for controlling the effect for the game round, there is a special figure variation start process (step S406) which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, and a process for advancing the effect for the game round. Processing during special figure fluctuation (step S407) and processing during special figure determination (step S408), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set.

The processing for controlling the opening/closing execution mode includes a special electric start processing (step S409), which is a processing for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and a processing for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32. Special electric open process (step S410), special electric closed process (step S411) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric winning device 32, the ending of the opening/closing execution mode, and the game at the end of the opening/closing execution mode A special electric end process (step S412), which is a process for controlling state transition, is set.

The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main side MPU 62 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed. In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the plurality of types of processing is set in association with the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

When the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed, the special special electric counter is triggered by the fact that the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied, and the special special electric control in the next processing time 1 is added, 2 is added, 1 is subtracted, or "0" is cleared, corresponding to the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, the processing corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter should be executed. In addition, the special figure special electric counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

After executing the process of step S404, the process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S404 is executed (step S405). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, jump to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S406, and when the acquired start address is SA1, jump to the special figure fluctuation process of step S407. , If the acquired start address is SA2, it jumps to the special figure confirmation process of step S408, and if the acquired start address is SA3, it jumps to the special electric start process of step S409, and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the special electric open process of step S410, and if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the special electric closed process of step S411, and if the acquired start address is SA6. It jumps to special electric end processing of step S412. When one of the processes of step S406 to step S412 is executed, this special figure special electric control process is terminated. The processing of steps S406 to S412 will be individually described below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special figure variation start processing of step S406 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not reservation information on the special figure side is stored in either the first special figure reservation area 125 or the second special figure reservation area 126 (step S501). When the negative determination is made in step S501, this special figure fluctuation start processing is terminated as it is, and when the affirmative determination is made in step S501, the process proceeds to step S502 and data setting processing is executed.

In the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the number of pending information on the second special figure side is "0". When the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area 126 is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure is executed, and when the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area 126 is 1 or more Data setting processing for the second special figure is executed.

As already explained, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the reservation information on the special figure side is stored in either the first special figure reservation area 125 or the second special figure reservation area 126 . In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area 126 is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the reservation information on the second special figure side is stored If it is, regardless of whether the number of pieces of reservation information on the side of the first special figure is 1 or more, the reservation information on the side of the second special figure is set as the target for starting the game cycle. Thereby, when the reservation information on the special figure side is stored in both the first special figure reservation area 125 and the second special figure reservation area 126, the second special figure side corresponding to the second operation port 34 The hold information is prioritized as a game turn start target.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure reservation area 125 is moved to the execution area 127 for the special figure. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area 125b→first area 125a, third area 125c→second area 125b, fourth area 125d→third area 125c. Area 125d is cleared to "0".

After that, the second special figure flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0". The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying which of the first special figure display portion 37a or the second special figure display portion 37b the start of the current variable display is. After that, it outputs a shift command, which is information for making the sound and light side MPU 82 recognize that the data of the first special figure reservation area 125 has been shifted, and ends this data setting process. The sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92, and displays the number of pending information corresponding to the first special figure pending area 125 in the design display device 41. Change to correspond to the decrease. Also, as described above, when the number of pending information in the first special figure pending area 125 is reduced, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the first special figure pending display unit 37c , display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of reserved items.

In the data setting process for the second special figure, first, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure reservation area 126 is moved to the execution area 127 for the special figure. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area 126b→first area 126a, third area 126c→second area 126b, and fourth area 126d→third area 126c. Area 126d is cleared to "0".

After that, the second special figure flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". After that, it outputs a shift command, which is information for making the sound and light side MPU 82 recognize that the data of the second special figure reservation area 126 has been shifted, and ends this data setting process. The sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92, and displays the number of pending information corresponding to the second special figure pending area 126 in the pattern display device 41. Change to correspond to the decrease. Further, when the number of pending information in the second special figure pending area 126 is reduced as described above, the second special figure pending display unit 37d , display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of reserved items.

After the data setting process (step S502) is executed, the suitability determination process is executed (step S503). In the success/failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode success/failure table provided in the main ROM 63, the information for the success/failure determination among the information stored in the execution area 127 for the special figure, that is, the hit random number It is determined whether or not the numerical information obtained from the counter C1 matches the high-probability jackpot numerical information. Also, in the case of the low probability mode, referring to the success/failure table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 63, numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 127 for the special figure matches the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S504: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S505). In the distribution determination process, by determining whether or not the second special figure flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", the current game round is the first special figure side reservation information and the second special figure. It is determined which of the holding information on the other side corresponds to. Then, the distribution table corresponding to the determination result is divided into the distribution table for the first special figure (see FIG. 8(a)) and the distribution table for the second special figure (see FIG. 8(b)). to choose from. After selecting the distribution table, the information for distribution determination among the pending information stored in the execution area 127 for special figures, that is, the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 is the selected distribution. To grasp which kind of jackpot result corresponds in the minute table. Specifically, when the distribution table for the first special figure is selected, any one of the 10R low probability jackpot result, 2R high probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result and 10R high probability jackpot result Know if the results match. Also, when the distribution table for the second special figure is selected, grasp which jackpot result corresponds to 10R low probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result, and 10R high probability jackpot result. do.

After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S506). Specifically, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion 37a or the second special figure display portion 37b in this game round is stored in the main side ROM 63 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 64 . In the stop result table for the jackpot results, the types of the pattern modes stopped and displayed in the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. Then, in step S506, the main RAM 64 stores information on the pattern mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S505.

Information on the type of symbols to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the picture patterns may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of picture patterns may be set for each jackpot result.

After that, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S507). Specifically, the main RAM 64 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result, and in step S507, among the flags corresponding to each jackpot result type, Set the corresponding flag to "1".

When the result of the success/failure determination process is the small hit result (step S508: YES), the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S509). Specifically, information on the form of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game round is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for results, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 64 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result. After that, the small hit flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S510).

If the result of the success/failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result, the stop result setting process for the losing result is executed (step S511). Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game round is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 64 . In this case, the information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the big win result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the small win result.

After any one of steps S507, S510, and S511 is executed, processing for acquiring the variable duration period is executed (step S512). The execution period of the game cycle includes a fluctuation continuation period, which is a period from when the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to be variably displayed in the symbol display device 41 to when each symbol starts to be statically displayed, and the duration of each symbol. and a final stop period, which is a period from when the still display is started to when the still display is finished. In the variable duration period acquisition process, a process for determining the variable duration period in the execution period of the game cycle to be started this time is executed. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining a variable duration period.

If the hit/fail judgment result of this time is the big hit result or the small hit result (step S601: YES), the hit/fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result of this time become the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode. Either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, and it is determined whether or not the value of the total round number counter 64c (see FIG. 6) provided in the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value. (step S602). The total number of rounds counter 64c is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, which is the normal game state, after the occurrence of the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode, the game round is executed in the low-frequency support mode. It is a counter for the main side MPU 62 to grasp the total number of round games in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. The third reference value is the reference value with the largest number among the reference values set in a plurality of types, specifically "60". The total round number counter 64c and the third reference value will be described later in detail.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value if the result of the determination of whether or not this time and the result of the distribution determination are either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result (step S602: YES) , the longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game round from among the variable continuation periods of a plurality of types of game rounds set in the pachinko machine 10 (step S604). In other words, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value even if it is one of the 10R low probability jackpot result and the 10R high probability jackpot result, the processing of step S604 is not executed. Furthermore, even if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, if this time is any of the 5R high probability big hit result, the 2R high probability big hit result and the small hit result, the processing of step S604 is executed. not. When the process of step S604 is executed, after transmitting the command for variation including the information on the maximum period and the type command including the result of this pass/fail judgment and the result of distribution judgment to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S615 ), and the period adjustment process is executed (step S616).

If this time is neither a 10R low-probability jackpot result nor a 10R high-probability jackpot result, or if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S602: NO), the period for winning from the main ROM 63 Read the table (step S603). The winning time period table includes a first winning time period table selected when it is one of the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result and the 10R high probability jackpot result, the 2R high probability jackpot result and A period table for a second winning time, which is selected in the case of any of the small winning results, is included.

In the first winning time period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap each other. On the other hand, the information of the variation continuation period of the game round is set. In other words, in the first winning time period table, there are a plurality of types so that the variation continuation period of the game round that is one of the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result, and the 10R high probability jackpot result is relatively long or short. Each of the fluctuation type counters CS of "0 to 198" is assigned to one of the plurality of types of fluctuation continuation periods. By collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the period table for the first winning time, the information of the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information is the fluctuation of the current game round Acquired as duration information.

The first win time period table is set with a longer fluctuation continuation period than the change continuation period set in the second win time period table, the normal time period table and the shortening time period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the fluctuation duration of the game round that results in either the 10R low-probability jackpot result, the 5R high-probability jackpot result, or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is the fluctuation duration of the game round that results in either the 2R high-probability jackpot result or the small hit result , and the fluctuation continuation period can be longer than the fluctuation continuation period of the game round in which the ready-to-win display does not occur. In addition, the average fluctuation duration period according to the first winning period table is the average fluctuation duration period according to the second winning period table, the average fluctuation duration period according to the normal period table described later, and the average according to the shortening period table is longer than the fluctuation duration of Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round that results in either the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result, or the 10R high probability jackpot result is the average period of the game round that results in either the 2R high probability jackpot result or the small hit result. The fluctuation continuation period is longer than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of game rounds in which the ready-to-win display does not occur.

The fluctuation continuation period set in the period table for the first winning time is the same as the fluctuation continuation period set in the period table for reach time, which will be described later. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not a big win results after the ready-to-win display from the variation continuation period of the game cycle. However, it is not limited to this, and some of the fluctuation durations set in the period table for the first hit are longer than all fluctuation durations set in the period table for reach It is good also as a structure which is. In this case, there is a variation continuation period of game rounds in which the occurrence of the big winning result is determined. In addition, the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds according to the period table for the first hit is longer than the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds according to the period table for the ready-win period described later. Therefore, the game round with one of the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result, and the 10R high probability jackpot result continues to fluctuate more than the game round with the off-reach display that does not result in a jackpot after the reach display. The period becomes longer and easier. However, it is not limited to this, and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round according to the period table for the first winning time is the same or substantially the same as the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round according to the period table for reach time described later. They may be identical.

Here, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the period table for the first winning time. In other words, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than any of the fluctuation continuation periods of game rounds selected in other situations. Therefore, when the current time is either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result and the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the fluctuation duration of the game round becomes the longest period. .

In the second winning time period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and each of these groups On the other hand, the information of the variation continuation period of the game round is set. In other words, in the second winning time period table, a plurality of types are set so that the variation continuation period of the game round that results in either the 2R high-probability big win result or the small win result is relatively long or short. 198" are assigned to one of the plurality of types of variation duration. By collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the period table for the second winning time, the information of the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information is the fluctuation of the current game round Acquired as duration information.

The second winning time period table is set with a variable continuation period longer than the variable continuation period set in the normal period table and the shortened period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the variation continuation period of game rounds that result in either a 2R high-probability big win result or a small win result can be a longer variation continuation period than the fluctuation continuation period of game rounds in which the ready-to-win display does not occur. In addition, the average fluctuation continuation period according to the second winning time period table is longer than the average fluctuation continuation period according to the normal period table and the average fluctuation continuation period according to the shortening period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the average period of the variation continuation period of game rounds that result in either the 2R high-probability big win result or the small win result is a longer variation continuation period than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of game rounds in which the ready-to-win display does not occur.

If the hit/fail determination result this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S601: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning ready-to-win display occurs in this game round (step S605). Specifically, the information for reach determination among the information stored in the execution area 127 for the special figure, that is, the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3 is stored in advance in the main ROM 63. A reach occurrence determination table It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information set in . When the losing ready-to-win display occurs in the current game round (step S605: YES), the ready-to-win time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S606).

In the reach time period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and for each of these groups Information on the variable continuation period of game rounds is set. In other words, in the reach time period table, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game round that is displayed as a lose reach display is relatively long or short. It is assigned to one of these multiple types of variable duration. By collating the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the period table for reach time, the information of the fluctuation duration corresponding to the numerical information is the fluctuation duration of the current game round. is acquired as information of

The reach time period table is set with a longer variation continuation period than the variation continuation period set in the second win time period table, the normal time period table and the shortening time period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the variation continuation period of the game rounds with the outlier reach indication is longer than the variation continuation period of the game rounds with either the 2R high-probability jackpot result or the small win result, and the variation continuation period of the game rounds in which the reach indication does not occur. It can be of variable duration. In addition, the average fluctuation duration period by the reach time period table is the average fluctuation duration period by the second hit period table, the average fluctuation duration period by the normal period table described later, and the average fluctuation by the shortening period table It is longer than the duration period. Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game rounds with the outlier reach indication is the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game rounds with either the 2R high-probability big win result or the small win result, and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game rounds in which the reach indication does not occur The fluctuation continuation period is longer than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period. On the other hand, the fluctuation continuation period set in the period table for reach time is the same as the fluctuation continuation period set in the period table for first hit as described above, and the game times according to the period table for reach time is shorter than the average period of variation continuation period of game rounds according to the period table for the first winning time, as already explained.

If the out-reach display does not occur in this game round (step S605: NO), the current support is determined by determining whether the high-frequency support flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". It is determined whether the mode is the high frequency support mode (step S607). The high-frequency support flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 62 whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. , and the low-frequency support mode is when the high-frequency support flag is "0".

If the high-frequency support mode (step S607: YES), determine whether the number of pending information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is 3 or more ( step S608). In the high-frequency support mode, as already explained, the frequency of the general electrical role 34a of the second operation port 34 being in an open state per unit time is relatively high, so the holding information on the second special figure side is acquired. becomes easier. Furthermore, as already explained, the hold information on the side of the second special figure is given priority over the hold information on the side of the first special figure as the start target of the game cycle. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the variable continuation period of the game round is changed according to the number of the pending information on the second special figure side stored. .

When the number of the second special figure side hold information is held and stored is less than 2 (step S608: NO), the normal period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S609). In the normal period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and the game is played for each of these groups. The information of the fluctuation duration of times is set. In other words, in the normal period table, a plurality of types are set so that the variation continuation period of game rounds that do not result in a winning result and that the reach display does not occur is relatively long or short. Each of the counters CS is assigned to one of these multiple types of fluctuation durations. By collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the normal period table, the information of the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information is the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round. Acquired as information.

If the number of pieces of pending storage of the pending information on the second special figure side is two or more (step S608: YES), the shortening period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S610). In the shortening period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and the game is played for each of these groups. The information of the fluctuation duration of times is set. In other words, in the shortening period table, a plurality of types are set so that the variation continuation period of game rounds that do not result in a winning result and that the ready-to-win display does not occur is relatively long or short. Each of the counters CS is assigned to one of these multiple types of fluctuation durations. By collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step S614 described later with the shortening period table, the information of the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information is the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round. Acquired as information.

In the shortened period table, a variable continuation period shorter than the variable continuation period set in the other period tables including the normal period table is set. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, in the situation where two or more pieces of hold information on the second special figure side are held and stored, when a game cycle is started in which no winning result occurs and no ready-to-win display occurs, other situations The variation continuation period of the game times can be a shorter variation continuation period. In addition, the average fluctuation continuation period of the shortening period table is shorter than the average fluctuation continuation period of the other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, in the situation where two or more pieces of hold information on the second special figure side are held and stored, when a game cycle is started in which no winning result occurs and no ready-to-win display occurs, other situations The average period of the variation continuation period of the game times is shorter than

If the low-frequency support mode (step S607: NO), determine whether the number of pending information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is 3 or more ( step S611). In the low-frequency support mode, as already explained, the frequency of the general electrical role 34a of the second operation port 34 being in an open state per unit time is relatively low, so the holding information on the second special figure side is acquired. It becomes difficult, and it becomes easier to acquire the reservation information on the side of the first special figure than the reservation information on the side of the second special figure. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the variable continuation period of the game cycle is changed according to the number of the holding information on the first special figure side that is held and stored. .

If the number of holding information on the first special figure side is stored is less than 3 (step S611: NO), read the normal period table from the main side ROM63 (step S612), the first special figure side If the number of pending-stored pieces of pending information is three or more (step S611: YES), the shortening period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S613). The contents of the normal period table and shortened period table have already been explained.

As already described, the shortening period table includes a variable duration period shorter than the variable duration period set in the other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, in the situation where three or more pieces of hold information on the first special figure side are held and stored, if a game cycle is started in which no winning result is obtained and no ready-to-win display occurs, another situation will occur. The variation continuation period of the game times can be a shorter variation continuation period. Further, as already explained, the average fluctuation duration period according to the shortening period table is shorter than the average fluctuation duration period according to the other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, in the situation where three or more pieces of hold information on the first special figure side are held and stored, if a game cycle is started in which no winning result is obtained and no ready-to-win display occurs, another situation will occur. The average period of the variation continuation period of the game times is shorter than

If the winning time period table is read in step S603, if the reach time period table is read in step S606, if the normal period table is read in step S609, the shortening period table is read in step S610. If read, if the normal period table is read in step S612, or if the shortened period table is read in step S613, period acquisition processing is executed (step S614). In the period acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the obtained numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS against the period table read out as described above, the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is obtained.

When the process of step S604 is executed, or when the process of step S614 is executed, a variation command including information on the variation continuation period of the game round acquired this time, and a classification including the result of winning and distributing determination of this time command to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S615). Thereafter, period adjustment processing is executed (step S616). The period adjustment processing will be explained later in detail.

The variation command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the win/loss determination process, data corresponding to the result of the allocation determination process, and the variation duration of the game round. It contains data corresponding to Specifically, the upper 4-bit data of the 2-byte data sets identification data for indicating that the command itself is a variation command, and the following 4-bit data is used to perform correctness determination processing. And lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the following 1-bit data determines which reservation information out of the first special figure reservation area 125 and the second special figure reservation area 126 Trigger data is set to indicate whether it is a trigger, and the remaining 7-bit data is used to set time data corresponding to the variation continuation period of game rounds. Therefore, when the sound and light side MPU 82 receives a command for variation, it recognizes that it is a command for variation from the identification data, and obtains the result of the winning/failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. Then, from the time data, the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is recognized. Here, since the main MPU 62 selects a different variation continuation period of the game cycle depending on whether reach occurs or not, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not reach occurs, the sound and light side In the MPU 82, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the variable continuation period of game rounds. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the pass/fail judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and whether the mode is high probability mode. and data indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set. Specifically, the upper 4-bit data of the 2-byte data sets identification data for indicating that the command itself is a type command. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data is used for status recognition data indicating whether the mode is the high-probability mode and whether the mode is the high-frequency support mode. is set. Therefore, when the sound and light side MPU 82 receives a type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the winning/failure determination process and the result of the allocation determination process from the lottery result data. , whether or not the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are recognized from the state recognition data.

Both the variation command and the type command contain data corresponding to the result of the win/loss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, in the sound and light side MPU 82, by collating the lottery result data included in the variation command and the lottery result data included in the type command, noise, etc., is eliminated with respect to the reception of the variation command and the type command. It becomes possible to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. Then, when both of the lottery result data match, the effect control corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when both of the lottery result data do not match, can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound and light side MPU 82 may execute a game round operation corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game round. Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete failure may be stop-displayed on the symbol display device 41 without fail. In this case, the game cycle operation may be configured to be performed over the variation continuation period corresponding to the time data included in the variation command, and may be configured to continue until the next variation command and type command are received. good too. Note that the variation command may be configured not to include either one of the data of the result of the success/failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process, or may not include both data.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13), after executing the fluctuation duration acquisition processing in step S512, the information on the fluctuation duration of the game round acquired in the fluctuation duration acquisition processing , is set in the special special electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 64 (step S513). The update of the numerical information set in the special special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display portion of the execution target side of the game cycle of this time among the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b (step S514). After that, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (step S515). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure variation starting process to the value corresponding to the special figure variation process.

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation in step S407 in the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the fluctuation continuation period of the current game cycle has passed (step S701). If the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has not passed (step S701: NO), display update processing is executed (step S702). In the display update process, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the execution target side of the current game round of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b is executed. This regular change continues until the timing for starting the final stop display. Also, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether a winning result is obtained and whether a ready-to-win indication occurs.

If the variation continuation period of the current game round has passed (step S701: YES), a stop result display process is executed (step S703). In the display process, the display mode of the pattern on the execution target side of the current game round among the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the current game round. Specifically, at the start of the current game cycle, the stop result information stored in the main side RAM 64 is read out at step S506, step S509 or step S511 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), and the read stop The pattern corresponding to the information of the result is continuously displayed on the execution target side of the current game cycle out of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b. This display state of the design is continued until the next variation display of the design in the corresponding special figure display portions 37a and 37b is started.

After that, selection processing of the final stop period is executed (step S704). As already explained, the execution period of the game cycle is the period from when the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to be displayed variably to when the symbols start to be statically displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the variation continuation period. , and a final stop period, which is a period from the start of static display of each symbol until the end of the static display. In step S704, the final stop period, which is the latter period, is selected. Two types of periods, 0.5 seconds (first final stop period) and 3 seconds (second final stop period), are set for the pachinko machine 10 as the period for which the final stop period is to be selected. In the process, one of these two types of periods is selected as the final stop period of the current game cycle.

After that, information on the final stop period of the game round selected in step S704 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S705). As a result, measurement of the final stop period in the current game round is started.

Thereafter, a final stop command including information on the final stop period of the game round selected this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S706). By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game cycle, starts measuring the final stop period, and transmits a command corresponding to it to the display side MPU 92. On the display device 41, static display of each pattern that is the result of stopping the current game round is started. The static display continues over the final stop period of the current game cycle.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S707). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure fixing process.

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, the processing during special figure determination in step S408 in the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game cycle has passed (step S801). When a negative determination is made in step S801, the processing during this special figure determination is terminated as it is.

If the final stop period of the game round this time has passed (step S801: YES), on the condition that the success judgment result that triggered the game round this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S802: YES), a process for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, first, an opening period selection process is executed (step S803). The opening period is a period secured until the opening of the first special electric prize winning device 32 is started in the opening/closing execution mode. An opening effect indicating that the mode is started is executed. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening periods, 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period). Then, of these two types of periods, the side to be used as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode is selected.

After that, the information of the opening period selected in step S803 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S804). As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

After that, an opening command including information on the opening period selected this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S805). By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening performance corresponding to the opening period by displaying the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the unit 54 . In addition, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S806). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure fixing process to that corresponding to the special figure start processing.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result that triggered the game round this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S802: NO), the high probability flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is "0". By determining whether or not the high-frequency support flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the fact that the game round ended this time resulted in a 10R low-probability jackpot result. It is determined whether or not the game round is executed in the high-frequency support mode (step S807). The high-probability flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the lottery mode in the win-or-fail lottery is the high-probability mode in the main MPU 62, and the situation where the high-probability flag is set to "1" is the high-probability mode. A state in which the high probability flag is "0" is the low probability mode. The high-frequency support flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the main MPU 62, and the situation where the high-frequency support flag is set to "1" is high frequency. A state in which the support mode is set and the high-frequency support flag is "0" is the low-frequency support mode.

If the mode is the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode (step S807: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S808). The number-of-games counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of times the remaining games are executed in the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode. When the opening/closing execution mode is terminated with the result of the 10R low-probability jackpot result, the high-probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" and the high-frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". is set, and the game number counter of the main side RAM 64 is set to "80", which is the end reference number.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter after subtracting 1 is "0", whether or not the number of games of the end reference number has been executed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S809). When the value of the number-of-games counter is "0" (step S809: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S810). This results in a situation of the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode.

After that, the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S811). In other words, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is not cleared to "0" if the high-frequency support mode is continued even if the high-probability mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Cleared to "0" when transitioned.

When the negative determination is made in step S807, when the negative determination is made in step S809, or when the process of step S811 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S812). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the special figure variation start process.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric power start processing of step S409 in the special electric power control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening/closing execution mode has passed (step S901). If a negative determination is made in step S901, the special electric start processing is terminated as it is.

If the opening period in the opening and closing execution mode this time has passed (step S901: YES), on the condition that the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results (step S902: YES), the jackpot result Execute the time setting process.

In the setting process at the time of the big win result, the round counter provided in the main side RAM 64 is set with the value of the number of round games corresponding to the big win result this time (step S903). Specifically, if the result of this jackpot is a 2R high probability jackpot result, "2" is set in the round counter, and if the result of this jackpot is a 5R high probability jackpot result, the round counter is set. "5" is set, and "10" is set in the round counter when the current jackpot result is a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode by the main side MPU 62 .

After that, on the condition that this jackpot result is not a 2R high probability jackpot result, that is, the current jackpot result is either a 5R high probability jackpot result, a 10R low probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result (step S904: NO), setting processing to the round history counter provided in the main side RAM 64 is executed (step S905). That is, the setting process is executed when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, is executed, and is not executed when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, is executed. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is the 5R high probability jackpot result, the round history counter of the main side RAM 64 is set to "5", and the current jackpot result is the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result. If it is the result, the round history counter of the main side RAM 64 is set to "10". The value set in the round history counter is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 at the end of the current opening/closing execution mode, although the details will be described later. In this way, by adding the value of the number of rounds executed in the current opening/closing execution mode to the total round number counter 64c at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the total round number counter 64c is added to the already executed rounds. It is possible to set the total number of game execution times.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, or if the process of step S905 is executed, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S906). Winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit number of game balls have won in one round game or one opening/closing number regulation mode.

After that, reading processing of the opening duration corresponding to the jackpot result is executed (step S907). Specifically, when the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 2R high-probability jackpot result, information on the opening duration corresponding to the short-term mode is read from the main side ROM 63 . The open continuation period is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds). On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is any of the 5R high probability jackpot result, the 10R low probability jackpot result, and the 10R high probability jackpot result, the main side ROM 63 corresponds to the long-term mode. Read out the information of the open duration (29 seconds).

On the other hand, when the opening and closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the result of the small hit (step S902: NO), the setting process at the time of the result of the small hit is executed. In the setting process at the time of the small hit result, "2" is set in the open/close counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S908), and "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 (step S909). The opening/closing counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode of the opening/closing number regulation mode.

After that, reading processing of the opening duration corresponding to the small hit result is executed (step S910). The open continuation period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and specifically is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest shooting period (0.6 seconds) of the game ball. The duration of opening corresponding to the result of the small win may be longer than the duration of opening in the short-term mode and shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball. It may be substantially the same, or may be a period longer than the shortest shooting period of the game ball (ie, the first period) and shorter than the longest shooting period of the game ball (ie, the fourth period).

When the process of step S907 or step S910 is executed, the information of the read open duration is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S911). Thereby, the measurement of the open duration period is started. The open continuation period is constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. FIG. Also, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c. This makes it possible to prevent the value of the total round number counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls to be paid out triggered by the winning of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, an open setting process is executed to open the special electric winning device 32 (step S912). Also, an open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S913). The open command is a command for making the sound and light side MPU 82 recognize that it is the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effects in the opening/closing execution mode in the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54 and the pattern display device 41 accordingly.

After that, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (step S914). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric start processing to the value corresponding to the special electric open processing.

<Processing during opening of the special train>
Next, the processing during special electric transmission opening in step S410 in the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, open monitoring processing is executed (step S1001). In the open monitoring process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 in response to the winning of one game ball in the special electric winning device 32, and the value of the winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". is determined to satisfy the closing condition. Also, when the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0", that is, when the open continuation period has passed, it is also determined that the closing condition has been met.

As a result of the monitoring process during opening, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied (step S1002: YES), a closing setting process for closing the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed (step S1003). Also, the process of grasping the end condition is executed (step S1004). Specifically, if this time is the open/close execution mode triggered by any of the jackpot results, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter of the main side RAM 64, and if the value of the round counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". , it is determined that the termination condition of the current opening/closing execution mode is satisfied. In addition, if this time is the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the small hit, 1 is subtracted from the value of the opening/closing counter of the main side RAM 64, and if the value of the opening/closing counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0", the opening/closing of this time is performed. It is determined that the end condition of the execution mode is met. In addition, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the result of a small win, it is also determined that the conditions for ending the opening/closing execution mode of this time are satisfied when the value of the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0".

If the conditions for ending the open/close execution mode are not met (step S1005: NO), interval period selection processing is executed (step S1006). The interval period is a period in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is maintained in a closed state between one opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the next opening. At 54 and the pattern display device 41, an effect corresponding to the interval period is executed. Although the details will be described later, this pachinko machine 10 is set with two types of intervals, 2 seconds (first interval period) and 6 seconds (second interval period), as the period to be the target of the interval period. Then, one of these two types of periods is selected as the current interval period. Although the interval period occurs multiple times during one opening/closing execution mode, the interval period is not changed during one opening/closing execution mode, and all interval periods are constant in one opening/closing execution mode. becomes.

After that, the information of the interval period selected at step S1006 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S1007). As a result, measurement of the current interval period is started.

Thereafter, a close command including information on the interval period selected this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S1008). By receiving the close command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the current interval period and starts measuring the interval period, and executes the effect corresponding to the current interval period by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Let Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to it to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an effect corresponding to the current interval period.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1009). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric open processing to the value corresponding to the special electric closed processing.

If the condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode is satisfied (step S1005: YES), an ending period selection process is executed (step S1010). The ending period is a period secured from the end of the open state of the last special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. And the symbol display device 41 executes an ending effect indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is finished. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of periods, 6 seconds (first ending period) and 12 seconds (second ending period), which are set as the period to be the ending period. Then, one of these two types of periods is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode.

After that, the information of the ending period selected in step S1010 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S1011). As a result, the measurement of the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

Thereafter, an ending command including information on the ending period selected this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S1012). By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. It is executed by the unit 54 . Also, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

After that, 2 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1013). As a result, the value of the special special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric open processing to the value corresponding to the special electric end processing.

<Treatment during special train closure>
Next, the processing during special electric closing in step S411 in the special electric special electric control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the current interval period has elapsed (step S1101). If a negative determination is made in step S1101, the process during closing of the special electric current is terminated.

If the interval period of this time has passed (step S1101: YES), on condition that the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results (step S1102: YES), the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 is set to "10" (step S1103), and readout processing of the opening duration corresponding to the jackpot result is executed (step S1104). The content of the open duration readout process corresponding to the jackpot result is the same as step S907 in the special electric start process (FIG. 17). In addition, when the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode this time is the result of the small hit (step S1102: NO), readout processing of the opening duration corresponding to the result of the small hit is executed (step S1105). The content of the reading process of the open duration period corresponding to the small hit result is the same as step S910 in the special electric start process (FIG. 17).

When the processing of step S1104 or step S1105 is executed, the information of the read open duration is set to the special special electric train timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S1106). Thereby, the measurement of the open duration period is started. Here, the open continuation period is constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. FIG. Also, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c. This makes it possible to prevent the value of the total round number counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls to be paid out triggered by the winning of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, an open setting process for opening the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed (step S1107). Also, an open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S1108). The release command is a command for making the sound and light side MPU 82 recognize that it is time to release the special electric prize winning device 32 . By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 performs control for switching the effects in the opening/closing execution mode in the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54 and the pattern display device 41 accordingly.

After that, the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1109). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the value corresponding to the special electric open processing.

<Special call end processing>
Next, the special electric end processing of step S412 in the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has passed (step S1201). If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the special electric end processing is terminated.

When the ending period in the current open/close execution mode has passed (step S1201: YES), game state transition processing is executed (step S1202). In the game state transition process, if the hit result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 10R low-probability jackpot result, the high-probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" and the high-frequency support flag is set to "0". "1" is set, and "80", which is a value corresponding to the end reference number of times, is set in the number-of-games counter. As a result, the lottery mode in the winning lottery becomes the low-probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode with the upper limit of 80 game times. In addition, if the winning result that triggered the execution of the opening and closing execution mode this time is the 5R high probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, the high probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" and high frequency support Set "1" to the flag. As a result, the lottery mode in the winning lottery becomes the high-probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. In addition, when the hit result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 2R high probability jackpot result, the high probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" and the high frequency support flag is set to the opening/closing execution mode this time. The state before the mode is started. As a result, when the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode is started is the low-frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the win/loss lottery is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is changed. When the support mode before starting is the high-frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the lottery is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. In addition, if the win result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small win result, both the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 are set before the start of the opening/closing execution mode this time. state.

Thereafter, on condition that the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S1203: YES), the value of the round history counter of the main RAM 64 is read (step S1204), and the read value is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 (step S1205). As already explained, the round history counter of the main side RAM 64 stores the number of times of the round game that occurs in the opening and closing execution mode at the start of the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the result of the big win. value is set. Therefore, the total round number counter 64c stores the total number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode.

When a 2R high-probability jackpot result is obtained, the opening/closing execution mode as the low-frequency winning mode is executed, but the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is not added to the total round number counter 64c. In addition, when a small winning result is obtained, an opening/closing execution mode similar to the low-frequency winning mode is executed, but addition of the total round number counter 64c is not executed even in the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the total number of rounds counter 64c counts the number of executions of the round game in which game balls are substantially paid out, in other words, the player is substantially provided with a profit.

Since the addition processing to the total round number counter 64c (step S1205) is executed under the condition that the high frequency support flag is set to "1", the open/close execution mode that becomes the low frequency support mode after the completion has occurred. is not added to the total round number counter 64c. Also, as already explained, when the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in step S810 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 16), the value of the total round number counter 64c is cleared to "0". (Step S811), and the transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode is executed only in step S810 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 16). Therefore, in the total round number counter 64c, the number of round games executed in the opening and closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode that triggers the transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, and the number of round games executed in the low-probability mode after that. Then, the total number of round games executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode until the game round in the low-frequency support mode is started is stored.

When negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1205 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1206). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure special electric end processing to that corresponding to the special figure fluctuation starting processing.

<Regarding the processing configuration in the sound and light side MPU 82>
Next, each process for controlling the performance and notification in the sound and light side MPU 82 will be described.

FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed in the sound and light side MPU 82 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

First, master-side command storage processing is executed (step S1301). The master side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound and light side RAM 84 when a command is received from the master side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 84 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling the storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored and stored in the ring buffer. are sequentially read out according to the specified order.

After that, master-side command handling processing for performing processing corresponding to the command received from the master-side MPU 62 is executed (step S1302). FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing master-side command handling processing.

If the variation command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1401: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S1402). Specifically, from the information included in the variation command, information is specified as to which of the win/loss determination result and the distribution determination result are determined by the main side MPU 62 at the start of the current game cycle, A process of writing the specified information in the sound and light side RAM 84 is executed. During the memory processing, the lottery result data included in the variation command and the lottery result data included in the type command are collated, and communication of these variation commands and type commands is performed normally. It is also possible to determine whether or not communication is abnormal, and to perform notification processing and data storage processing corresponding to the communication abnormality.

Thereafter, a production pattern determination process is executed (step S1403). In the effect pattern determination process, although the details will be described later, a process for determining whether or not to perform an advance notice effect is executed, and when the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round on the pattern display device 41 ends, a stop display is performed. A stop symbol determination process for determining a stop symbol to be held is executed. Then, an effect pattern corresponding to the variation continuation period of the game round set in the command for variation, the content of the winning/failure judgment result and the allocation judgment result in the current game round, and the presence/absence of the advance notice effect is selected, and the effect pattern is selected. A data table for game round performance corresponding to is read from the sound and light side ROM 83 to the sound and light side RAM 84 . Further, when an extension command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64, the content of the data table for the game cycle performance is corrected according to the content of the extension command. . In the data table for the game round effect that is finally stored in the sound and light side RAM 84 in step S1403, the execution period of the effect is the same as the variable continuation period of the game round determined this time by the main side MPU 62. there is By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the effect of the current game round corresponding to the above effect pattern. be done.

After that, the command for playing the game is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 (step S1404). The game cycle command includes a pattern command corresponding to the data table for game cycle performance read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 in the performance pattern determination process (step S1403) and the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process. to the display side MPU 92. By receiving these commands, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to these commands from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94 . By executing display control according to the display data table, the symbol display device 41 executes the moving image display of the current game round corresponding to the stop symbol determined by the effect pattern and the stop symbol determination process. be.

If the final stop command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1405: YES), final stop processing is executed (step S1406). In the final stop processing, the final stop period of the current game cycle is grasped from the content of the final stop command, and measurement of the final stop period is started, and the data table corresponding to the final stop period is transmitted from the sound and light side ROM 83 by sound. Read out to the light-side RAM 84 . As already explained, two types of final stop periods are set: 0.5 seconds and 3 seconds. With tables. Light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, so that the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 perform an effect corresponding to the final stop period of this time. Also, the sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current final stop period to the display side MPU 92 . By receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 causes the symbol display device 41 to start static display of each symbol resulting from the stoppage of the current game cycle. The static display continues over the final stop period of the current game cycle.

If an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1407: YES), an opening process is executed (step S1408). In the opening process, the current opening period is grasped from the contents of the opening command, and the measurement of the opening period is started. As already explained, two types of opening periods, 4 seconds and 10 seconds, are set. Therefore, a data table corresponding to 4 seconds and a data table corresponding to 10 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the opening periods. there is Light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table, so that the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period. Also, the sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current opening period to the display side MPU 92 . Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94 . By executing display control according to the display data table, the symbol display device 41 executes the moving image display corresponding to the current opening period. The opening effect may be set not only in correspondence with the type of the opening period, but also in correspondence with the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the 2R high-probability big win result and the small win result have the same opening effect.

If an open command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1409: YES), an open process is executed (step S1410). In the opening process, the current opening duration is grasped from the content of the opening command, and the data table corresponding to the opening duration is read from the sound and light side ROM 83 to the sound and light side RAM 84 . As already explained, two types of open duration are set, 0.5 seconds and 29 seconds. With tables. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute an opening effect corresponding to the current open duration period. be. Also, the sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current open duration to the display side MPU 92 . Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94 . By executing display control according to the display data table, the symbol display device 41 executes the moving image display corresponding to the current open duration period. In addition, the effect during opening is not only set according to the type of open duration, but also the type of hit result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode, and the number of times the round game is executed in one opening and closing execution mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the However, even in this case, it is preferable that the 2R high-probability jackpot result and the small hit result during opening are common.

If a closing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1411: YES), a closing process is executed (step S1412). In the closing process, the current interval period is grasped from the contents of the closing command, and the data table corresponding to the interval period is read from the sound and light side ROM 83 to the sound and light side RAM 84 . Since two types of interval periods, 2 seconds and 6 seconds, are set as already explained, a data table corresponding to 2 seconds and a data table corresponding to 6 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the interval periods. there is By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the closing effect corresponding to the current interval period. . Also, the sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current interval period to the display side MPU 92 . Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94 . By executing display control according to the display data table, the pattern display device 41 executes moving image display corresponding to the current interval period. Note that the effect during closing may be set not only in correspondence with the type of the interval period, but also in correspondence with the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the 2R high-probability jackpot result and the small hit result during closing are common.

If an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1413: YES), an ending process is executed (step S1414). In the ending process, the current ending period is grasped from the content of the ending command, measurement of the ending period is started, and the data table corresponding to the ending period is read from the sound and light side ROM 83 to the sound and light side RAM 84 . As already explained, two types of ending periods, 6 seconds and 12 seconds, are set. Therefore, a data table corresponding to 6 seconds and a data table corresponding to 12 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the ending periods. there is By executing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 . Also, the sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current ending period to the display side MPU 92 . Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94 . By executing display control according to the display data table, the moving image display corresponding to the current ending period is executed on the pattern display device 41 . The ending effect may be set not only in correspondence with the type of ending period, but also in correspondence with the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the ending effects of the 2R high probability big win result and the small win result are common.

In the master side command handling process, other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S1415). In the other processing, processing for performing notification and processing for performing a demonstration effect are executed.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21), after executing the master side command handling process in step S1302, the light emission control process is executed (step S1303) and the sound output control process is executed (step S1304). In the light emission control process, a process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 is executed according to the data table stored in the sound and light side RAM 84 . In the sound output control process, a process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is executed according to the data table stored in the sound/light side RAM 84 .

<Processing Configuration for Granting Appropriate Profits to Players>
Next, a processing configuration for giving a moderate profit to the player will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the cycle setting process executed in step S306 of the firing control process (FIG. 11) in the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S1501). As already explained in the total round number counter 64c, the number of round games executed in the opening and closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode that triggers the transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, and then the low-probability mode and the total number of round games executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode until the game round in the low-frequency support mode is started is stored. The first reference value is a value larger than the number of round games executed in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result, triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result (or 10R low probability jackpot result). It is the value of the number of round games executed in the opened/closed execution mode. Specifically, it is set to "10". As a result, the value of the total round number counter 64c does not reach the first reference value when the open/close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result occurs only once in the low-frequency support mode. Further, when the open/close execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result (or 10R low probability jackpot result) occurs once in the low frequency support mode, the value of the total round number counter 64c reaches the first reference value.

In addition, the first reference value is not limited to "10", and is a value larger than the value of the number of executions of the round game in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of executions of the round game is relatively small. It is good also as a structure which is a value below the execution frequency of the round game in the opening-and-closing execution mode of high frequency prize-winning mode with relatively many execution frequency of a round game. In addition, the first reference value may be a value larger than the value of the number of executions of the round game in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of executions of the round game is relatively large, and the number of executions of the round game is relatively large. It may be a value equal to or less than the number of executions of the round game in the open/close execution mode of the low high-frequency winning mode.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the first reference value (step S1501: YES), in the first period that allows 100 game balls to be shot per minute in the shooting period area 64b of the main side RAM 64. Corresponding information is set (step S1502). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time the period elapses. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the first period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503). The second reference value is the value of the total number of round games executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result (or 10R low probability jackpot result) occurs twice, which is the first multiple times. and the total number of round games executed when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result (or 10R low-probability jackpot result) occurs three times, which is the second plurality of times. is the value of Specifically, it is set to "30". As a result, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode occurs, and the 10R low-probability jackpot result or 10R high-probability jackpot result in the subsequent high-frequency support mode. Even if the opening/closing execution mode occurs as a trigger, the value of the total round number counter 64c will not reach the second reference value. Further, in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is further generated, the value of the total round number counter 64c reaches the second reference value. In addition, the second reference value is not limited to "30", and may be less than 30 as long as it is a value larger than the first reference value and smaller than the third reference value. It may be a value greater than 30″.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables the firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1504). The second period would be the second shortest firing period, approximately 0.67 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotational operation amount is such that the second period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505). The third reference value is the value of the total number of round games executed when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result (or 10R low-probability jackpot result) occurs five times, which is the third plurality of times. and the total number of round games executed when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result (or 10R low-probability jackpot result) occurs 6 times, which is the fourth multiple times. is the value of Specifically, it is set to "60". As a result, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode occurs, and the 10R low-probability jackpot result or 10R high-probability jackpot result in the subsequent high-frequency support mode. The value of the total round number counter 64c does not reach the third reference value even if the open/close execution mode triggered by the opening and closing execution mode occurs four times. Further, in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is further generated, the value of the total round number counter 64c reaches the third reference value. The third reference value is not limited to "60", and may be less than 60 or greater than "60" as long as the value is greater than the second reference value. .

If the value of the total round number counter 64c is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that allows 80 game balls to be shot in one minute is set in the shooting cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1506). The third period will be the second longest firing period of 0.75 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c, so that the third cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the third cycle passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S1505: NO), the firing cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 is set to the fourth cycle that allows 70 game balls to be shot per minute. Corresponding information is set (step S1507). The fourth period is about 0.86 seconds, which is the longest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the fourth cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c, so that the fourth cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time the period elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the fourth cycle passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

As described above, the larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64, the longer the shooting cycle of the game ball. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of game rounds in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball is lengthened. will be. As the shooting cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, resulting in a lower frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The shooting period of the game ball becomes longer in stages as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the higher the number of occurrences The shooting cycle of game balls is lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

If the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with five round games is generated only once, the shooting period of the game ball is maintained at the shortest shooting period of 0.6 seconds. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result is executed, addition to the total round number counter 64c is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when no substantial profit is generated in relation to the provision of game balls. .

Addition to the total round number counter 64c is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shooting cycle of game balls from being suddenly delayed in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the period adjustment process executed in step S616 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the main MPU 62. FIG.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variation continuation period of the current game round (step S1601: YES), the process for extending the variation continuation period of the game round shown after step S1602 is not executed. As already explained, in the situation where the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, when a game round resulting in a big hit occurs, step S604 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) , the longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, by not executing the process for extending the variation continuation period of game rounds shown after step S1602, it is possible to extend the variation continuation period of game rounds for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the change from being accumulated and executed for the variable continuation period of one game round.

When the variation continuation period of game rounds is not the longest period (step S1601: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. (Step S1602: YES), the first extension process of the variable duration period is executed (Step S1603). Specifically, 1 second is added as the first extension period to the fluctuation duration period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation duration period acquisition process (FIG. 14). In addition, a first extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S1604). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period, and also creates a data table for game round performance in correspondence with the extension. modify the contents of This will be explained in detail later. The first reference value is "10" as already explained, and the second reference value is "30" as already explained.

When the variation continuation period of game rounds is not the longest period (step S1601: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (Step S1605: YES), the second extension processing of the fluctuation duration period is executed (Step S1606). Specifically, 2 seconds is added as a second extension period to the fluctuation duration acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). Also, a second extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S1607). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the variation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period, and also creates a data table for game round performance corresponding to the extension. modify the contents of This will be explained in detail later. Note that the third reference value is "60" as already explained.

In a situation where the variation continuation period of game rounds is not the longest period (step S1601: NO), and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S1608: YES), variation A third duration extension process is executed (step S1609). Specifically, 3 seconds is added as a third extension period to the fluctuation duration acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). Also, a third extension command indicating that the variable duration period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S1610). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the variation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period, and also creates a data table for game round performance in correspondence with the extension. modify the contents of This will be explained in detail later.

As described above, the larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game rounds executed in the high-frequency support mode. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode However, the variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer. As the variation continuation period of the game rounds becomes longer, the number of game rounds generated per unit time decreases, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The extension of the variable continuation period of game rounds is lengthened stepwise as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the higher the number of occurrences The variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game rounds per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The variation continuation period of the game round is not extended only by the occurrence of the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is five times. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of times the game is played per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result is executed, addition to the total round number counter 64c is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of restrictions on the number of game rounds per unit time, even when there is no substantial profit associated with the awarding of game balls.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern determination process executed in step S1403 of the master side command correspondence process (FIG. 22) in the sound and light side MPU 82. FIG.

First, information on the variation continuation period of the game cycle is grasped from the variation command received this time (step S1701). After that, lottery processing for notice effects is executed (step S1702). In the lottery process of the advance notice effect, it is determined by lottery whether or not to generate the notice effect in the current game round. In the advance notice performance, the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in the symbol display device 41 to form a combination of ready-to-win symbols with the same symbols, and the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. This is done in a situation where the fluctuation display of is continued. In the advance notice effect, a character image different from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed for a predetermined period. In the lottery processing of the notice performance, the lottery is executed so that the game round corresponding to the result of the big win is more likely to generate the notice performance than the game round corresponding to the result of losing.

After that, stop symbol determination processing is executed (step S1703). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is one of the 5R high probability big hit result, the 10R low probability big hit result and the 10R high probability big hit result, the same pattern is displayed on one effective line L1 to L5. is determined as the information of the current stop result. Valid lines L1 to L5 on which the same combination of symbols are stop-displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

The 5R high-probability jackpot result and the 10R high-probability jackpot result have a higher probability that the same combination of odd-numbered symbols will be stop-displayed than the 10R low-probability jackpot result. Also, the 10R high-probability jackpot result has a higher probability of stop-displaying the combination of "7" symbols than the 5R high-probability jackpot result and the 10R low-probability jackpot result. Also, if the game result of the current game cycle is the 2R high-probability big win result or the small win result, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the valid lines L1 to L5, and only one valid line L1. Information corresponding to a stop result in which a specific combination of symbols (“3, 4, 1”) is established on L5 is determined as the current stop result information. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is a loss result, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win display is specified from the content of the variation command. Then, when the ready-to-win display occurs, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols does not hold on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and on one or two of the effective lines L1 to L5 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols is established is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win display does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols do not hold on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the ready-to-win on all of the effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

After that, information on the variation continuation period of the game round set in the variation command received this time, the contents of the winning judgment result and the distribution judgment result in this game round, and the production pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the advance notice production is selected, and the data table for the game round effect corresponding to the effect pattern is read from the sound and light side ROM 83 to the sound and light side RAM 84 (step S1704). Although information on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703) is not reflected in the effect pattern, the information on the stop symbol is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 as already described. Therefore, the animation display of the current game round on the symbol display device 41 has contents corresponding to the effect pattern, and has contents corresponding to the stop symbol information determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703).

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the data table for the game round effect, which is selected when a small winning result is not obtained.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the variation continuation period of the game cycle is 2 seconds or 3 seconds, the result is not a big win, and furthermore, the announcement effect generation lottery process does not result in winning of the announcement effect. Therefore, when the variation continuation period of the game round specified in the variation command is 2 seconds, the first data table is selected as the data table for the game round effect, and the variation continuation period of the game round is 3 seconds. In some cases, the second data table is selected as the data table for the game round effect.

When the variation continuation period of game rounds is 5 seconds or longer, a plurality of data tables exist corresponding to the presence/absence of a big win result and the presence/absence of an advance notice effect. Therefore, when the variation continuation period of the game cycle specified in the variation command is 5 or more, the data table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot result and the presence or absence of the advance notice effect is selected from the corresponding plurality of data tables. be.

The 10-minute fluctuation continuation period is the longest fluctuation continuation period of game rounds in the pachinko machine 10 . As already explained, in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, when a game cycle occurs that results in either a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result, the fluctuation continues. At step S604 in the period acquisition process (FIG. 14), the longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round. And the maximum period is not selected except in that situation. Therefore, the maximum ten minute variable duration is selected only in the case of a jackpot outcome. On the other hand, even in the case of the longest period, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed and cases where it is not executed. Therefore, the n+4th data table is selected when the change duration period is 10 minutes and the advance notice effect does not occur, and the n+5th data table is selected when the change duration time is 10 minutes and the notice effect occurs. be done.

As described above, in the situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game cycle that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs. Therefore, if the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the condition that the game round in the low frequency support mode does not occur and the high frequency support mode continues, 10R low probability jackpot result and 10R The variation continuation period of the game round that results in one of the high-probability jackpot results becomes extremely long. As the variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer, it takes a long time until the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

When the variation continuation period of 10 minutes, which is the longest period, is selected, in the moving image display of the game round on the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started, and then the upper symbol row Z1. , and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. In this case, the same symbols are stop-displayed on one or two activated lines L1 to L5 in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, thereby stopping the combination of ready-to-win symbols. In this situation, the ready-to-win display is performed by continuing the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. When the advance notice effect occurs, a character corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed when the ready-to-win display is started. After that, an image showing that the combination of the ready-to-win symbols and the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are performed is reduced and displayed in the corner portion of the symbol display device 41, and the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is displayed instead. A long-term dedicated movie image, which is a real-life image along a series of stories, is displayed in substantially the entirety of 41a.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the movie image dedicated to the longest period displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), the upper right corner of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 shows a combination of ready-to-win symbols and a variable display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. An image G1 is displayed. A movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period is displayed in a large display range including the center of the display surface 41a. The movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is not displayed when the out-reach display occurs or when the reach-out display does not occur. In addition, it is not displayed even in the game times where the 5R high probability big hit result, the 2R high probability big hit result or the small hit result are obtained. Therefore, when the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period is displayed, the occurrence of the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is determined. That is, when the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period is displayed, it is determined that the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, will occur. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the display of the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period of time.

When the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, a remaining time image G3 for notifying the remaining time of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed in the upper left corner of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Is displayed. In this case, since the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period ends when the variable continuation period of the game round has passed, it can be said that the remaining time image G3 indicates the remaining time of the variable continuation period of the game round. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the fluctuation duration of the game round is the longest, the player can grasp the remaining time of the fluctuation duration of the game round. , it is possible to relieve the player's anxiety about the fact that the game cycle does not end easily.

The timing at which the display of the remaining time image G3 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b1) shows the execution period of the game cycle, and FIG. 27(b2) shows the period during which the pre-reach display is performed in which the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is not stopped. 27(b3) shows the period during which the reach display is executed, FIG. 27(b4) shows the period during which the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period is displayed, and FIG. 27(b5) shows the remaining time image G3. indicates the period for which is displayed.

At the timing of t1, the longest game round is started as shown in FIG. 27(b1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 27(b2), the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. After that, the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and at the timing of t2, the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, so that at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 27(b2). After the pre-reach display is ended, the reach display is started as shown in FIG. 27(b3).

After that, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 27(b4), the display of the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period is started, and at the timing t3, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started as shown in FIG. 27(b5). be started. Then, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 27(b3) and 27(b4), the display of the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period ends, and the ready-to-win display ends. Also, at the timing t4, the remaining time image G3 is displayed for 0 seconds, and the remaining time image G3 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 27(b5). After that, when the final stop period elapses at the timing of t5, the current game round ends as shown in FIG.

As described above, when the display of the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period is started, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode for the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, will occur by starting the display of the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period. It is possible to prevent the display of the remaining time image G3 from lowering the player's attention to the display of .

Returning to the description of the production pattern determination process (FIG. 25), after reading the data table for the game round production to the sound and light side RAM 84 in step S1704, the main side MPU 62 executes the first extension command, the second extension command and the It is determined whether or not any of the third extension commands has been received (step S1705). If any one of the first extension command, the second extension command, and the third extension command is received (step S1705: YES), extension processing of the variable duration period is executed (step S1706). In the process of extending the fluctuation duration, if the first extension command is received, the fluctuation duration of the game round grasped in step S1701 is extended by 1 second, and if the second extension command is received, For example, the fluctuation duration of the game round grasped in step S1701 is extended by 2 seconds, and if the third extension command is received, the fluctuation duration of the game round grasped in step S1701 is extended by 3 seconds. As a result, it is possible to make the variation continuation period of game rounds ascertained by the sound and light side MPU 82 the same as the variation continuation period of game rounds ascertained by the main side MPU 62 .

Thereafter, data table correction processing is executed (step S1707). In the data table correction processing, processing for correcting the contents of the data table for game round effect read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 in step S1704 in accordance with the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round is executed. Correction of the data table for game round effects will be described below.

FIGS. 28(a) to 28(c) are time charts for explaining how symbols are variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. FIG. FIG. 28(a) shows a case where the fluctuation duration of the game cycle is 5 seconds, the fluctuation display of symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped, and the ready-to-win display does not occur, and FIG. 28(b) shows the case where the game FIG. 28(c) shows a case where the fluctuation duration of a round is 2 seconds and the fluctuation display of symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time and the ready-to-win display does not occur. FIG. Second, the variable display of symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped and the ready-to-win display is generated. Also, FIGS. 28(a1), 28(b1) and 28(c1) show the period during which the symbols are displayed in the upper symbol row Z1, and FIGS. 28(a2) and 28(b2). and FIG. 28(c2) shows the period during which the symbols are varied in the middle symbol row Z2, and FIG. 28(a3), FIG. 28(b3) and FIG. It shows the period during which the variable display of the symbols is performed.

28(a1) to 28(a3), when the variation continuation period of the game cycle is 5 seconds and the variation display of symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped and the ready-to-win display does not occur, as shown in FIGS. At the timing of t1, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a becomes impossible or difficult from the appearance. done. After that, at the timing of t2 for the upper symbol row Z1, the high-speed variation display is changed to the low-speed variation display so that each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1 can be easily identified from the appearance. After that, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 28(a1), the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped. After that, for the lower symbol row Z3, the high-speed variation display is switched to the low-speed variation display so that each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in the lower symbol row Z3 can be easily identified from the appearance. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(a3), the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. After that, the medium pattern row Z2 is switched from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed in the display surface 41a in the middle pattern row Z2 can be easily identified from the appearance, and the timing of t5 is reached. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(a2), the variable display of the symbols in the medium symbol row Z2 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so that the identification of each symbol is visually impossible or difficult.

28(b1) to 28(b3), when the variation continuation period of the game cycle is 2 seconds and the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is simultaneously stopped and the ready-to-win display does not occur. At the timing of t11, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a becomes impossible or difficult from the appearance. done. After that, at the timing of t12, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that each pattern displayed in the display surface 41a in all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 can be easily identified from the appearance. After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIGS. 28(b1) to 28(b3), the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so that the identification of each symbol is visually impossible or difficult.

When the fluctuation duration of the game cycle is 20 seconds and the fluctuation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped and the ready-to-win display occurs, as shown in FIGS. 28(c1) to 28(c3). At the timing of t21, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a becomes impossible or difficult from the appearance. done. After that, at the timing of t22 for the upper symbol row Z1, the high speed variation display is changed to the low speed variation display so that each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1 can be easily identified from the appearance. After that, at the timing of t23, as shown in FIG. 28(c1), the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped. After that, for the lower symbol row Z3, the high-speed variation display is switched to the low-speed variation display so that each symbol displayed in the display surface 41a in the lower symbol row Z3 can be easily identified from the appearance. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(c3), the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. At the timing of t24, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 form a combination of the ready-to-win symbols, thereby starting the ready-to-win display. Thereafter, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that each pattern displayed in the display surface 41a in the middle pattern row Z2 can be easily identified from the appearance in the situation where the ready-to-win display is being executed, At the timing of t25, as shown in FIG. 28(c2), the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing of t21 to the timing of t22, high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so that identification of each symbol is visually impossible or difficult.

As described above, regardless of which variation continuation period is the variation continuation period of the game round, all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed for a predetermined high-speed variation display period after the start of the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. At Z3, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that identification of each pattern is visually impossible or difficult. In this case, if the variation continuation period of game rounds is extended, the high-speed variation display period is extended.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table for game round effects.

Pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable continuation period of the target game round is set in the game round production data table, and information on the content of the task is set in association with each piece of pointer information. ing. The task content information is information set to perform an effect corresponding to the current game round. Light emission control and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed.

In the data table for the game cycle effect shown in FIG. 29, data at the start of the fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "0", and the pointer information of "160" indicates the low speed in the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1. The data at the start of the variable display is set in the pointer information of "200", the data at the time of stopping the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is set in the pointer information of "300". Data at the time when the variable display of symbols is stopped in the symbol column Z3 is set, data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "400", and super ready-to-win is started in the pointer information of "700". The data of the hour is set, and the data at the time of stopping the variable display of the symbols in the medium symbol row Z2 is set in the pointer information of "1400". Data for updating the content of the presentation between each timing is set in pointer information other than these.

In such a data table for game round production, pointer information of "0" to pointer information of "160" are displayed at high speed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so that identification of each symbol is visually impossible or difficult. is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period. Therefore, when the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is extended, by adding the pointer information for the period corresponding to this extension to the range of the pointer information of "0" to the pointer information of "160", The range of pointer information corresponding to high-speed change display is increased by the period corresponding to this extension. Then, the combination of the pointer information after "161" and the corresponding task content information is shifted backward by the amount of the added pointer information. Furthermore, in the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed change display, data for continuing the effect corresponding to the high-speed change display is written in the content of the task corresponding to the added pointer information. When adding the pointer information, when the first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to one second is added to the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the main MPU 62 When the second extension command is received from the MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the third extension command is received from the main side MPU 62. If so, the pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high speed change display. As a result, the data table for the game round performance preliminarily stored in the sound and light side ROM 83 is corrected so as to correspond to the extension of the variation continuation period of the current game round.

Here, as already explained, after the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is executed in the main side command corresponding process (FIG. 22) of the sound and light side MPU 82, in the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) A pattern command corresponding to the read data table for game cycle effect and a stop result command corresponding to the stop symbol information determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703) are transmitted to the display side MPU 92 . In this case, when the data table correction processing (step S1707) is not executed in the sound and light side MPU 82, the data table for the game round effect read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 in the data table reading processing (step S1704) A pattern command in which information corresponding to is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 . Also, when the data table correction processing (step S1707) is executed in the sound and light side MPU 82, it corresponds to the data table for the game round effect read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 in the data table reading processing (step S1704). A pattern command is sent to the display side MPU 92, in which not only the information to be played but also the information corresponding to the extended period of the variation continuation period of the game round is set.

When the display-side MPU 92 receives the pattern command and the stop result command, first, in the pattern command, the data table read-out processing (step S1704) reads information corresponding to the data table for the game cycle effect read out to the sound/light RAM 84. Then, the display data table corresponding to the combination of information corresponding to the stop result command is read from the display ROM 93 to the display RAM 94 . The data structure of the display data table is basically the same as that of the data table for the game round effect, and more specifically, the pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variation continuation period of the target game round is set. Information on the content of the task is set in association with each piece of pointer information. The task content information in the display data table is information set for displaying a moving image corresponding to the current game cycle, and an image is displayed in each frame according to the task content information. It is information for performing display control of the pattern display device 41 as follows.

In this case, if the received pattern command contains information corresponding to the period in which the variation continuation period of the game cycle is extended, the data table correction processing (step S1707) in the sound and light side MPU 82 is performed. , the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed change display is increased by the period corresponding to this extension in the display data table. Then, the pointer information following the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed change display and the information of the task contents corresponding thereto are shifted backward by the amount of the added pointer information. Further, in the range of pointer information corresponding to high-speed change display, data for continuing high-speed change display is written in the content of the task corresponding to the added pointer information. When adding the pointer information, when the first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to one second is added to the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed change display, and the main MPU 62 When the second extension command is received from the MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the third extension command is received from the main side MPU 62. If so, the pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high speed change display. As a result, the display data table pre-stored in the display-side ROM 93 is corrected so as to correspond to the extension of the variation continuation period of the current game cycle.

When the fluctuation continuation period of the game cycle is extended as described above, the high-speed fluctuation display period in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed such that the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are visually impossible or difficult to identify is increased. be extended. As a result, it is possible to extend the variation continuation period of the game cycle while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the variation continuation period of the game round is extended, the data table for the game round performance preliminarily stored in the sound and light side ROM 83 is corrected corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round this time, and displayed. A data table for display stored in advance in the side ROM 93 is corrected in correspondence with the extension of the variation continuation period of the current game cycle. As a result, it is not necessary to store in the ROMs 83 and 93 in advance the data table for game round effect and the data table for display corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity of the ROMs 83 and 93 .

Next, the final stop period selection process executed in step S704 of the special figure fluctuation process (FIG. 15) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30(a).

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1801: NO), the first final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1802). The first final stop period is 0.5 seconds. When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1801: YES), the second final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1803). The second final stop period is 3 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as already explained.

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the games executed in the high-frequency support mode is lengthened. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of the game round in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode However, the final stop period of the game cycle becomes longer. As the final stop period of the game round is lengthened, the number of game rounds generated per unit time is reduced, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time is decreased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening and closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games does not extend the final stop period of the game rounds, and the opening and closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice. When the mode occurs three times, the final stop period of the game cycle is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of times the game is played per unit time.

Next, the selection processing of the opening period executed in step S803 of the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 16) in the main side MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30(b).

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1811: NO), the first opening period is selected as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S1812). The first opening period is 4 seconds. When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1811: YES), the second opening period is selected as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S1813). The second opening period is 10 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as already explained.

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode occurring in the high-frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode will be longer. Since the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is not extended even if the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the opening/closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games is performed. The opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is extended when the mode occurs three times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Next, the interval period selection process executed in step S1006 of the special electric open process (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30(c).

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1821: NO), the first interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1822). The first interval period is 2 seconds. When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1821: YES), the second interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1823). The second interval period is 6 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as already explained.

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode occurring in the high-frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low frequency support mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode will be longer. Since the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is not extended even if the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is 10 times occurs only twice, and the opening/closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is 10 times. When the mode occurs three times, the interval period of the open/close execution mode is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Addition to the total round number counter 64c is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming longer in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the ending period selection process executed in step S1010 of the special electric open process (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30(d).

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1831: NO), the first ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S1832). The first ending period is 6 seconds. When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1831: YES), the second ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S1833). The second ending period is 12 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as already explained.

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode occurring in the high-frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low frequency support mode, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode will be longer. Since the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening and closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games does not extend the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the opening and closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice. The ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is extended when the mode occurs three times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Next, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game round in the low frequency support mode, the opening and closing execution mode per unit time The manner in which the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of is generated in stages will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 31(a) shows the progress of the game state, FIG. 31(b) shows how the shooting cycle of the game ball changes, and FIG. 31(c) shows how the fluctuation duration of the game cycle is extended. 31(d) shows how the final stop period of the game round changes, and FIG. 31(e) shows how the opening period, interval period and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode change.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the low probability mode, the low frequency support mode, and the normal game state which is not the open/close execution mode, at the timing of t1, a 2R high probability jackpot result occurs, and the game cycle of t2 occurs. At the timing, the opening and closing execution mode of the round game by the low-frequency winning mode triggered by the 2R high-probability jackpot result ends twice. In this case, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is maintained at "0". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31(a), in the game state which is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode over the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. The firing cycle is maintained at the first cycle, which is the shortest firing cycle, and as shown in FIG. The final stop period of the game cycle is a relatively short first final stop period, and the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first opening period as shown in FIG. The interval period is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), at the timing of t3, which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, a 5R high probability jackpot result occurs, and at the timing of t4, the 5R high probability jackpot result. Triggered by the high-frequency winning mode, the open/close execution mode ends after five round games. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends, "5" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode that has ended this time is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. be. Therefore, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes "5" at the timing of t4. This value is less than the first reference value of "10". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31(a), in the game state which is the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode from the timing t4 to the timing t5, the game ball is shot as shown in FIG. 31(b). As for the period, the first period, which is the shortest firing period, is maintained, and as shown in FIG. The final stop period of the opening and closing execution mode is a relatively short first final stop period, and the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode is a relatively short first opening period as shown in FIG. The period is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the open/close execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), at the timing of t5, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, a 10R high probability jackpot result occurs, and at the timing of t6, the 10R high probability jackpot result. Triggered by the high-frequency winning mode, the open/close execution mode ends after 10 round games. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode ended this time is displayed in the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. is added. Therefore, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes "15" at the timing of t6. This value is equal to or greater than the first reference value of "10" and less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31(a), in the game state which is the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode over the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, the game ball is shot as shown in FIG. 31(b). The period becomes the second period which is the second shortest firing period, and as shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31(d), the final stop period of the game cycle is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31(e), the opening period of the open/close execution mode is relatively short. The first opening period, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), at the timing of t7, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, a 10R low probability big hit result occurs at the timing of t8, and the 10R low probability big hit result at the timing of t8. Triggered by the high-frequency winning mode, the open/close execution mode ends after 10 round games. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode ended this time is displayed in the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. is added. Therefore, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes "25" at the timing of t8. This value is equal to or greater than the first reference value of "10" and less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31(a), in the game state which is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode over the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the game ball is shot as shown in FIG. 31(b). The period is maintained at the second period, which is the second shortest firing period, and as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 31(d), the final stop period of the game cycle is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31(e), the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively short. The first opening period, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), at the timing of t9, which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a 10R high probability big hit result occurs at the timing of t10, and the 10R high probability big hit result at the timing of t10. Triggered by the high-frequency winning mode, the open/close execution mode ends after 10 round games. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode ended this time is displayed in the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. is added. Therefore, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes "35" at the timing of t10. This value is equal to or greater than the second reference value of "30" and less than the third reference value of "60". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31(a), in the game state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode over the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, the game ball is shot as shown in FIG. 31(b). The cycle becomes the third cycle, which is the second longest firing cycle, and as shown in FIG. As shown in 31(d), the final stop period of the game cycle is a relatively long second final stop period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a game round that results in a 10R high probability big hit result occurs at the timing of t11, and a round game with a high frequency winning mode triggered by the 10R high probability big hit result at the timing of t12. The opening/closing execution mode is completed 10 times. In this opening/closing execution mode, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes a relatively long second opening period as shown in FIG. is a relatively long second interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively long second ending period.

In the situation where the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time is regulated as described above, a game round that results in a 10R low-probability jackpot is generated, and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the game round is terminated. In the started low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode game state, the game is canceled when 80 game rounds are executed without generating a jackpot result and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. That is, when the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0", so that the shooting cycle of the game ball returns to the first cycle which is the shortest shooting cycle. , the situation returns to the situation where the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round does not occur, the final stop period of the game round returns to the relatively short first final stop period, and the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is the first relatively short period. The opening period is restored, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is restored to the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is restored to the relatively short first ending period.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64, the longer the shooting cycle of the game ball. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of game rounds in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game balls is lengthened. Become. As the game ball shooting cycle becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, resulting in a lower frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The shooting period of the game ball becomes longer in stages as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round in the low-frequency support mode occurring, the higher the number of occurrences The shooting cycle of game balls is lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

If the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency prize winning mode with five round games occurs only once, the shooting period of the game ball is maintained at the shortest shooting period of 0.6 seconds. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result is executed, addition to the total round number counter 64c is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when no substantial profit is generated in relation to the provision of game balls. .

Addition to the total round number counter 64c is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shooting cycle of game balls from suddenly becoming longer during the open/close execution mode.

The larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64, the longer the fluctuation continuation period of the game rounds executed in the high-frequency support mode. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode However, the variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer. As the variation continuation period of the game rounds becomes longer, the number of game rounds generated per unit time decreases, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The extension of the variable continuation period of game rounds is lengthened step by step as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round in the low-frequency support mode occurring, the higher the number of occurrences The variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game rounds per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The variation continuation period of the game round is not extended only by the occurrence of the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is five times. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of times the game is played per unit time.

When the variation continuation period of game rounds is changed according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, various period tables are used instead of changing the processing mode of various period tables and period acquisition processing (step S614). The variation continuation period of the game round acquired in the period acquisition process (step S614) is varied. As a result, it is possible to change the variation duration of the game round according to the value of the total round number counter 64c while not changing the processing mode of the various period tables and the period acquisition process (step S614). Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complication of the configurations of various period tables and period acquisition processing (step S614).

In the first extension process (step S1603) of the fluctuation continuation period, which is executed when the value of the total round number counter 64c is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the period acquisition process (step S614) The fixed first extension period is set to the variable continuation period of game rounds determined in the period acquisition process (step S614) regardless of the variation continuation period of game rounds determined using various period tables. to add. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration for extending the variation continuation period of game rounds. The same applies to the second extension process of the fluctuation duration period (step S1606) and the third extension process of the fluctuation duration period (step S1609).

When the variation continuation period of the game cycle is extended, the high-speed variation display period is extended so that the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are visually impossible or difficult to distinguish. As a result, it is possible to extend the variation continuation period of the game cycle while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the variation continuation period of the game round is extended, the data table for the game round performance preliminarily stored in the sound and light side ROM 83 is corrected corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round this time, and displayed. A data table for display stored in advance in the side ROM 93 is corrected in correspondence with the extension of the variation continuation period of the current game cycle. As a result, it is not necessary to store in the ROMs 83 and 93 in advance the data table for game round effect and the data table for display corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity of the ROMs 83 and 93 .

In a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game cycle resulting in either a 10R low probability jackpot result or a 10R high probability jackpot result occurs, thereby reducing the frequency. When the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high frequency support mode continues without the game round in the support mode, 10R low probability jackpot result and 10R high probability jackpot result The fluctuation continuation period of the game round that is either becomes extremely long. As the variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer, it takes a long time until the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Even in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, even if a game round resulting in either the 2R high probability big win result or the 5R high probability big win result occurs, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round The longest period is never chosen, and a period shorter than the longest period is chosen. As a result, the longest period is excessively selected as the variation continuation period of the game rounds while delaying the occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode and has the largest number of rounds, by lengthening the variation continuation period of the game rounds. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

A movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed on the pattern display device 41 in the game round in which the variation continuation period of the game round is the longest. When the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the remaining time for notifying the remaining time of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed in the upper left corner of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Image G3 is displayed. Since the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period ends when the variable continuation period of the game round has passed, it can be said that the remaining time image G3 indicates the remaining time of the variable continuation period of the game round. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the fluctuation duration of the game round is the longest, the player can grasp the remaining time of the fluctuation duration of the game round. , it is possible to relieve the player's anxiety about the fact that the game cycle does not end easily.

When the display of the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period is started, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode for the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, will occur by starting the display of the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period. It is possible to prevent the display of the remaining time image G3 from lowering the player's attention to the display of .

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the games executed in the high-frequency support mode is lengthened. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of the game round in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode However, the final stop period of the game round becomes longer. As the final stop period of the game round is lengthened, the number of game rounds generated per unit time is reduced, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time is decreased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening and closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games does not extend the final stop period of the game round, and the opening and closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice. When the mode occurs three times, the final stop period of the game cycle is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of times the game is played per unit time.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode occurring in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode will be longer. Since the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is not extended even if the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the opening/closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games is performed. The opening period of the open/close execution mode is extended when the mode occurs three times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode occurring in the high-frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low frequency support mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode will be longer. Since the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is not extended even if the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is 10 times occurs only twice, and the opening/closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is 10 times. When the mode occurs three times, the interval period of the open/close execution mode is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Addition to the total round number counter 64c is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming longer in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode occurring in the high-frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low frequency support mode, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode will be longer. Since the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening and closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games does not extend the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the opening and closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice. The ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is extended when the mode occurs three times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

The total number of rounds counter 64c includes the fluctuation continuation period of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the interval period, and the ending period, which can affect the frequency of occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time. is varied according to the value of As a result, it is possible to appropriately give a profit to the player. In particular, since the contents of a plurality of events, namely, the variation continuation period of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the interval period, and the ending period, are varied according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, When the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is varied according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, the degree of variation can be easily adjusted.

In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode ends, the number of round games generated in the opening/closing execution mode is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64, but it is limited to this. Alternatively, when the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games generated in the opening/closing execution mode may be added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM64. Further, in place of this configuration, when the game cycle that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode ends, the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode is counted as the total number of rounds counter of the main side RAM 64. 64c may be added. As a result, it is possible to start early the lengthening of the game ball shooting period, the opening period, the interval period and the ending period of the open/close execution mode according to the value of the total round number counter 64c.

In addition, the number of round games that occur in the opening and closing execution mode is mainly during the game round that triggers the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the game round starts. It may be configured to be added to the total round number counter 64 c of the side RAM 64 . As a result, it is possible to start early the lengthening of the game ball shooting period, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode according to the value of the total round number counter 64c. It becomes possible.

In addition, when a game round that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games occurring in the opening/closing execution mode is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. may be configured. As a result, the game ball firing period, the variation continuation period of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the open/close execution mode are lengthened according to the value of the total round number counter 64c. can be started early.

In addition, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is incremented by 1 each time one round game is started or each time the execution of one round game is completed in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. may be configured. As a result, when a round game is executed or when a round game is executed, it is possible to immediately reflect it in the value of the total round number counter 64c.

Further, the round game to be added to the total round number counter 64c is not limited to the round game of the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode, but the opening and closing execution mode by the low frequency winning mode and the opening and closing by the high frequency winning mode. The round game executed in any of the execution modes may be added to the total round number counter 64c.

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which all the round games in the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode are subject to addition to the total round number counter 64c, and the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode and the maximum number of rounds. The round game may be added to the total round number counter 64c, while the other round games may not be added to the total round number counter 64c. In addition, while the round game in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result is subject to addition to the total round number counter 64c, the other round games are configured not to be subject to addition to the total round number counter 64c. good too.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure with not only a long-term aspect and a short-term aspect as an opening continuation period of a round game but a medium-term aspect which becomes a period between these. In this case, among the short-term mode round game, the medium-term mode round game, and the long-term mode round game, only the number of long-term mode round games is added to the total round number counter 64c. It may be a configuration in which the number of round games that are long-term modes and round games that are medium-term modes are subject to addition to the total round number counter 64c, and the round games that are long-term modes and the medium-term mode may be added. All the number of times of the round game as a mode and the round game as a short-term mode may be added to the total round number counter 64c.

<Second embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the parameters for generating a trigger for regulating the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA. In addition, in this embodiment, the following detection sensors 142a to 149a are provided instead of the various winning detection sensors 66a to 66e in the first embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the game area PA is provided with a general prize winning port 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34 and an out port 24a. A game ball entered into any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball fired from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and supplied to the game area PA is any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a. It will be discharged from the game area PA by entering the crab. A game ball entering any one of the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a is led to the back side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 142 to 148 are formed corresponding to the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 142 to 148 flow down the discharged discharge passages 142 to 148, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 and to a discharge ball recovery section (not shown). is recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 142a to 148a for detecting game balls are provided in the discharge passages 142 to 148, respectively. These discharge passage portions 142 to 148 and detection sensors 142a to 148a will be described below. Since four general prize winning ports 31 are provided, discharge passage portions 142 to 144 are provided corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 142a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 142 corresponding to the leftmost general prize winning port 31 and the second discharge passage portion 143 corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 adjacent thereto. 143a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 142a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage portion 142, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage portion 143. A second winning hole detection sensor 143a is provided so as to exist. The game ball entering the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 142a while passing through the first discharge passage part 142, and enters the general winning hole 31 on the right side. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 143a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 143. FIG. Further, a third discharge passage portion 144 is provided so as to merge with the two general winning openings 31 on the right side. The third discharge passage portion 144 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one exit side area by joining the entrance side areas in the middle. is doing. A third winning opening detection sensor 144a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 144 . A game ball entering one of the two right-side general winning holes 31 is detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 144a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 144. - 特許庁

A fourth discharge passage portion 145 exists corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 . A special electric detection sensor 145a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 145, and the game ball entering the special electric prize winning device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage portion 145. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a. A fifth discharge passage portion 146 exists corresponding to the first operation port 33 . A first operation opening detection sensor 146a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 146, and the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 146. It is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 146a while passing through. A sixth discharge passage portion 147 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34 . A second operation opening detection sensor 147a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 147, and the game ball entering the second operation opening 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 147. It is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 147a while passing through. A seventh discharge passage portion 148 is present corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 148a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 148, and the game ball entering the out port 24a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 148. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 148a.

In addition, game balls that are detected by any one of the various detection sensors 142a to 148a are not detected by the other detection sensors 142a to 148a. A gate detection sensor 149a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 on the way down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 149a.

Electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 142a to 149a, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Various detection sensors 142a to 149a are electrically connected to the main MPU 62, and detection results of the various detection sensors 142a to 149a are output to the main MPU 62. Specifically, the various detection sensors 142a to 149a output a LOW level signal when no game ball is detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed without being limited to this.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the main side RAM 64 used for managing the payout rate. In this embodiment, the main side RAM 64 is not provided with the total round number counter 64c.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main-side RAM 64 is provided with a number-of-entered-balls area 150 . The winning ball number area 150 is provided with a general winning counter 151 , a special electric winning counter 152 , a first operation counter 153 , a second operation counter 154 , and an out counter 155 . Various counters 151 to 155 in the number-of-entered-balls area 150 count the number of entered-balls in all game states without distinguishing the game states. The full game state specifically includes a game state that is neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode, a game state that is the opening/closing execution mode, and a game state that is the high-frequency support mode.

The general prize winning counter 151 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered into the general prize winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special electric prize winning counter 152 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counter 153 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counter 154 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered into the second operation opening 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counter 155 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start timing.

Various counters 151 to 155 in the ball entry area 150 are used to count the number of game balls entering the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is closed. used. Specifically, in all game states described above, one game ball is placed in the general winning opening 31 based on the detection results of the first winning opening detecting sensor 142a, the second winning opening detecting sensor 143a, and the third winning opening detecting sensor 144a. 1 is added to the value of the general prize winning counter 151, and it is identified that one game ball has entered the special electric prize winning device 32 based on the detection result of the special electric prize winning device 145a. In this case, the value of the special electric winning counter 152 is incremented by 1, and when it is specified that one gaming ball has entered the first working opening 33 based on the detection result of the first working opening detecting sensor 146a, The value of the first operation counter 153 is incremented by 1, and when it is specified that one game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 based on the detection result of the second operation opening detection sensor 147a, the second operation The value of the counter 154 is incremented by 1, and the value of the out counter 155 is incremented by 1 when it is specified that one game ball has entered the out port 24a based on the detection result of the out port detection sensor 148a. .

The main side RAM 64 is provided with a management area 160 , a calculation area 171 and a write pointer 172 in addition to the number-of-entered-balls area 150 . Using these management area 160, calculation area 171 and write pointer 172, the payout rate for a predetermined period is calculated. The ball output rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in all game states. When the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the number-of-entered-balls area 150 are K1 to K5, the ball-out rates are as follows.

Total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "Number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K2 x "Number of winning balls in special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Prize for winning in first operation opening 33" Number of balls”+K4דNumber of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) ratio.

In the management area 160, 60 storage areas 161 to 166 are provided for storing information on the unit ball output rate when 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA. . That is, the management area 160 is provided with 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 . The 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 all have the same storage capacity, and each has a storage capacity capable of storing unit payout rate information.

The calculation area 171 calculates the information of the unit ball output rate when 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA using the values of the various counters 151 to 155 of the entering ball number area 150. used in case. The write pointer 172 is a counter for enabling the main MPU 62 to grasp the storage areas 161 to 166 to which the unit ball payout rate is written, out of the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160. be. When a new unit ball output rate is calculated by discharging 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, from the game area PA, the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 The storage areas 161 to 166 corresponding to the value of the write pointer 172 are overwritten with the new unit payout rate information, and then the value of the write pointer 172 is incremented by one. In this case, the value of the write pointer 172 takes a value of '0' to '59', and when the value of the write pointer 172 is 'n', a new unit ball is put out in the (n+1)th storage area in the management area 160. Rate information is overridden. When the value of the write pointer 172 is incremented by 1 and exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 172, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

The management area 160 is provided with 60 storage areas 161 to 166 capable of storing information on the unit ball output rate when 100 game balls, which are the predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA as described above. there is Therefore, when the information of the unit ball payout rate is stored in all of the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160, 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are released from the game area PA. Information that enables calculation of information on the target payout rate in the case of ejection is stored in the management area 160 . Each time 100 game balls, which are a predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the main side MPU 62 calculates the unit ball output rate corresponding to the discharge of the 100 game balls, In addition to overwriting the unit ball payout rate information in the storage areas 161 to 166 indicated by the write pointer 172 among the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166, the 1st to 60th storage areas immediately after the overwriting are performed. By adding the information of all the unit ball output rates stored in 161 to 166 and dividing the addition result by "60" which is the number of storage areas 161 to 166, the calculation reference number of game balls is calculated. Calculate the target payout rate. Then, the target ball payout rate area 173 provided in the main side RAM 64 is overwritten with information on the calculated target ball payout rate. In the present embodiment, information on the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is a parameter for generating a trigger for regulating the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the ball payout rate monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. Note that the payout rate monitoring process is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

If the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step S1901: NO), a ball entry management process is executed (step S1902). FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing ball entry management processing.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 142a (step S2001: YES), that is, the signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 142a switches from the LOW level to the HI level. If it is confirmed that it has changed, if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 143a (step S2003: YES), that is, the signal received from the second winning opening detection sensor 143a When it is confirmed that is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, or when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 144a (step S2005: YES), that is, the third winning hole When it is confirmed that the signal received from the detection sensor 144a has switched from LOW level to HI level, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 151 (steps S2002, S2004, S2006). Also in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection results of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 142a to 144a are monitored. When it is determined that one game ball has been detected in any of the above, a process for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the general prize winning opening 31 is executed.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a (step S2007: YES), it is confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 145a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the special electric winning counter 152 (step S2008). The detection result of the special electric detection sensor 145a is also monitored in the winning detection processing (step S209) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10). A process for making it possible to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed, and a process is executed for specifying the trigger for ending the round game.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 146a (step S2009: YES), the signal received from the first operation opening detection sensor 146a switches from the LOW level to the HI level. When the change is confirmed, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter 153 (step S2010). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection result of the first operation opening detection sensor 146a is also monitored, and one game ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 146a. When it is determined that the number of game balls corresponding to the first operation port 33 is paid out, the process is executed to identify the acquisition opportunity of the reservation information on the first special figure side. do.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operating opening detection sensor 147a (step S2011: YES), that is, the signal received from the second operating opening detecting sensor 147a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When the change is confirmed, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter 154 (step S2012). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection result of the second operation opening detection sensor 147a is also monitored, and one game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 147a. When it is determined that the number of game balls corresponding to the second operation port 34 is paid out, the process is executed to specify the acquisition opportunity of the holding information on the second special figure side. do.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 148a (step S2013: YES), that is, it is detected that the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 148a has switched from LOW level to HI level. If confirmed, 1 is added to the value of the out counter 155 (step S2014). The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 148a is not monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

By executing the ball entry management process as described above, the number of game balls entering the general prize winning opening 31 is measured using the general prize winning counter 151, and the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 is counted. The number is measured using the special electric winning counter 152, the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 is measured using the first operation counter 153, and the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 is measured. The number of balls is measured using the second operation counter 154, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured using the out counter 155. - 特許庁As a result, it becomes possible for the main MPU 62 to grasp the history of the ball entering each of the ball entering portions 24a, 31-34.

Returning to the description of the payout ball rate monitoring process (FIG. 34), when the determination in step S1901 is affirmative or when the process in step S1902 is executed, the total number of discharged balls is calculated (step S1903). In the calculation processing of the total number of discharged balls, the value of the general winning counter 151, the value of the special electric winning counter 152, the value of the first operation counter 153, the value of the second operation counter 154, and the out counter 155 in the winning ball number area 150 are calculated. Computes the sum of values. The result of the calculation becomes the current total number of ejected items. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated current total number of discharged items is equal to or greater than the predetermined unit number of "100" (step S1904). If the current total number of discharged balls is less than the predetermined unit number (step S1904: NO), the main payout rate monitoring process is terminated.

When the current total number of discharged balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined unit number (step S1904: YES), a unit payout rate is calculated (step S1905). Specifically, when the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the number-of-balls area 150 are K1 to K5,
Total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "Number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K2 x "Number of winning balls in special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Prize for winning in first operation opening 33" Number of balls"+K4.times."Number of prize balls for winning into second operation port 34")/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5). The calculation area 171 is used for this calculation.

The information of the calculated unit payout rate is overwritten in the storage areas 161 to 166 indicated by the value of the write pointer 172 among the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160 (step S1906). After that, update processing of the write pointer 172 is executed (step S1907). In the updating process, 1 is added to the value of the write pointer 172, and when the value after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 172, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

After that, the information of all the unit ball payout ratios stored in the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 in the management area 160 is added (step S1908), and the total value after the addition is calculated in the management area 160. It is divided by "60", which is the number of storage areas 161 to 166 (step S1909). Then, information of a numerical value obtained by multiplying the division result by 100 is overwritten in the target ball payout rate area 173 as information of the target ball payout rate (step S1910). The information on the target payout percentage is binary number information, but is expressed as numerical information in the range of "0%" to "999%" in decimal notation. In this case, when the target ball output rate is "100%", the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA It means that the total number of balls to be paid out is the same. When the target ball output rate is less than "100%", the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA when 6000 game balls, which are the calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA is the game ball means more than the total number of payouts. When the target ball output rate exceeds "100%", the total payout number of game balls in the case where 6000 game balls which are the calculation reference number are discharged from the game area PA is the game discharged from the game area PA It means more than the total number of spheres. After that, the general winning counter 151, the special electric winning counter 152, the first operation counter 153, the second operation counter 154, and the out counter 155 in the winning ball number area 150 are each cleared to "0" (step S1911).

By executing the payout ball rate monitoring process (FIG. 34) as described above, each time 100 game balls, which are the predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, 6000, which is the calculation reference number until then, A target ball output rate is calculated for the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. This makes it possible to calculate the target ball output rate each time a predetermined unit number of game balls are discharged from the game area PA.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing cycle setting processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is less than the first reference value (step S2101). The first reference value is set to "134%". When the value of the target ball output rate is less than the first reference value (step S2101: YES). Information corresponding to the first cycle that enables the shooting of 100 game balls per minute is set in the shooting cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2102). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the first period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value ( step S2103). The second reference value is set to "200%". When the value of the target ball output rate is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2103: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables the firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2104). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time the period elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the second cycle passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the value of the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value ( step S2105). The third reference value is set to "300%". When the value of the target ball output rate is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2105: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables the shooting of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2106). The third period will be the second longest firing period of 0.75 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, in the firing control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the firing control unit 78c, the third cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time the period elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that it does, a game ball is supplied to the game area PA each time the third period elapses.

When the value of the target ball output rate is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2105: NO). Information corresponding to the 4th cycle enabling 70 game balls to be shot in one minute is set in the shooting cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2107). The fourth period is about 0.86 seconds, which is the longest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the fourth cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the rotational operation amount is such that the fourth cycle passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

As described above, the larger the value of the target ball output rate, the longer the shooting cycle of the game ball. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of game rounds in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball is lengthened. Become. As the game ball shooting cycle becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time is reduced, resulting in a lower frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The shooting period of the game ball becomes longer in stages as the value of the target ball output rate increases. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round in the low-frequency support mode occurring, the higher the number of occurrences The shooting cycle of game balls is lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the target ball output rate is calculated when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number so far, have been discharged from the game area PA. be done. Then, the shooting cycle of the game ball is changed according to the value of the calculated target ball output rate. As a result, even during the opening/closing execution mode or during the game cycle, it is possible to appropriately change the game ball shooting cycle in accordance with the change in the value of the target ball output rate.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG.

If the hit/fail judgment result of this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S2201: YES), the hit/fail judgment result and distribution judgment result of this time will be the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode. It is determined whether or not the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result (step S2202). . The third reference value is the reference value with the largest number among the reference values set in a plurality of types, and is "300%" as already explained.

If this time is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2202: YES), this The longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game round from among the variable continuation periods of a plurality of types of game rounds set in the pachinko machine 10 (step S2204). The longest period is a period longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the period table for the first winning time, as in the first embodiment. In other words, the longest period acquired in step S2204 is longer than any of the fluctuation continuation periods of game rounds selected in other situations. Therefore, the period in which the fluctuation duration of the game cycle is the longest when the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result. becomes. When the maximum period is selected, the variation continuation period of the game cycle is not extended. The display of movie images is also the same as in the first embodiment.

In a situation where the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value as described above, when a game turn occurs that results in either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result. By selecting the longest period, if the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of game rounds in the low-frequency support mode, The variation continuation period of the game round resulting in either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result becomes extremely long. As the variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer, it takes a long time until the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

When the process of step S2204 is executed, after transmitting the command for variation including the information on the maximum period and the type command including the result of this pass/fail judgment and the result of distribution judgment to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2215 ), period adjustment processing is executed (step S2216). However, in the period adjustment process after executing the process of step S2204, extension of the variation continuation period of game rounds does not occur.

Even if this time is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, the target ball payout ratio stored in the target ball payout ratio area 173 is less than the third reference value, and the target ball payout ratio area Even if the target ball output rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, if this time is any one of the 5R high probability jackpot result, the 2R high probability jackpot result and the small hit result, in step S2203. The winning time period table is read from the main ROM 63 . The contents of the winning time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The processing contents of steps S2205 to S2213 are the same as steps S605 to S613 in the process of obtaining the fluctuation duration period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. The contents of the reach-time period table, the normal period table, and the shortening period table are also the same as those in the first embodiment.

If the winning time period table is read in step S2203, if the reach time period table is read in step S2206, if the normal period table is read in step S2209, the shortening period table is read in step S2210 If read, if the normal period table is read in step S2212, or if the shortened period table is read in step S2213, period acquisition processing is executed (step S2214). In the period acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the obtained numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS against the period table read out as described above, the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is obtained.

When the process of step S2204 is executed, or when the process of step S2214 is executed, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game round acquired this time, and the type including the win/fail determination result and distribution determination result of this time command to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2215). The data configuration of these variation commands and type commands is the same as in the first embodiment. Thereafter, period adjustment processing is executed (step S2216).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing period adjustment processing in this embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variation continuation period of the current game round (step S2301: YES), the process for extending the variation continuation period of the game round shown after step S2302 is not executed. In the situation where the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, when a game turn that results in a big win occurs, step S2204 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 37) , the longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game round. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, the processing for extending the variation duration period of game rounds shown after step S2302 is not executed. It is possible to prevent the change from being accumulated and executed for the variable continuation period of one game round.

In a situation where the variation continuation period of the game round is not the longest period (step S2301: NO), the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so (step S2302: YES), the first extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S2303). In the first extension process, similarly to step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, Add 1 second as the first extension period. In addition, a first extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2304). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the variation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period, and also creates a data table for game round performance in correspondence with the extension. modify the contents of The correction of the contents in the data table for game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. The first reference value is "134%" as already explained, and the second reference value is "200%" as already explained.

In a situation where the variation continuation period of the game round is not the longest period (step S2301: NO), and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value. If so (step S2305: YES), the second extension process of the fluctuation duration is executed (step S2306). In the second extension process, similar to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, Add 2 seconds for the second extension period. Also, a second extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2307). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period, and also creates a data table for game round performance in correspondence with the extension. modify the contents of The correction of the contents in the data table for game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Note that the third reference value is "300%" as already explained.

When the fluctuation duration of the game round is not the longest period (step S2301: NO) and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2308: YES) ), and executes the third extension process of the variable duration period (step S2309). In the third extension process, similarly to step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, Add 3 seconds as the third extension period. In addition, a third extension command indicating that the variation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2310). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the variation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period, and also creates a data table for game round performance in correspondence with the extension. modify the contents of The correction of the contents in the data table for game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

As described above, the larger the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is, the longer the variation continuation period of the game round executed in the high-frequency support mode is. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of the game round in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode However, the variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer. As the variation continuation period of the game rounds becomes longer, the number of game rounds generated per unit time decreases, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The extension of the variation continuation period of the game round is lengthened stepwise as the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 increases. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round in the low-frequency support mode occurring, the higher the number of occurrences The variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game rounds per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the target ball output rate is calculated when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number so far, have been discharged from the game area PA. be done. Then, the extension mode of the variation continuation period of the game round is changed according to the value of the calculated target ball output rate. As a result, a state in which the game cycle is repeatedly executed in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, a state in which the game cycle is repeatedly executed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, In the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, such as the normal game state, it is possible to appropriately change the extension mode of the variation duration period of the game round according to the change in the value of the target ball output rate. In this case, the extension mode of the variable duration period of the game cycle can be changed without being triggered by the start or end of the open/close execution mode.

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game cycle, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are appropriately changed. Specifically, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game round if the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is less than the second reference value. If the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected. As for the opening period of the open/close execution mode, if the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected, and the target ball payout rate area is selected. If the target ball payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected. As for the interval period of the open/close execution mode, if the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected, and the target ball payout rate area is selected. If the target ball payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected. As for the ending period of the open/close execution mode, if the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected, and the target ball payout rate area 173 is selected. If the target payout percentage stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected.

As described above, when the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game cycle, the opening period of the open/close execution mode, the interval period of the open/close execution mode, and the opening/closing Run mode ending period is longer. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game round in the low frequency support mode occurring, the opening and closing execution per unit time The mode occurs less frequently. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which various periods are changed according to the target ball payout rate, and a configuration in which various periods are changed according to any one of the following first to seventh parameters is also possible. good. Specifically, when the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the number-of-entered-balls area 150 are K1 to K5, the first to seventh parameters are as follows.
· First parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 K1 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
Second parameter: ratio of total number K2 of game balls entering special electric prize winning device 32/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
· Third parameter: the ratio of the total number K3 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
· Fourth parameter: the ratio of the total number K4 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
- Fifth parameter: (K1 x "the number of prize balls for winning to the general prize winning port 31" + K2 x "the number of prize balls for winning to the special electric prize winning device 32") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA Percentage of (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
・Sixth parameter: (K2 x “number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 x “number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34”) / total number of game balls paid out (K1 x “general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K4 x "Second operation opening 34 number of prize balls”).
・Seventh parameter: K2 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning to general prize opening 31" + K2 x "special electric prize winning device 32 + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34").

Further, the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 may be notified. Specifically, a plurality of 7-segment displays may be mounted on the main control board 61, and the target ball-out percentage stored in the target ball-out percentage area 173 may be displayed on the plurality of 7-segment displays. good. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the target payout rate. In addition, in the configuration in which any one of the first to seventh parameters is used instead of the target payout rate, the parameter to be used may be notified.

Also, the predetermined unit number is not limited to "100", and may be more than "100" or less than "100". For example, the predetermined number of units may be "1000". In this case, each of the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160 stores the information of the unit payout rate when 1000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. .

Further, the timing at which the various periods are changed according to the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is not limited to an arbitrary timing, and may be a predetermined timing. good. For example, when the opening/closing execution mode is newly started, the subsequent various periods may be changed according to the target ball payout rate. The various periods may be changed, the various subsequent periods may be changed according to the target ball payout rate when the game round is started, and the target ball payout rate may be changed when the game round is ended. A configuration in which subsequent various periods are changed according to the rate may be adopted.

<Third Embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the parameters for generating a trigger for regulating the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39(a) is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 62. FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game cycle has passed (step S2401). When the negative determination is made in step S2401, the process during this special figure determination is terminated as it is.

If the final stop period of the game round this time has passed (step S2401: YES), on condition that the success judgment result that triggered the game round this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S2402: YES), a process for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, first, an opening period selection process is executed (step S2403). Two types of periods, 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period), are set as the period to be the target of the opening period in the same manner as in the first embodiment. One of the two types of periods is selected as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode.

After that, the information of the opening period selected in step S2403 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S2404). As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

After that, an opening command including information on the opening period selected this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2405). By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening performance corresponding to the opening period by displaying the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the unit 54 . In addition, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

After that, it is determined whether or not the success/failure determination result that triggered the current game round is one of the 5R high probability big hit result, the 10R low probability big hit result, and the 10R high probability big hit result (step S2406). In other words, it is determined whether or not it is a game turn that triggers the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the value of the consecutive house counter 181 provided in the main RAM 64 is set to 1 as shown in FIG. Add (step S2407). That is, in the present embodiment, the main side RAM 64 is not provided with the total number of rounds counter 64c, and instead, the open/close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode executed without the occurrence of game rounds in the low-frequency support mode. A continuous counter 181 is provided for counting the number of times.

When the negative determination is made in step S2406 or when the process of step S2407 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is increased by 1 (step S2408). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure fixing process to that corresponding to the special figure start processing.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result that triggered the game round this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S2402: NO), the high probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support By determining whether or not the flag is "1", a low probability mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the fact that the game round ended this time resulted in a 10R low probability jackpot result and a high frequency. It is determined whether or not the game round is executed in the support mode (step S2409).

If the mode is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S2409: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter in the main RAM 64 (step S2410). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0", the number of games of the end reference number of times is executed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. (step S2411). When the value of the number-of-games counter is "0" (step S2411: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2412). This results in a situation of the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode.

Thereafter, the serial counter 181 of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2413). In other words, the value of the consecutive house counter 181 is not cleared to "0" even if the high-probability mode is changed to the low-probability mode, but is cleared to "0" when the high-frequency support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode.

When the negative determination is made in step S2409, when the negative determination is made in step S2411, or when the process of step S2413 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2414). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the special figure variation start process.

The addition process to the consecutive counter 181 (step S2407) is executed only when any one of the 5R high probability jackpot result, the 10R low probability jackpot result and the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs as described above. The support mode after the opening/closing execution mode in which any one of the 5R high probability jackpot result, the 10R low probability jackpot result and the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs is the high frequency support mode. Also, as described above, when the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in step S2412 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 39), the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is cleared to "0". , The transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in a situation that is not the opening and closing execution mode is executed only in step S2412 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 39). Therefore, when the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency prize winning mode, which triggers the shift from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, is generated, the consecutive house counter 181 is incremented by 1, and after that, the low-probability mode occurs. 1 is added when the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs before the game cycle in the low-frequency support mode is started. In other words, the consecutive game counter 181 counts the number of opening/closing execution modes in the high-frequency winning mode executed without intervening game rounds in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, even if a 2R high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the high-frequency support mode and the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the low-frequency winning mode based thereon, addition of the consecutive house counter 181 does not occur. Further, even if a small winning result is obtained in the high-frequency support mode and the same opening/closing execution mode as in the low-frequency winning mode is executed based on the result, addition of the consecutive villa counter 181 does not occur. As a result, the running counter 181 counts the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode, in which game balls are substantially paid out, in other words, a profit is substantially given to the player.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing cycle setting processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive house counter 181 of the main side RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S2501). The first reference value is set to "2". In other words, even if the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is triggered by any of the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the 10R low-probability jackpot result, and the 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, the value of the renso counter 181 is increased. It does not reach the first reference value, and in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, either the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the 10R low-probability jackpot result, or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is triggered by the high-frequency winning mode Opening and closing execution mode is generated again, the value of the consecutive house counter 181 reaches the first reference value.

If the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is less than the first reference value (step S2501: YES), it corresponds to the first cycle in which 100 game balls can be shot per minute into the shooting cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64. information is set (step S2502). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time the period elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the first period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503). The second reference value is set to "4". In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, either the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the 10R low-probability jackpot result, or the 10R high-probability jackpot result triggers the opening and closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode, and in the subsequent high-frequency support mode Triggered by any of the 5R high-probability jackpot result, 10R low-probability jackpot result, and 10R high-probability jackpot result, the open/close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs three times, and the value of the consecutive counter 181 reaches the second reference value. reach.

If the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables the firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2504). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotational operation amount is such that the second period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505). The third reference value is set to "6". In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, either the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the 10R low-probability jackpot result, or the 10R high-probability jackpot result triggers the opening and closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode, and in the subsequent high-frequency support mode 5R high probability jackpot result, 10R low probability jackpot result, or 10R high probability jackpot result is triggered by the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode occurring five times, and the value of the consecutive counter 181 reaches the third reference value. reach.

If the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that allows 80 game balls to be shot in one minute is set in the shooting cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2506). The third period will be the second longest firing period of 0.75 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c, so that the third cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time the period elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the third cycle passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

If the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2505: NO). Information corresponding to the 4th cycle enabling 70 game balls to be shot in one minute is set in the shooting cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2507). The fourth period is about 0.86 seconds, which is the longest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the fourth cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c, so that the fourth cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c each time the period elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the fourth cycle passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive game counter 181, the longer the shooting period of the game ball. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of game rounds in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball is lengthened. Become. As the shooting cycle of game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls entering the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The shooting cycle of the game ball becomes longer in stages as the value of the consecutive game counter 181 increases. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the higher the number of occurrences The shooting cycle of game balls is lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

If the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once, the shooting cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest shooting cycle. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the small win is executed, addition to the consecutive house counter 181 is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when no substantial profit is generated in relation to the provision of game balls. .

Addition to the consecutive housing counter 181 is performed before the opening/closing execution mode is started, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shooting cycle of game balls from being suddenly delayed in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, since addition to the consecutive house counter 181 is performed before the start of the opening/closing execution mode, from the start of the opening/closing execution mode, which triggers reaching each reference value, to the shooting cycle of the game ball corresponding to the reference value. Be changed. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA from the start of the opening/closing execution mode, which triggers reaching each reference value.

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 .

If the hit/fail judgment result of this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S2601: YES), the hit/fail judgment result and distribution judgment result of this time will be the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode. Either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, and it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2602). The third reference value is the reference value with the largest number among the reference values set in a plurality of types, and is "6" as already explained.

If this time is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result and the value of the renso counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2602: YES), it is set in the pachinko machine 10. The longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round from among the plurality of kinds of fluctuation continuation periods of the game round (step S2604). The longest period is a period longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the period table for the first winning time, as in the first embodiment. In other words, the longest period acquired in step S2604 is longer than any of the fluctuation continuation periods of game rounds selected in other situations. Therefore, the variation continuation period of game rounds in which the value of the consecutive counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is the longest period. When the maximum period is selected, the variation continuation period of the game cycle is not extended. The display of movie images is also the same as in the first embodiment.

As described above, in the situation where the value of the consecutive house counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game cycle that results in either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs. , If the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game round in the low frequency support mode occurring, 10R low probability jackpot result and 10R high The variation continuation period of the game rounds that result in one of the sure jackpot results becomes extremely long. As the variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer, it takes a long time until the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

When the process of step S2604 is executed, after transmitting the command for variation including the information on the longest period and the type command including the result of this pass/fail judgment and the result of distribution judgment to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2615 ), period adjustment processing is executed (step S2616). However, in the period adjustment process after executing the process of step S2604, extension of the variation continuation period of game rounds does not occur.

Even if this time is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, if the value of the consecutive counter 181 is less than the third reference value, or if the value of the consecutive counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value Even if there is, if this time is one of the 5R high probability jackpot result, the 2R high probability jackpot result and the small hit result, the period table for winning time is read from the main side ROM 63 in step S2603. The contents of the winning time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The processing contents of steps S2605 to S2613 are the same as steps S605 to S613 in the fluctuation duration acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. The contents of the reach-time period table, the normal period table, and the shortening period table are also the same as those in the first embodiment.

If the winning time period table is read in step S2603, if the reach time period table is read in step S2606, if the normal period table is read in step S2609, the shortening period table is read in step S2610 If read, if the normal period table is read in step S2612, or if the shortened period table is read in step S2613, period acquisition processing is executed (step S2614). In the period acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the obtained numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS against the period table read out as described above, the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is obtained.

When the process of step S2604 is executed, or when the process of step S2614 is executed, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game round acquired this time, and the type including the win/loss determination result and distribution determination result of this time command to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2615). The data configuration of these variation commands and type commands is the same as in the first embodiment. Thereafter, period adjustment processing is executed (step S2616).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing period adjustment processing in this embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variation continuation period of the current game round (step S2701: YES), the process for extending the variation continuation period of the game round shown after step S2702 is not executed. As already explained, when a game cycle that results in a big win occurs in a situation where the value of the consecutive house counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the current game The longest period is selected as the variable duration of the times. In this case, when the longest period is selected, the process for extending the variation continuation period of game rounds shown in step S2702 and subsequent steps is not executed, thereby prolonging the variation continuation period of game rounds. can be prevented from being cumulatively executed with respect to the variable continuation period of one game round.

If the fluctuation continuation period of game rounds is not the longest period (step S2701: NO), and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2702: YES ), the first extension process of the variable duration period is executed (step S2703). In the first extension process, similarly to step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, Add 1 second as the first extension period. In addition, a first extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2704). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period, and also creates a data table for game round performance in correspondence with the extension. modify the contents of The correction of the contents of the data table for the game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. The first reference value is "2" as already explained, and the second reference value is "4" as already explained.

If the fluctuation duration of game rounds is not the longest period (step S2701: NO) and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2705: YES ), and executes the second extension process of the variable duration period (step S2706). In the second extension process, similarly to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, Add 2 seconds for the second extension period. Also, a second extension command indicating that the variable duration period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2707). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period, and also creates a data table for game round performance in correspondence with the extension. modify the contents of The correction of the contents in the data table for game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Note that the third reference value is "6" as already explained.

In a situation where the fluctuation duration of game rounds is not the longest period (step S2701: NO) and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2708: YES), the third fluctuation duration Extension processing is executed (step S2709). In the second extension process, similar to step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, Add 3 seconds as the third extension period. In addition, a third extension command indicating that the variation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2710). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the variation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period, and also creates a data table for game round performance in correspondence with the extension. modify the contents of The correction of the contents in the data table for game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is, the longer the variation continuation period of the game rounds executed in the high-frequency support mode is. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly under the condition that the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of the game round in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode Even if it is, the variation continuation period of the game round becomes long. As the variation continuation period of the game rounds becomes longer, the number of game rounds generated per unit time decreases, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The extension of the fluctuation continuation period of game rounds is lengthened step by step as the value of the consecutive game counter 181 increases. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round in the low-frequency support mode occurring, the higher the number of occurrences The variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game rounds per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The variation continuation period of game rounds is not extended only when the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of times the game is played per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result is executed, addition to the consecutive house counter 181 is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when there is no substantial profit in relation to the provision of game balls. .

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game cycle, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are appropriately changed. Specifically, if the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game round, and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is If it is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected. As for the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected if the value of the multi-vault counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and the value of the multi-vault counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value. If so, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected. As for the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, the first interval period (two seconds) is selected if the value of the multi-station counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and if the value of the multi-station counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value. If so, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected. As for the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected if the value of the multi-vault counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and the value of the multi-vault counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value. If so, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected.

As described above, when the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game cycle, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are lengthened. . As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs repeatedly under the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game round in the low frequency support mode occurring, the opening and closing execution per unit time The mode occurs less frequently. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is started, the value of the consecutive house counter 181 of the main side RAM 64 is added, but it is not limited to this, and the opening/closing by the high-frequency winning mode is performed. The value of the consecutive game counter 181 may be incremented when the game cycle that triggers the transition to the run mode ends.

In addition, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 may be incremented before the final stop period of the game cycle is started during the game cycle that triggers the transition to the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. . As a result, it is possible to start early the lengthening of the game ball firing period, the final stop period of the game cycle, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the open/close execution mode, according to the value of the consecutive game counter 181. becomes.

Further, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 may be added when the game cycle that triggers the transition to the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is started. As a result, the lengthening of the game ball firing period, the variation continuation period of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the open/close execution mode according to the value of the consecutive game counter 181. It is possible to start early.

Further, the value of the consecutive house counter 181 may be added after the opening period is started or when the opening/closing execution mode is finished in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode.

Further, the opening/closing execution mode to be added to the consecutive house counter 181 is not limited to the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode, and the opening/closing execution mode by either the low-frequency winning mode or the high-frequency winning mode is continuously performed. It may be configured to be added to the shoe counter 181 .

In addition, all of the opening/closing execution modes in the high-frequency winning mode are not limited to the configuration in which addition to the consecutive counter 181 is performed. 181 may be added, while other opening/closing execution modes may not be added to the multi-storey counter 181 . Further, the open/close execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result may be subject to addition to the consecutive counter 181 , while other opening/closing execution modes may not be subject to addition to the consecutive counter 181 .

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for lengthening the variation continuation period of game rounds according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. FIG. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base arrangement table 182. FIG.

The base array table 182 is pre-stored in the main ROM 63 . In the base array table 182, index information is set with serial numbers starting with the minimum value "0" and the maximum value is "n", and the variable continuation period of game rounds is set corresponding to each index information. . In the base array table 182, all fluctuation durations of game rounds that can be acquired in a situation where the period adjustment processing (step S616) is not executed in the fluctuation duration acquisition processing (FIG. 14) are set, and the index information with a large value is set. A variable continuation period of a game cycle of a longer period is associated. In FIG. 43(a), index information of "0" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 2 seconds, and index information of "1" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 3 seconds. , a fluctuation duration of 15 seconds is associated with the index information of "k", a fluctuation duration of 9 minutes is associated with the index information of "n-1", and "n ” is associated with a variable duration period of 10 minutes.

When the longest period is selected as the variation duration of the game cycle at step S604 in the variation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), the index information of "n" in the base array table 182 is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. be. Further, when the period acquisition process is executed in step S614 in the fluctuation duration period acquisition process (FIG. 14), the read various period tables and the index information corresponding to the acquired variation type counter CS are mainly used. It is stored in the register of side MPU 62 . The main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the base array table 182 to grasp the variation duration of the game round. Also, this stored index information is set as data corresponding to the variation continuation period in the variation command. The same table as the base arrangement table 182 stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 83, and the sound and light side MPU 82 refers to the table to set the command for variation. To grasp the variation continuation period of the game round corresponding to the index information.

FIG. 43(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the additional arrangement table 183. As shown in FIG.

The additional array table 183 is pre-stored in the main ROM 63 . The additional array table 183 is set with index information in which the numbers are consecutive from the minimum value "0" and the maximum value is "n". The number of pieces of index information and the numerical values that can be used as the index information are the same as those of the base array table 182 .

In the additional array table 183, an additional period for extending the variation continuation period of game rounds is set corresponding to each index information. When extension of the variation continuation period of the game round is performed in the period adjustment process (step S616) in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14), at the stage before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed The additional period set in correspondence with the index information corresponding to the variable duration period of the game round in the additional arrangement table 183 is added to the acquired fluctuation duration period of the game round.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), the additional periods set in the additional array table 183 are not constant and differ according to the index information. Specifically, a longer addition period is set for index information included in a predetermined numerical range that is larger than the small numerical range than index information included in a small numerical range continuing from the minimum value. . In other words, the fluctuation duration of the game rounds included in a predetermined period range longer than the short period range is longer than the fluctuation duration period of the game rounds included in the short period range continuing from the shortest period. is set. However, 0 second is set as the additional period for the index information that is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, and substantially no additional period is set. As a result, the period is not extended with respect to the long fluctuation continuation period of the game times longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, with respect to the additional period set in the additional array table 183, an additional period of 1 second is associated with the index information of "0" and the index information of "1", and the index of "k". An additional period of 4 seconds is associated with the information, and an additional period of 0 seconds is associated with the index information of 'n−1' and the index information of 'n'.

In the period adjustment process (step S616) of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), if the condition for extending the fluctuation duration period of the game round is satisfied, the game acquired before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed By collating the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration period of times against the additional array table 183, the additional period corresponding to the index information is grasped. Then, by adding the grasped additional period to the variation continuation period of the game round in a manner corresponding to the extension condition, the main side MPU 62 grasps the variation continuation period of the current game round. Further, when the main side MPU 62 acquires the additional period, an extension command in which the additional period is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and by adding the grasped additional period to the fluctuation continuation period of the game round grasped based on the fluctuation command, the actual fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is obtained. Grasp. Further, when an additional period other than 0 second is grasped based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round presentation are corrected corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round. The correction of the contents of the data table for the game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing period adjustment processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 . Note that the period adjustment process is executed in step S616 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14).

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2801: YES), the additional array table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2802). After that, by collating the index information corresponding to the variation continuation period of the game round stored in the register of the main side MPU 62 before the current period adjustment processing (FIG. 44) against the additional array table 183, the current addition The period is grasped (step S2803). Then, based on the base array table 182 of the main-side ROM 63, the variable continuation period of the game round corresponding to the index information is read, and the additional period grasped in step S2803 is added to the read-out variable continuation period of the game round. By doing so, the variable continuation period of the current game cycle is grasped (step S2804). In this case, when the additional period is longer than 0 seconds, the variation continuation period of the game round is extended, and when the additional period is 0 second, the variation continuation period of the game round is not extended.

After that, the extension command set with the additional period grasped in step S2803 is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2805). The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the fluctuation continuation period of the game round grasped based on the fluctuation command, so that the actual fluctuation continuation of the current game round Know your duration. Further, when an additional period other than 0 second is grasped based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round presentation are corrected corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round. The correction of the contents of the data table for the game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2806: YES), the additional arrangement table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2807). After that, by collating the index information corresponding to the variation continuation period of the game round stored in the register of the main side MPU 62 before the current period adjustment processing (FIG. 44) against the additional array table 183, the current additional period is grasped (step S2808), and the grasped additional period is doubled (step S2809). Then, based on the base array table 182 of the main-side ROM 63, the variable continuation period of the game round corresponding to the index information is read, and an additional period of the result calculated in step S2809 is added to the variable continuation period of the read game round. is added to grasp the variation continuation period of the current game round (step S2810). In this case, if the additional period ascertained in step S2808 is a period longer than 0 seconds, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is extended by twice the additional period, and if the additional period is 0 seconds does not extend the variable duration of game rounds.

After that, an extension command in which the additional period calculated in step S2809 is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2811). The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the variation continuation period of the game round grasped based on the variation command, thereby realizing the actual fluctuation continuation of the current game round. Know your duration. Further, when an additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round presentation are corrected corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round. The correction of the contents in the data table for game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2812: YES), the additional arrangement table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2813). After that, by collating the index information corresponding to the variation continuation period of the game round stored in the register of the main side MPU 62 before the current period adjustment processing (FIG. 44) against the additional array table 183, the current additional period is grasped (step S2814), and the grasped additional period is tripled (step S2815). Then, based on the base array table 182 of the main-side ROM 63, the variable continuation period of the game round corresponding to the index information is read, and an additional period of the result calculated in step S2815 is added to the variable continuation period of the read game round. is added to grasp the variation continuation period of the current game round (step S2816). In this case, if the additional period ascertained in step S2814 is a period longer than 0 seconds, the variation continuation period of the game round is extended by three times the additional period, and if the additional period is 0 seconds does not extend the variable duration of game rounds.

Thereafter, an extension command in which the additional period calculated in step S2815 is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2817). The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the variation continuation period of the game round grasped based on the variation command, thereby realizing the actual fluctuation continuation of the current game round. Know your duration. Further, when an additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round presentation are corrected corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round. The correction of the contents in the data table for game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the condition for extending the variation duration of the game rounds is satisfied based on the value of the total round number counter 64c, the variation in the game rounds obtained before the execution of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44) An additional period corresponding to the duration is acquired, and the acquired additional period is added to the variable duration of the game round acquired before the execution of the period adjustment process (Fig. 44). The fluctuation duration of times is grasped. As a result, it becomes possible to extend the period corresponding to the variable duration period of the game round to be extended, and it is possible to appropriately extend the variable duration period of the game round.

When increasing the degree of extension of the variation continuation period of game rounds executed in the high-frequency support mode corresponding to the increase in the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64, By multiplying the additional period by a multiplier of 2 or more according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, the additional period is multiplied, and the multiplied additional period is obtained before executing the period adjustment process (FIG. 44). It is configured to be added to the acquired variable continuation period of game rounds. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the variation continuation period of game rounds using one additional arrangement table 183 .

It should be noted that the configuration for extending the variable continuation period of game rounds as in the present embodiment has a parameter for generating an opportunity for regulating the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time as in the second embodiment. The configuration that is the target ball payout rate, or the parameter for generating the opportunity to regulate the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time as in the third embodiment, is the number of times the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the high-frequency winning mode. You may apply to the structure which is.

In the case of applying to the second embodiment, in step S2801 in the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is the first reference value ("134%"). It is determined whether or not the above is equal to or less than the second reference value ("200%"), and in step S2806, the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is set to the second reference value ("200%"). %”) and less than a third reference value (“300%”). (“300%”) or more is determined.

When applied to the third embodiment, in step S2801 in the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value (“2”) and the second reference value (“ 4”), and in step S2806 it is determined whether the value of the renso counter 181 is greater than or equal to the second reference value (“4”) and less than the third reference value (“6”). is determined, and in step S2812, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value ("6").

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for lengthening the variation continuation period of game rounds according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. FIG. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

45(a) to 45(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to fourth base array tables 185 to 188. FIG.

All of the first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 are stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. Each of the first to fourth base array tables 185 to 188 is set with index information having a sequential number starting from the minimum value "0" and having the maximum value "n". A variable duration period of times is set.

The first base arrangement table 185 shown in FIG. 45(a) is referred to when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the first reference value. In the first base array table 185, all fluctuation durations of game rounds that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the first reference value are set. A variable continuation period of a game cycle of a longer period is associated. In the fluctuation duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS read according to the game content is sent to the main side MPU 62 are stored in the registers of When the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the first reference value, the main MPU 62 compares the index information stored in the register against the first base array table 185 to determine the variable continuation period of game rounds. Grasp. Then, a variation command in which the information of the variation continuation period of the grasped game round is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The second base arrangement table 186 shown in FIG. 45(b) is referred to when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. In the second base array table 186, all of the variable continuation periods of game rounds that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value are set. The larger the value of the index information, the longer the variation continuation period of the game round is associated. In the fluctuation duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS read according to the game content is sent to the main side MPU 62 are stored in the registers of When the value of the total round number counter 64c is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the second base array table 186. By doing so, the variation continuation period of the game round is grasped. Then, a variation command in which the information of the variation continuation period of the grasped game round is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The third base arrangement table 187 shown in FIG. 45(c) is referred to when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value. In the third base array table 187, all of the variable continuation periods of game rounds that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value are set. The larger the value of the index information, the longer the variation continuation period of the game round is associated. In the fluctuation duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS read according to the game content is sent to the main side MPU 62 are stored in the registers of When the value of the total round number counter 64c is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the third base array table 187. By doing so, the variation continuation period of the game round is grasped. Then, a variation command in which the information of the variation continuation period of the grasped game round is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The fourth base array table 188 shown in FIG. 45(d) is referred to when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value. In the fourth base array table 188, all fluctuation durations of game rounds that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value are set, and the index information of the large value is set. A variable continuation period of a game cycle of a longer period is associated. In the fluctuation duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS read according to the game content is sent to the main side MPU 62 are stored in the registers of When the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 compares the index information stored in the register against the fourth base array table 188 to determine the variable duration of game rounds. Grasp. Then, a variation command in which the information of the variation continuation period of the grasped game round is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The first base array table 185 is the shortest, and the second base array table 186 is the second shortest, when the variation continuation periods of game rounds set in the respective base array tables 185 to 188 are compared with the same index information. , the third base array table 187 is the second longest, and the fourth base array table 188 is the longest. As a result, the larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the average period of the variation continuation period of the selected game rounds.

In addition, when compared with the same index information, the increase in the variation duration period of the game rounds in each of the base array tables 185 to 188 increases as the value of the index information increases. As a result, when the longer period of the variation continuation period of game rounds in the first base arrangement table 185 is changed to the second base arrangement table 186, the third base arrangement table 187, and the fourth base arrangement table 188, It is possible to increase the amount of increase in the variation continuation period of game rounds.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 .

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S2901: YES), the first base array table 185 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2902). If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2903: YES), the second base array table 186 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2904). ). If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2905: YES), the third base array table 187 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2906). ). When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2905: NO), the fourth base array table 188 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2907).

When the process of step S2902, the process of step S2904, the process of step S2906, or the process of step S2907 is executed, the process for reading out the period table corresponding to the game content is executed (step S2908). In this process, if the current game round is a big win result or a small win result, the winning time period table is read. In addition, when the game round this time is neither the result of the big win nor the result of the small win, the process of steps S605 to S613 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, if the current game round is a big win result or a small win result, the period table for win time is read, and if the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of the win-win display, it is for reach time. The period table is read out, and if the current game round is in the high frequency support mode and the number of pieces of pending storage of the hold information on the second special figure side is less than 2, the normal period table is read out, If the current game round is in the high-frequency support mode and the number of pieces of hold information stored on the second special figure side is two or more, the shortening period table is read, and the current game round is low frequency. If the support mode is the support mode and the number of the reserve information on the first special figure side is reserved and stored is less than 3, the normal period table is read, and the current game round is the low frequency support mode and the first. If the number of reserved and stored holding information on the special figure side is 3 or more, the shortening period table is read.

In these period tables, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and game times are set for each of these groups. Index information is set instead of information on the fluctuation duration of The index information is set so that the selection mode of the variation duration period of game rounds based on each period table is the same as the selection mode of the variation duration period of game rounds based on each period table in the first embodiment. It is Therefore, 10R low-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, and 10R high-probability jackpot result. This period is longer than the average period of the continuous period and the average period of the fluctuation continuous period of the game rounds in which the ready-to-win display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds with one of the 10R low-probability jackpot result, the 5R high-probability jackpot result, and the 10R high-probability jackpot result is longer than the game round with the out-reach display. In addition, the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds resulting in either the 2R high-probability big win result or the small win result is longer than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game rounds in which the ready-to-win display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game rounds with the outlier reach display is either the 2R high-probability big hit result or the small hit result, and the fluctuation continuation of the game rounds in which the reach indication does not occur The period is longer than the average period of the period. Further, when the shortening period table is selected in the game times in which the ready-to-win display does not occur, the average period of the variation continuation period of the game times becomes shorter than when the normal period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S2908, the process of obtaining index information is executed (step S2909). In the index information acquisition process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the index information is acquired by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS against the period table read out in step S2908.

Thereafter, period acquisition processing is executed (step S2910). In the period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S2909 is collated against the base array tables 185 to 188 read out in any of steps S2902, S2904, S2906 and S2907 to obtain the current period. Acquire the variable continuation period of the game round. Information on the variation continuation period of this acquired game round is set to the special figure special electric timer counter at step S513 in special figure variation start processing (FIG. 13). As a result, measurement of the variation continuation period of game times is started. That is, in the present embodiment, since the variation duration period of the game round is acquired using the base array tables 185 to 188 corresponding to the value of the total round number counter 64c, the period for extending the variation duration period of the game round is Adjustment processing (FIG. 24) is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information of the variation duration of the game round acquired in step S2910 and the type command including the result of this winning/failure determination and the distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S2911). . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the game round based on the information set in the received fluctuation command, and controls the performance according to the grasped fluctuation continuation period of the game round. That is, in this embodiment, the sound and light side MPU 82 does not execute the process of extending the fluctuation continuation period (step S1706), and furthermore does not execute the process of correcting the data table for the game round effect (step S1707).

According to the above configuration, since the variation duration of game rounds is acquired using the base array tables 185 to 188 according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, period adjustment for extending the variation duration of game rounds is performed. Processing (FIG. 24) is not performed. Since the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round is not executed, the extension processing of the variation continuation period (step S1706) is not executed in the sound and light side MPU 82, and the correction processing of the data table for the game round effect is performed. (Step S1707) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the variation continuation period of game rounds according to the value of the total round number counter 64c while reducing the processing load.

Index information is set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS in each period table read according to the game content, and the index information is acquired based on the period table and the value of the variation type counter CS. . Depending on which one of the first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 the index information is collated, the fluctuation duration of the game round to be acquired changes even if the index information is the same. Configuration. As a result, while using a common period table, it is possible to obtain the variable continuation period of game rounds according to the value of the total round number counter 64c. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the variation continuation period of game rounds according to the value of the total round number counter 64c while suppressing an increase in the necessary storage capacity.

It should be noted that the configuration for changing the variation continuation period of the game round as in the present embodiment is replaced with a parameter for generating an opportunity for regulating the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time as in the second embodiment. The configuration that is the target ball payout rate, or the parameter for generating the opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time as in the third embodiment, is the number of times the opening and closing execution mode is executed in the high-frequency winning mode. You may apply to the structure which is.

In the case of applying to the second embodiment, in step S2901 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 46), the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is set to the first reference value ("134 %”), and in step S2903, the target ball payout percentage stored in the target ball payout percentage area 173 is equal to or greater than the first reference value (“134%”) and the second reference value. ("200%"), and in step S905, the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value ("200%"), It is determined whether it is less than the 3 reference value (“300%”).

In the case of applying to the third embodiment, in step S2901 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the first reference value (“2”). In step S2903, it is determined whether or not the value of the multi-family counter 181 is greater than or equal to the first reference value (“2”) and less than the second reference value (“4”). It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 181 is greater than or equal to the second reference value (“4”) and less than the third reference value (“6”).

<Sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for reducing the number of game rounds in the high-frequency support mode according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. FIG. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 .

If the result of the hit/fail decision this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3001: YES), the winning time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3002). The contents of the winning time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

If the hit/fail determination result this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not a win reach display occurs in this game round (step S3003). If the out-reach display occurs in the current game round (step S3003: YES), the reach-time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3004). The contents of the reach time period table are the same as in the first embodiment.

If the outreach reach display does not occur in this game round (step S3003: NO), by determining whether the high frequency support flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", It is determined whether the mode is the high frequency support mode (step S3005). If the high-frequency support mode (step S3005: YES), determine whether the number of pending information on the second special figure side that is stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is 3 or more ( step S3006). In the high-frequency support mode, as already explained, the frequency of the general electrical role 34a of the second operation port 34 being in an open state per unit time is relatively high, so the holding information on the second special figure side is acquired. becomes easier. Furthermore, as already explained, the hold information on the side of the second special figure is given priority over the hold information on the side of the first special figure as a start target of the game cycle. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the variable continuation period of the game cycle is changed according to the number of the pending information on the second special figure side stored. .

If the number of pending storage of the pending information on the second special figure side is less than 2 (step S3006: NO), the normal period table 191 (see FIG. 48 (a)) is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3007). If the number of pending storage of the pending information on the second special figure side is two or more (step S3006: YES), the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM64 is the second reference value ("30") It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied (step S3008). If the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S3008: YES), the normal period table 191 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3007). If the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the second reference value (step S3008: NO), the shortening period table 192 (see FIG. 48(b)) is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3009).

FIG. 48(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal period table 191. FIG. As shown in FIG. 48(a), in the normal period table 191, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other. , information on the variable continuation period of game rounds is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the normal period table 191, a plurality of variations are set so that the variation continuation period of the game cycle in which no winning result occurs and the ready-to-win display does not occur is relatively long or short. Each of the type counters CS is assigned to one of the plurality of types of variable continuation periods.

FIG. 48(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shortening period table 192. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 48(b), in the shortening period table 192, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other. , information on the variable continuation period of game rounds is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the shortening period table 192, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of game rounds that do not result in a winning result and that the ready-to-win display does not occur is relatively long or short. Each of the type counters CS is assigned to one of the plurality of types of variable continuation periods.

In the shortened period table 192, a variable continuation period shorter than the variable continuation period set in the other period tables including the normal period table 191 is set. Therefore, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the second reference value, in the high-frequency support mode the hold information on the second special figure side is held and stored in two or more pieces. When a game cycle in which no display occurs is started, the variation continuation period of the game cycle may be a shorter variation continuation period than in other situations. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the shortening period table 192 is shorter than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the other period tables including the normal period table 191 . Therefore, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the second reference value, in the high-frequency support mode, in the situation where two or more pieces of the hold information on the second special figure side are held and stored, the result is not hit and the reach is further reached. When a game cycle in which no display occurs is started, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game cycle is shorter than in other situations.

If the low-frequency support mode (step S3005: NO), determine whether the number of pending information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is 3 or more ( step S3010). In the low-frequency support mode, as already explained, the frequency of the general electrical role 34a of the second operation port 34 becoming open per unit time is relatively low, so the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired. It becomes difficult, and it becomes easier to acquire the reservation information on the side of the first special figure than the reservation information on the side of the second special figure. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, it is configured to change the period table referred to for determining the variable continuation period of the game round according to the number of the holding information on the first special figure side that is held and stored. .

If the number of holding information on the first special figure side is stored is less than 3 (step S3010: NO), read the normal period table 191 from the main side ROM63 (step S3011), the first special figure side is 3 or more (step S3010: YES), the shortening period table 192 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3012). The contents of the normal period table and shortened period table have already been explained.

If the winning time period table is read in step S3002, if the reach time period table is read in step S3004, if the normal period table 191 is read in step S3007, the shortening period table is step S3009 192, when the normal period table 191 is read in step S3011, or when the shortening period table 192 is read in step S3012, period acquisition processing is executed (step S3013). In the period acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the obtained numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS against the period tables 191 and 192 read out as described above, the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is obtained. Information on the variation continuation period of this acquired game round is set to the special figure special electric timer counter at step S513 in special figure variation start processing (FIG. 13). As a result, measurement of the variation continuation period of game times is started. That is, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation duration of game rounds obtained using the period tables 191 and 192 is used as it is, period adjustment processing for extending the fluctuation duration of game rounds (FIG. 24) is performed. is not executed.

Thereafter, a variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game round acquired this time and a type command including the result of winning/distribution determination of this time are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S3014). The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the game round based on the information set in the received fluctuation command, and controls the performance according to the grasped fluctuation continuation period of the game round. That is, in the present embodiment, the sound and light side MPU 82 does not execute the process of extending the fluctuation continuation period (step S1706), and furthermore does not execute the process of correcting the data table for the game round effect (step S1707).

According to the above configuration, even if the number of holding information on the second special figure side is held and stored in the high frequency support mode is 2 or more, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is the second reference value or more , Instead of the shortening period table 192, the normal period table 191 is referred to in the same way as when the number of pieces of hold information on the second special figure side that are held and stored in the high frequency support mode is less than 2. is obtained. Furthermore, the normal period table 191 is a period table that is referred to when the number of pieces of pending storage of the pending information on the first special figure side is less than three in the low frequency support mode. As a result, if the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game round occurring in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode Even if the number of pieces of hold information on the 2 special figure side that are held and stored is two or more, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is not shortened. Since the variation continuation period of game rounds is not shortened, the number of game rounds generated per unit time is reduced, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

In addition, as described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the period table selected in the situation where the number of pieces of hold information on the second special figure side is held and stored is 2 or more. Since it is configured to switch between the tables 192, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while reducing the processing load and suppressing an increase in storage capacity.

It should be noted that the configuration for changing the variation continuation period of the game round as in the present embodiment is replaced with a parameter for generating an opportunity for regulating the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time as in the second embodiment. The configuration that is the target ball payout rate, or the parameter for generating the opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode per unit time as in the third embodiment, is the number of times the opening and closing execution mode is executed in the high-frequency winning mode. You may apply to the structure which is. In the case of applying to the second embodiment, in step S3008 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 47), the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is set to the second reference value (“200 %”) or more. In the case of applying to the third embodiment, in step S3008 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 47), the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (“4”) and the third reference value It is determined whether it is less than a value ("6").

Further, in step S3008, instead of determining whether or not the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value, it may be determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than a first reference value. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is equal to or greater than the reference value, or may be configured to determine whether or not it is equal to or greater than another reference value different from the first to third reference values.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

49(a) to 49(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to third base array tables 195 to 197. FIG.

All of the first to third base array tables 195 to 197 are stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. Each of the first to third base array tables 195 to 197 is set with index information having a sequential number starting from the minimum value "0" and having the maximum value "n". A variable duration period of times is set.

In the first base array table 195 shown in FIG. 49(a), the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 5R high-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, and then the low-frequency support mode It is referred to when it is a non-restricted situation that is not a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of a game round. The first base array table 195 is set with all the variable continuation periods of game rounds that can be selected in the non-restricted state, and the larger the value of the index information, the longer the variable continuation period of the game rounds is associated. In the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration of step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS read according to the game content is sent to the main side MPU 62 are stored in the registers of In the non-restricted state, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the first base array table 195 to grasp the fluctuation duration of the game cycle. Then, a variation command in which the information of the variation continuation period of the grasped game round is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

In the second base array table 196 shown in FIG. 49(b), the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 5R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, and then the game round in the low-frequency support mode occurs. It is referred to when it is the first restricted situation in which the high-frequency support mode continues without any support. In the second base array table 196, all the variable duration periods of game rounds that can be selected in the first regulation state are set, and index information with a larger value is associated with a longer variable duration period of game rounds. . In the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration of step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game state and the fluctuation type counter CS obtained is the main side MPU 62 are stored in the registers of In the case of the first restricted state, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the second base array table 196 to grasp the variation continuation period of the game round. Then, a variation command in which the information of the variation continuation period of the grasped game round is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

In the third base array table 197 shown in FIG. 49(c), the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, and then the game round in the low-frequency support mode occurs. It is referred to when it is the second restricted situation in which the high-frequency support mode continues without any support. In the third base array table 197, all the variation duration periods of game rounds that can be selected in the second regulation situation are set, and the larger the value of the index information, the longer the variation duration period of the game rounds is associated. It is In the fluctuation duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS read according to the game state is sent to the main side MPU 62 are stored in the registers of In the case of the second restricted state, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the third base array table 197 to grasp the variation continuation period of the game round. Then, a variation command in which the information of the variation continuation period of the grasped game round is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

When the fluctuation duration of game rounds set in each of the base array tables 195 to 197 is compared with the same index information, the first base array table 195 is the shortest and the second base array table 196 is the second shortest. , the third base array table 197 is the longest. As a result, the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds to be selected is lengthened in the order of the non-restricted state, the first restricted state, and the second restricted state.

In addition, when compared with the same index information, the increase in the variation duration period of game rounds in each of the base array tables 195 to 197 increases as the value of the index information increases. As a result, the longer period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds in the first base arrangement table 195 is the variation continuation period of the game rounds in the case where the change is made to the second base arrangement table 196 and the third base arrangement table 197. It is possible to increase the increment.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing special electric end processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has passed (step S3101). If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the special electric end processing is terminated.

When the ending period in the current open/close execution mode has passed (step S3101: YES), game state transition processing is executed (step S3102). The processing content of the game state transition processing is the same as step S1202 of the special electric end processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the support mode before the current opening/closing execution mode is started is the low-frequency support mode, and the support mode after the current opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode (step S3103). A pre-start support flag is provided in the main RAM 64, and if the support mode immediately before the opening/closing execution mode is started is the low-frequency support mode, the pre-start support flag is cleared to "0" and the opening/closing execution mode is started. If the support mode immediately before the start is the high-frequency support mode, the pre-start support flag is set to "1". In step S3103, an affirmative determination is made when the pre-start support flag is "0" and the high frequency support flag is "1".

When the affirmative determination is made in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the trigger of the opening/closing execution mode of this time is the 5R high probability jackpot result (step S3104). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, the information corresponding to the second cycle enabling 90 game balls to be shot per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S3105). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotational operation amount is such that the second period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

After that, the second base array table 196 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3106). As a result, the second base array table 196 is referred to when the variable duration period of game rounds is acquired.

If a negative determination is made in step S3104, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the opening/closing execution mode of this time is the 10R high probability jackpot result (step S3107). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, information corresponding to the third cycle enabling 80 game balls to be shot in one minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3108). The third period is the longest firing period of 0.75 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c, so that the third cycle A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the third cycle passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

After that, the third base array table 197 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3109). As a result, the third base array table 197 is referred to when obtaining the variable continuation period of game rounds.

If a negative determination is made in step S3103, if the process of step S3106 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process of step S3109 is executed, the special special electric counter is cleared to "0" ( step S3110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure special electric end processing to that corresponding to the special figure fluctuation starting processing.

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 62 .

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game cycle has passed (step S3201). When the negative determination is made in step S3201, the process during this special figure determination is terminated as it is.

If the final stop period of the game round this time has passed (step S3201: YES), on condition that the success judgment result that triggered the game round this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3202: YES), a process for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, first, processing for obtaining an opening period is executed (step S3203). In this embodiment, there is one type of opening period, which is specifically set to 4 seconds.

After that, the information of the opening period acquired in step S3203 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S3204). As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

After that, an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S3205). Upon receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period and causes the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 to perform the opening effect. Also, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening effect.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S3206). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure fixing process to that corresponding to the special figure start processing.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result that triggered the game round this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3202: NO), the high probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support By determining whether or not the flag is "1", a low probability mode and a high frequency after the end of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the fact that the game round ended this time resulted in a 10R low probability jackpot result. It is determined whether or not the game round is executed in the support mode (step S3207).

If it is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3207: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S3208). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0", the number of games of the end reference number of times is executed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S3209). When the value of the number-of-games counter is "0" (step S3209: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3210). This results in a situation of the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode.

After that, the information corresponding to the first cycle that enables the shooting of 100 game balls per minute is set in the shooting cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3211). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the first period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

After that, the first base array table 195 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3212). As a result, the first base array table 195 is referred to when obtaining the variable continuation period of game rounds.

When the negative determination is made in step S3207, when the negative determination is made in step S3209, or when the process of step S3212 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3213). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the special figure variation start process.

Based on the occurrence of the 5R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is generated, resulting in the first regulation situation. In the first regulation situation, as described above, the firing cycle of the game ball is the second cycle, which is the second shortest, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game round, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game round is the second longest A second base array table 196 is referenced. Then, this first restricted state is ended and becomes a non-restricted state when a game round can be executed in the low-frequency support mode. In the non-regulated state, as described above, the shooting cycle of the game ball is the shortest first cycle, and when determining the variation continuation period of the game round, the first base arrangement table with the shortest average period of the variation continuation period of the game round 195 is referenced.

Based on the occurrence of the 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, the occurrence of the high-frequency support mode results in the second regulation situation. In the second regulation situation, as described above, the shooting period of the game ball becomes the longest third period, and when determining the fluctuation duration period of the game round, the third base arrangement having the longest average period of the fluctuation duration period of the game round Table 197 is referenced. Then, this second restricted state is terminated when a game cycle can be executed in the low-frequency support mode, and becomes a non-restricted state. In the non-regulated state, as described above, the shooting cycle of the game ball is the shortest first cycle, and when determining the variation continuation period of the game round, the first base arrangement table with the shortest average period of the variation continuation period of the game round 195 is referenced.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, a process for reading out a period table corresponding to game content is executed (step S3301). In this process, if the current game round is a big win result or a small win result, the winning time period table is read. In addition, when the game round this time is neither the result of the big win nor the result of the small win, the process of steps S605 to S613 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, if the current game round is a big win result or a small win result, the period table for win time is read, and if the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of the win-win display, it is for reach time. The period table is read out, and if the current game round is in the high frequency support mode and the number of pieces of pending storage of the hold information on the second special figure side is less than 2, the normal period table is read out, If the current game round is in the high-frequency support mode and the number of pieces of hold information stored on the second special figure side is two or more, the shortening period table is read, and the current game round is low frequency. If the support mode is the support mode and the number of the reserve information on the first special figure side is reserved and stored is less than 3, the normal period table is read, and the current game round is the low frequency support mode and the first. If the number of reserved and stored holding information on the special figure side is 3 or more, the shortening period table is read.

In these period tables, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and game times are set for each of these groups. Index information is set instead of information on the fluctuation duration of The index information is set so that the selection mode of the variation duration period of game rounds based on each period table is the same as the selection mode of the variation duration period of game rounds based on each period table in the first embodiment. It is Therefore, 10R low-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, and 10R high-probability jackpot result. This period is longer than the average period of the continuous period and the average period of the fluctuation continuous period of the game rounds in which the ready-to-win display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds with one of the 10R low-probability jackpot result, the 5R high-probability jackpot result, and the 10R high-probability jackpot result is longer than the game round with the out-reach display. In addition, the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds resulting in either the 2R high-probability big win result or the small win result is longer than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game rounds in which the ready-to-win display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game rounds with the outlier reach display is either the 2R high-probability big hit result or the small hit result, and the fluctuation continuation of the game rounds in which the reach indication does not occur The period is longer than the average period of the period. Further, when the shortening period table is selected in the game times in which the ready-to-win display does not occur, the average period of the variation continuation period of the game times becomes shorter than when the normal period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S3301, the process of obtaining index information is executed (step S3302). In the index information acquisition process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the index information is acquired by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS against the period table read out in step S3301.

Thereafter, period acquisition processing is executed (step S3303). In the period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the base array tables 195 to 197 currently read out to the main side RAM 64, thereby acquiring the variable continuation period of the current game round. do. Specifically, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the first base array table 195 read out to the main RAM 64 in the non-restricted state. In the first restricted state, the index information obtained in step S3302 is collated with the second base array table 196 read out to the main RAM 64 . In the second restricted state, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the third base array table 197 read out to the main side RAM64.

The information of the variation continuation period of the game times acquired at step S3303 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter at step S513 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13). As a result, measurement of the variation continuation period of game times is started. That is, in the present embodiment, since the variation duration of game rounds is obtained using the base array tables 195 to 197, the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) for extending the variation duration of game rounds is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information of the variation duration of the game round acquired in step S3303 and the type command including the result of this winning/failure determination and the distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S3304). . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation continuation period of the game round based on the information set in the received fluctuation command, and controls the performance according to the grasped fluctuation continuation period of the game round. That is, in this embodiment, the sound and light side MPU 82 does not execute the process of extending the fluctuation continuation period (step S1706), and furthermore does not execute the process of correcting the data table for the game round effect (step S1707).

Next, how the non-restricted state, the first restricted state, and the second restricted state are set will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Fig. 53(a) shows a period of opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result, Fig. 53(b) shows a period of opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result, Fig. 53 (c) shows a period of opening and closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result other than 5R high probability jackpot result and 10R high probability jackpot result, FIG. 53(d) shows a period of high frequency support mode, FIG. (e) shows the period of the non-restricted state, FIG. 53(f) shows the period of the first restricted state, and FIG. 53(g) shows the period of the second restricted state.

As shown in FIG. 53(e), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability big hit result is started at the timing of t1 in the non-regulation situation, and the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t2. ends. At the timing t2, the support mode changes to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d). In this case, the low-frequency support mode immediately before the opening/closing execution mode starts and the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Since neither the 5R high-probability jackpot result nor the 10R high-probability jackpot result is obtained, the non-restricted state is maintained as shown in FIG. 53(e). In addition, even if the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result or the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs in the situation of the high frequency support mode, the first regulation situation or the second regulation Non-regulatory status is maintained without transition to status. After that, at the timing of t3, the end reference number of games are completed in the high-frequency support mode, and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(e), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result is started at the timing of t4 in the non-regulated situation as shown in FIG. 53(a), and the opening/closing at the timing of t5. Run mode ends. At the timing of t5, the support mode changes to the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d). In this case, immediately before the opening/closing execution mode is started, the low-frequency support mode is set, and after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the high-frequency support mode is set. Since the 5R high-probability jackpot result is obtained, the non-restricted state is ended and the first restricted state is started as shown in FIGS. 53(e) and 53(f). In the first regulation situation, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the second cycle, which is the second shortest as described above, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game round, the average period of the fluctuation duration is the second. A longer second base array table 196 is referenced.

After that, in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues, as shown in FIG. ends. Since the 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the first regulation state is maintained. Here, the second base array table 196 is referred to in determining the variation continuation period of the game round even if the game round results in a 10R high probability jackpot in the first regulation situation.

In addition, during the period when the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, even if the support mode immediately before that was the high-frequency support mode, it will be in the low-frequency support mode, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, it will be in the high-frequency support mode again. . In the first regulation situation, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result occurs, and in the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the end reference number of game rounds are digested and the low frequency support mode. ends by transitioning to

Next, the case where the second restricted situation occurs will be described.

As shown in FIG. 53(e), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result is started at the timing of t8 in the non-regulated situation as shown in FIG. 53(b), and the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t9. ends. At the timing of t9, the support mode changes to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d). In this case, immediately before the opening/closing execution mode is started, the low-frequency support mode is set, and after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the high-frequency support mode is set. Since the result is a 10R high-probability jackpot, the non-restricted state is ended and the second restricted state is started as shown in FIGS. 53(e) and 53(g). In the second regulation situation, the shooting period of the game ball becomes the longest third period as described above, and when determining the fluctuation continuation period of the game round, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is the longest. A base array table 197 is referenced.

After that, in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. ends. Since the 5R high-probability jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the second regulation state is maintained. Here, the third base array table 197 is referred to when determining the variation continuation period of the game round even if the game round results in a 5R high probability jackpot in the second regulation situation.

In addition, during the period when the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, even if the support mode immediately before that was the high-frequency support mode, it will be in the low-frequency support mode, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, it will be in the high-frequency support mode again. . In the second regulation situation, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result occurs, and in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the end reference number of game rounds are digested and the low-frequency support mode. ends by transitioning to

According to the above configuration, the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 5R high probability jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, resulting in the first regulation situation, and the first regulation situation is the game round in the low frequency support mode. continue until a situation arises where In addition, the occurrence of the high-frequency support mode based on the occurrence of the 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode results in a second regulation situation, and the game round can be executed in the low-frequency support mode in the second regulation situation. Continue until the situation is met. In other words, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period in which the game rounds are executed in the high-frequency support mode is the type subject to regulation start, the shooting cycle of the game ball becomes longer and the game rounds fluctuate. A regulatory situation arises in which the average period of duration increases. The regulatory status continues while the advantageous period continues, and ends when the advantageous period ends. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time during the advantageous period according to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

Based on the occurrence of the 5R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode occurs, resulting in the first regulation situation, and the high-frequency support based on the occurrence of the 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode. The occurrence of the mode results in a second restricted condition in which the opening/closing execution mode occurs less frequently per unit time than in the first restricted condition. As a result, the higher the degree of advantage of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period, the lower the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time during the advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

To extend the fluctuation duration of game rounds, since the fluctuation duration of game rounds is obtained by using the base arrangement tables 195 to 197 corresponding to each of the non-regulation situation, the first regulation situation and the second regulation situation. period adjustment processing (FIG. 24) is not executed. Since the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round is not executed, the extension processing of the variation continuation period (step S1706) is not executed in the sound and light side MPU 82, and the correction processing of the data table for the game round effect is performed. (Step S1707) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds in the first regulation situation and the second regulation situation while reducing the processing load.

Index information is set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS in each period table read according to the game contents, and the index information is acquired based on the period table and the value of the variation type counter CS. . Depending on which one of the first to third base array tables 195 to 197 the index information is collated, the fluctuation duration of the game round to be acquired changes even if the index information is the same. Configuration. As a result, it is possible to acquire the fluctuation duration of game rounds according to each of the non-restricted status, the first restricted status, and the second restricted status, while using a common period table. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the variation continuation period of the game rounds in the first and second regulation situations while suppressing an increase in the necessary storage capacity.

At least one of the final stop period of the game cycle, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode may be changed depending on the non-restricted status, the first restricted status, and the second restricted status. It is good also as a different structure. For example, in the non-regulated state, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game round, and in the first regulation state, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game round. is selected, and the third final stop period (5 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game cycle if the second regulation state is established. In the non-restricted state, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, and in the first restriction state, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode. , the third opening period (16 seconds) may be selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode in the second regulation situation. In the non-restricted state, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected as the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and in the first restricted state, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected as the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode. , the third interval period (10 seconds) may be selected as the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode in the second regulation situation. In the non-restricted state, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected as the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, and in the first restricted state, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected as the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. , the third ending period (18 seconds) may be selected as the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode in the second regulation situation.

As described above, the first restriction state or the second restriction state lengthens the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time during the advantageous period according to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game cycle has passed (step S3401). When the negative determination is made in step S3401, the process during this special figure determination is terminated as it is.

If the final stop period of the game round this time has passed (step S3401: YES), on condition that the success judgment result that triggered the game round this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3402: YES), a process for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, first, processing for obtaining an opening period is executed (step S3403). In this embodiment, there is one type of opening period, which is specifically set to 4 seconds.

After that, the information of the opening period acquired in step S3403 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S3404). As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

After that, an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S3405). Upon receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period and causes the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 to perform the opening effect. Also, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening performance.

After that, on the condition that the hit result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is either the 5R high probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result (step S3406: YES), the firing cycle area of the main side RAM 64 Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables 90 game balls to be shot per minute is set in 64b (step S3407). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the longest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotational operation amount is such that the second period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

When negative determination is made in step S3406, or when the process of step S3407 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is increased by 1 (step S3408). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure fixing process to that corresponding to the special figure start processing.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result that triggered the game round this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3402: NO), the high probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support By determining whether or not the flag is "1", a low probability mode and a high frequency after the end of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the fact that the game round ended this time resulted in a 10R low probability jackpot result. It is determined whether or not the game round is executed in the support mode (step S3409).

If the mode is the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode (step S3409: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter in the main RAM 64 (step S3410). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0", the number of games of the end reference number of times is executed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. (step S3411). When the value of the number-of-games counter is "0" (step S3411: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3412). This results in a situation of the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode.

After that, the information corresponding to the first period that enables the shooting of 100 game balls per minute is set in the shooting period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3413). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the first period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

When the negative determination is made in step S3409, when the negative determination is made in step S3411, or when the process of step S3413 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3414). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the special figure variation start process.

With the above configuration, the game ball launch cycle becomes the longest second cycle based on the occurrence of the 5R high probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result in the low frequency support mode. Then, this regulation situation is ended when the game round can be executed in the low-frequency support mode. By canceling the regulated state, the shooting period of the game ball becomes the shortest first period. In other words, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period in which the game round is executed in the high-frequency support mode is the type subject to regulation start, the shooting cycle of the game ball is lengthened. The regulatory status continues while the advantageous period continues, and ends when the advantageous period ends. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time during the advantageous period triggered by the result of the big win, which is the type of regulation to be started.

In the low-frequency support mode, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode is started. As a result, it becomes possible to lengthen the shooting cycle of the game ball from the start of the opening/closing execution mode, which is the trigger for setting the regulation state, and to slow down the progress speed of the opening/closing execution mode.

When the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 10R low-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, the above regulation situation does not occur. As a result, the regulation situation described above occurs under the condition that the opening/closing execution mode is followed by the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time is excessively regulated. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a thing.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the small win is executed in the low-frequency support mode, the regulation situation does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when no substantial profit is generated in relation to the provision of game balls. .

<Ninth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 62 .

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game cycle has passed (step S3501). When the negative determination is made in step S3501, the process during this special figure determination is terminated as it is.

If the final stop period of the game round this time has passed (step S3501: YES), on condition that the success judgment result that triggered the game round this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3502: YES), a process for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, first, processing for obtaining an opening period is executed (step S3503). In this embodiment, there is one type of opening period, which is specifically set to 4 seconds.

After that, the information of the opening period acquired in step S3503 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S3504). As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

After that, an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S3505). Upon receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period and causes the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 to perform the opening effect. Also, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening performance.

After that, on condition that the opening and closing execution mode that occurs this time is the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result (step S3506: YES), that is, the high frequency winning mode and the most rounds On the condition that the number of open/close execution modes is generated, information corresponding to the second cycle enabling 90 game balls to be shot per minute is set in the shooting cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S3507). . The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the longest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotational operation amount is such that the second period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

When negative determination is made in step S3506 or when the process of step S3507 is executed, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S3508). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure fixing process to that corresponding to the special figure start processing.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result that triggered the game round this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3502: NO), the high probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support By determining whether or not the flag is "1", a low probability mode and a high frequency after the end of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the fact that the game round ended this time resulted in a 10R low probability jackpot result. It is determined whether or not the game round is executed in the support mode (step S3509).

If the mode is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3509: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter in the main side RAM 64 (step S3510). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0", the number of games of the end reference number of times is executed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. (step S3511). When the value of the number-of-games counter is "0" (step S3511: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3512). This results in a situation of the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode.

When the negative determination is made in step S3509, when the negative determination is made in step S3511, or when the process of step S3512 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3513). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the special figure variation start process.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing special electric end processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the opening and closing execution mode of this time has passed (step S3601). If a negative determination is made in step S3601, the special electric end processing is terminated.

When the ending period in the current open/close execution mode has passed (step S3601: YES), game state transition processing is executed (step S3602). The processing contents of the game state transition processing are the same as step S1202 of the special electric end processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, the information corresponding to the first period that enables the shooting of 100 game balls per minute is set in the shooting period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3603). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the first period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3604). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure special electric end processing to that corresponding to the special figure fluctuation starting processing.

With the above configuration, when the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of the jackpot, which is the type to be regulated, the shooting period of the game ball becomes the longest second period. Then, this restricted state is terminated when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated. By canceling the regulated state, the shooting period of the game ball becomes the shortest first period. As a result, it becomes possible to slow down the progress speed of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the jackpot, which is the type of regulation to be started, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. can be suppressed.

In the opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, the shooting cycle of the game balls is lengthened, and in the opening and closing execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, and the opening and closing execution mode which does not have the highest number of rounds, the firing cycle of the game balls is increased. kept short. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

In addition, the opening/closing execution mode in which the firing period of the game ball is set to the second period is not limited to the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode. The game ball shooting cycle may be set to the second cycle regardless of the number of times the round game is executed, or the game ball shooting cycle may be set to the second cycle regardless of the open/close execution mode. Alternatively, the shooting period of the game ball may be set to the second period only in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the method of measuring the total number of rounds occurring in a predetermined period is different from that of the first embodiment, and the configuration for changing the game situation according to the total number of rounds is different from that of the first embodiment. It differs from the embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the main side RAM 64 used for managing the total number of rounds. In this embodiment, the main side RAM 64 is not provided with the total round number counter 64c.

As shown in FIG. 57, the main RAM 64 is provided with a measurement round number counter 201 and a period measurement counter 202 . The round number counter 201 for measurement measures the total number of round games executed in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode within the calculation trigger period (specifically, 10 minutes). The period measurement counter 202 notifies the main MPU 62 that the calculation trigger period has elapsed since the supply of operating power to the main MPU 62 was started, and that the calculation trigger period has newly elapsed from the timing at which the previous calculation trigger period passed. It is a counter for specifying in .

The main RAM 64 is provided with a management area 203 and a write pointer 204 in addition to the round number counter 201 for measurement and the period measurement counter 202 . Using these management area 203 and write pointer 204, the number of target rounds, which is the total number of round games in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode occurring during the measurement target period (one hour), is calculated.

The management area 203 is provided with six storage areas 203a to 203f for storing information on the total number of round games in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode occurring during the 10-minute calculation trigger period. ing. In other words, the management area 203 is provided with first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. The first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f all have the same storage capacity, and each can store information on the total number of round games in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode occurring within the calculation trigger period. storage capacity.

The write pointer 204 directs the main MPU 62 to the memory areas 203a to 203f to which the total number of rounds is to be written when the calculation trigger period newly elapses among the first to sixth memory areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. It is a counter for making it possible to grasp When the total number of rounds is newly calculated due to the elapse of the calculation trigger period, the storage areas 203a to 203a corresponding to the value of the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203 203f is overwritten with the new total round number information, and then the value of the write pointer 204 is incremented by one. In this case, the value of the write pointer 204 takes a value from "0" to "5", and when the value of the write pointer 204 is "n", the total number of rounds is newly stored in the n+1th storage area in the management area 203. information will be overwritten. Further, when the value of the write pointer 204 is incremented by 1 and exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 204, the write pointer 204 is cleared to "0".

The management area 203 is provided with six storage areas 203a to 203f capable of storing information on the total number of round games in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode occurring during the 10-minute calculation trigger period as described above. It is Therefore, if the total number of rounds information (including "0") is stored in all of the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203, the Information on the total number of round games in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is stored in the management area 203 . Each time the calculation trigger period (10 minutes) elapses, the main MPU 62 stores information on the total number of rounds stored in the measurement round number counter 201 at that point in the first to sixth storage areas 203a of the management area 203. - 203f, not only to overwrite the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204, but also all the total number of rounds stored in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f immediately after the overwriting. is added, and the target round number area 205 provided in the main side RAM 64 is overwritten with the information of the addition result as the target round number information. In the present embodiment, information on the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 (information on the total number of round games in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode that occurred during the measurement target period (1 hour)) is a unit It is a parameter for generating a trigger for regulating the number of opening/closing execution modes per hour.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing special electric end processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the opening and closing execution mode of this time has passed (step S3701). If a negative determination is made in step S3701, the special electric end processing is terminated.

When the ending period in the current open/close execution mode has passed (step S3701: YES), game state transition processing is executed (step S3702). The processing contents of the game state transition processing are the same as step S1202 of the special electric end processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, by determining whether the hit result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is any of the 5R high probability jackpot result, the 10R low probability jackpot result, and the 10R high probability jackpot result, the opening and closing of this time It is determined whether or not the execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode (step S3703). If the current opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode (step S3703: YES), the number of round games executed in the current opening/closing execution mode is added to the measurement round number counter 201 of the main RAM 64. (step S3704).

When negative determination is made in step S3703, or when the process of step S3704 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3705). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure special electric end processing to that corresponding to the special figure fluctuation starting processing.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing management processing executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. Note that the management process is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

First, 1 is added to the value of the period measurement counter 202 of the main RAM 64 (step S3801). Then, if the value of the period measurement counter 202 after the addition of 1 is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the calculation trigger period (10 minutes) (step S3802: YES), the processing shown in steps S3803 to S3808 is executed.

Specifically, the information of the measurement round number counter 201 of the main RAM 64 is overwritten in the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the value of the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. (step S3803). After that, update processing of the write pointer 204 is executed (step S3804). In the updating process, 1 is added to the value of the write pointer 204, and when the value after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 204, the write pointer 204 is cleared to "0".

After that, all the information on the total number of rounds stored in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203 is added (step S3805), and the addition result is used as information on the number of target rounds. The area 205 is overwritten (step S3806). Thereafter, the value of the measurement round number counter 201 is cleared to "0" (step S3807), and the value of the period measurement counter 202 is cleared to "0" (step S3808).

By executing the management process (FIG. 59) as described above, each time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, information on the total number of rounds in the round number counter 201 for measurement at that time is stored in the area 203 for management. The storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f are overwritten, and the total number of rounds stored in each of the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f is The number of target rounds is calculated by adding all. Then, the target round number area 205 is overwritten with information on the calculated target round number. As a result, the total number of round games in the opening and closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode executed in the immediately preceding measurement period (one hour) is measured each time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, has passed, and the measurement is completed. The resulting target round number information is stored in the target round number area 205 .

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the process of selecting the final stop period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, it is determined whether or not the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S3901). As in the first embodiment, the first reference value is a value larger than the number of round games executed in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result, and is a 10R low-probability jackpot result or 10R. It is the value of the number of times of the round game executed in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of the high-accuracy jackpot. Specifically, it is set to "10". As a result, the number of target rounds does not reach the first reference value even if the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result occurs only once during the measurement target period (1 hour). In addition, when the open/close execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs once during the measurement target period (1 hour), the number of target rounds reaches the first reference value.

In addition, the first reference value is not limited to "10", and is a value larger than the value of the number of executions of the round game in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of executions of the round game is relatively small. It is good also as a structure which is a value below the execution frequency of the round game in the opening-and-closing execution mode of high frequency prize-winning mode with relatively many execution frequency of a round game. In addition, the first reference value may be a value larger than the value of the number of executions of the round game in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of executions of the round game is relatively large, and the number of executions of the round game is relatively large. It may be a value equal to or less than the number of executions of the round game in the open/close execution mode of the low high-frequency winning mode.

When the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value (step S3901: YES), the base final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S3902). The base final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds. Information on the base final stop period is stored in advance in the main ROM63, and by selecting the base final stop period at step S3902, the selection at step S705 in the special figure fluctuation processing (FIG. 15) The base final stop period is set in the special special electric timer counter. As a result, measurement of the final stop period in the current game round is started. In addition, at step S706 in the special figure fluctuation processing (FIG. 15), a final stop command in which information indicating that the base final stop period is the final stop period of the current game cycle is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82. . By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game turn, starts measuring the final stop period, and transmits a command corresponding to it to the display side MPU 92. The symbol display device 41 starts static display of each symbol resulting from the stoppage of the current game cycle. The static display continues over the final stop period of the current game cycle.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the number of target rounds stored in the number of target rounds area 205 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S3903). As in the first embodiment, the second reference value is executed when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs twice, which is the first plurality of times. The value is greater than the value of the total number of times of the round game, and is executed when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs three times, which is the second plurality of times. It is the value of the total number of round games. Specifically, it is set to "30". As a result, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour), and the opening and closing triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result Even if the execution mode occurs, the number of target rounds does not reach the second reference value. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is further generated in the measurement target period (1 hour), the number of target rounds reaches the second reference value. The second reference value is not limited to "30", and may be less than 30 or greater than "30" as long as the value is greater than the first reference value. .

If the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S3903: YES), first, information on the base final stop period and information on the first common extension period are read from the main ROM 63 ( step S3904). The base final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds as already explained. The first common extension period is set to 1 second. Then, by adding the first common extension period to the base final stop period, the final stop period of the current game cycle is calculated (step S3905). In other words, if the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, 1.5 seconds, which is the sum of the base final stop period and the first common extension period, will be the current game round. will be the final suspension period. At step S705 in the special figure fluctuation processing (FIG. 15), the period of the sum of the base final stop period and the first common extension period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, measurement of the final stop period in the current game round is started. In addition, at step S706 in the special figure fluctuation processing (FIG. 15), the final period in which information indicating that the sum of the base final stop period and the first common extension period is the final stop period of the current game round is set. A stop command is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82 . By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game turn, starts measuring the final stop period, and transmits a command corresponding to it to the display side MPU 92. The symbol display device 41 starts static display of each symbol resulting from the stoppage of the current game cycle. The static display continues over the final stop period of the current game cycle.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S3903: NO), first, information on the base final stop period and information on the first common extension period are downloaded from the main ROM 63. Read out (step S3906). The base final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds as already explained, and the first common extended period is set to 1 second as already explained. After that, the first common extension period is doubled (step S3907), and the doubled period is added to the base final stop period to calculate the final stop period of the current game round (step S3908). In other words, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, 2.5 seconds, which is the sum of the base final stop period and twice the first common extension period, will be the final stop period of the current game round. Become. At step S705 in the special figure fluctuation processing (FIG. 15), the period of the sum of the base final stop period and twice the first common extension period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, measurement of the final stop period in the current game round is started. Also, in step S706 in the special figure fluctuation process (FIG. 15), information is set indicating that the sum of the base final stop period and twice the first common extension period is the final stop period of the current game round. The received final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game turn, starts measuring the final stop period, and transmits a command corresponding to it to the display side MPU 92. The symbol display device 41 starts static display of each symbol resulting from the stoppage of the current game cycle. The static display continues over the final stop period of the current game cycle.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the final stop period of the game cycle. As a result, when the open/close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (one hour), the final stop period of the game cycle is lengthened. Since the final stop period of the game round is lengthened, the number of game rounds generated per unit time is reduced, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time is decreased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The final stop period of the game round becomes longer in stages as the value of the number of target rounds increases. As a result, when the open/close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (1 hour), the greater the number of occurrences, the longer the final stop period of the game cycle. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game rounds per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Each time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, has elapsed, the write pointer 204 in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203 indicates the information on the total number of rounds of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time. The target round number is calculated by overwriting the storage areas 203a to 203f and adding all the total round numbers stored in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. Then, the final stop period of the game round is changed according to the calculated number of target rounds. As a result, it is possible to appropriately change the final stop period of the game cycle according to the change in the number of target rounds.

When the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the first common extension period read from the main side ROM 63 is added to the base final stop period to finally stop the current game round. When the period is measured and the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, double the first common extension period read out from the main ROM 63 is added to the base final stop period to determine the final stop of the current game round. Duration is measured. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of the final stop period of the game cycle by using the information of the first common extension period.

FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the opening period selection process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

If the number of target rounds stored in the number of target rounds area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4001: YES), the base opening period is selected as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S4002). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds. Information on the base opening period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base opening period in step S4002, the selected base The opening period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started. In addition, in step S805 in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 16), an opening command in which information indicating that the base opening period is the opening period of this time is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU82. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening performance corresponding to the opening period by displaying the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the unit 54 . In addition, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4003: YES), the base opening period information and the second Information on the common extension period is read out (step S4004). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds. Then, the current opening period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base opening period (step S4005). That is, when the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the current opening period is 9 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period. At step S804 in the special figure determination process (FIG. 16), the period of the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the current opening period is started. Also, in step S805 in the special figure finalization process (FIG. 16), the opening command in which the information indicating that the period of the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is the opening period of this time is set on the sound light side It is transmitted to MPU82. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening performance corresponding to the opening period by displaying the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the unit 54 . In addition, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

If the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4003: NO), first, information on the base opening period and information on the second common extension period are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4006). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained, and the second common extended period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. After that, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4007), and the period resulting from the doubling is added to the base opening period to calculate the current opening period (step S4008). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the current opening period is 14 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extended period. At step S804 in the special figure determination process (FIG. 16), the period of the sum of the double of the base opening period and the second common extension period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the current opening period is started. Also, in step S805 in the special figure finalization process (FIG. 16), the opening command is set with information indicating that the period of the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is the current opening period. It is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening performance corresponding to the opening period by displaying the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the unit 54 . In addition, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the opening period of the open/close execution mode. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (one hour), the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened. Since the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening period of the open/close execution mode becomes longer in stages as the value of the number of target rounds increases. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (one hour), the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes longer as the number of occurrences increases. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Each time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, has passed, the information on the total number of rounds of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is The number of target rounds is calculated by overwriting the storage areas 203a to 203f shown in FIG. Then, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is changed according to the calculated number of target rounds. This makes it possible to appropriately change the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode according to the change in the number of target rounds.

If the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the second common extension period read from the main-side ROM 63 is added to the base opening period to determine the opening period of the current open/close execution mode. is measured, and if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, double the second common extension period read from the main-side ROM 63 is added to the base opening period to determine the opening period of the current open/close execution mode. Measured. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode by using the information of the second common extension period.

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing special electric start processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the opening time in the opening and closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S4101). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the special electric start processing is terminated.

If the opening period in the opening and closing execution mode of this time has passed (step S4101: YES), on the condition that the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode of this time is one of the jackpot results (step S4102: YES), the jackpot result Execute the time setting process.

In the setting process at the time of the big win result, the round counter provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to the value of the number of round games corresponding to the big win result this time (step S4103). Specifically, if the result of this jackpot is a 2R high probability jackpot result, "2" is set in the round counter, and if the result of this jackpot is a 5R high probability jackpot result, the round counter is set. "5" is set, and "10" is set in the round counter when the current jackpot result is a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode by the main side MPU 62 .

After that, a process for opening start is executed (step S4104). In the processing at the time of opening, the details will be described later, but processing for starting a new round game or processing for opening the special electric prize winning device 32 multiple times in one round game is executed. By executing the processing at the time of opening start, if it is the processing time to newly start the round game, the upper limit number of game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in this round game is set to the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 Further, the number of openings of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the current round game is set in the open/close counter of the main side RAM 64, and the opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening round of this time is selected. In addition, if it is a processing time for opening the special electric winning device 32 multiple times in one round game, the value of the winning counter and the opening / closing counter is not set, and the opening time of this time is performed. is selected.

On the other hand, when the opening and closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the result of the small hit (step S4102: NO), the setting process at the time of the result of the small hit is executed. In the setting process at the time of the small hit result, "2" is set to the open/close counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S4105), and "10" is set to the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S4106). The opening/closing counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode of the opening/closing number regulation mode by the main side MPU 62, and one round is performed in the opening/closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode. It is a counter for specifying the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed in the game by the main side MPU 62 . After that, reading processing of the opening continuation period corresponding to the small hit result is executed (step S4107). The open continuation period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63 and is specifically 0.5 seconds shorter than the shortest shooting period (0.6 seconds) of the game ball.

When the processing of step S4104 or step S4107 is executed, the information of the read open duration is set to the special special electric train timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S4108). Thereby, the measurement of the open duration period is started. After that, an open setting process for opening the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed (step S4109). Also, an open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S4110). By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effects in the opening/closing execution mode in the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54 and the pattern display device 41 accordingly. After that, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (step S4111). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric start processing to the value corresponding to the special electric open processing.

FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing processing during special electric open in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, open monitor processing is executed (step S4201). In the open monitoring process, the value of the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 when one game ball has won the special electric winning device 32 .

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4202). In addition, by determining whether the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the current open continuation period has elapsed, and the round period counter provided in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the upper limit period of the current round game has passed (step S4203).

The round period counter is a counter for the main side MPU 62 to specify whether or not the upper limit period of the round game has passed. is set. In the round game triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result, even if the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit number and the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, The round game is terminated when the upper limit period of the round game elapses. In addition, in the round game in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high probability jackpot result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in the round game, so the opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the round game is the maximum period of In addition, in the round game in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, the number of openings of the special electric prize winning device 32 that occurs in one round game as described later is the target round number area 205, but when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened only once in one round game, the duration of opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 is When the upper limit period of the round game is reached and the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened multiple times in one round game, the sum of the total period of the open continuation period and the total period of the closed period of the special electric prize winning device 32 is It becomes the upper limit period of the round game.

If the open continuation period has passed or if the upper limit period of the round game has passed in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result, affirmative determination is made in step S4203, and the open continuation period has passed Furthermore, when the upper limit period of the round game has not passed in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S4203. If negative determinations are made in both step S4202 and step S4203, this special electric open processing is terminated as it is. As a result, when the closing condition is not met, the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32 is continued.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S4202 or step S4203, a closing setting process for closing the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed (step S4204). After that, 1 is subtracted from the open/close counter value of the main RAM 64 (step S4205). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" or whether the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4206). In the open/close execution mode of the round number regulation mode, when the value of the open/close counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0" or when the value of the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", one round game ends. It means that the condition is satisfied. In the opening/closing execution mode of the opening/closing number regulation mode, if the value of the opening/closing counter in the main RAM 64 is "0" or if the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is "0", the conditions for terminating the opening/closing execution mode means that is established.

In the case of a 5R high-probability jackpot result, a condition that the value of the round period counter of the main side RAM 64 becomes "0" is set as a closing condition of the special electric prize winning device 32 . A situation in which the value of the round period counter becomes "0" occurs only in the final opening of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game. Therefore, when the closing condition is met by the value of the round period counter becoming "0", the value of the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 64 is decremented by 1 in subsequent step S4205, and the value of the opening/closing counter becomes "0". 0”. Therefore, when the upper limit period of the round game has passed in the round game of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result, the value of the opening and closing counter of the main side RAM 64 becomes "0". make an affirmative judgment.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4206, the value of the round counter of the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 on condition that the opening/closing execution mode of this time is triggered by a jackpot result (step S4207: YES) (step S4208). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S4209).

If a negative determination is made in step S4206, or if a negative determination is made in step S4209, it means that the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32 will continue to occur in the opening/closing execution mode this time. In this case, a closing period selection process is executed (step S4210). In the closing period selection process, which will be described in detail later, a process for selecting a period for keeping the special electric prize winning device 32 in the closed state between one opening time and the next opening time in the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed. do.

After that, the information of the closing period selected in step S4210 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S4211). As a result, the measurement of the closing period of this time is started. After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S4212). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric open processing to the value corresponding to the special electric closed processing.

If a negative determination is made in step S4207 when an affirmative determination is made in step S4206, it means that the end condition of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the small hit has been established. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in steps S4206 and S4207 and the affirmative determination is made in step S4209, it means that the end condition of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big win has been established. In these cases, ending period selection processing is executed (step S4213). The processing contents of the ending period selection processing in this embodiment will be described later.

After that, the information of the ending period selected in step S4213 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S4214). As a result, the measurement of the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

Thereafter, an ending command including information on the ending period selected this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S4215). By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. It is executed by the unit 54 . Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

After that, 2 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S4216). As a result, the value of the special special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric open processing to the value corresponding to the special electric end processing.

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing processing during special electric closing in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the current closing period or interval period has passed (step S4301). If a negative determination is made in step S4301, the process during closing of the special electric current is terminated.

If the current closing period or interval period has passed (step S4301: YES), on condition that the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results (step S4302: YES), at the time of opening (step S4303). In the processing at the time of opening, the details will be described later, but processing for starting a new round game or processing for opening the special electric prize winning device 32 multiple times in one round game is executed. By executing the processing at the time of opening start, if it is the processing time to newly start the round game, the upper limit number of game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in this round game is set to the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 Further, the number of openings of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the current round game is set in the open/close counter of the main side RAM 64, and the opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening round of this time is selected. In addition, if it is a processing time for opening the special electric winning device 32 multiple times in one round game, the value of the winning counter and the opening / closing counter is not set, and the opening time of this time is performed. is selected.

When the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode this time is the result of the small hit (step S4302: NO), readout processing of the opening duration corresponding to the result of the small hit is executed (step S4304). The content of the open duration readout process corresponding to the small hit result is the same as step S4107 in the special electric start process (FIG. 62).

When the processing of step S4303 or step S4304 is executed, the information of the read open duration is set to the special special electric train timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S4305). Thereby, the measurement of the open duration period is started. In addition, open setting processing for opening the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed (step S4306).

After that, it is determined whether or not the new opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 corresponds to the start of a new round game in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the jackpot (step S4307). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4307, an additional open command including information on the open duration selected this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S4308). By receiving the additional opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening continuation period this time and starts measuring the opening continuation period, and at the same time, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41 are in the opening and closing execution mode. Execute control for switching the production in accordance with it. As a result, the contents of the effects in the opening/closing execution mode in the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54 and the pattern display device 41 are switched corresponding to the start of a new round game.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4307, that is, when a new opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 is started in the opening/closing execution mode of the opening/closing number regulation mode triggered by the small winning result, or triggered by the big winning result In the open/close execution mode of the round number regulation mode, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is newly opened in the middle of the round game, the additional opening command is not transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . Therefore, when a new opening cycle of the special electric prize winning device 32 is started in the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number regulation mode triggered by the small winning result, or in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode triggered by the big winning result Round game When a new open turn of the special electric prize winning device 32 is started in the middle of , the contents of the effect in the opening and closing execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41 are continued without being switched. be. As a result, a new opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 is started in the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number regulation mode triggered by the small winning result, and in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode triggered by the big winning result It is possible to make it inconspicuous to the player that the special electric prize winning device 32 has started a new opening round in the middle of the round game.

When negative determination is made in step S4307, or when the process of step S4308 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the special figure special electric counter (step S4309). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the value corresponding to the special electric open processing.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the processing at the time of opening start executed in step S4104 of the special electric start processing (FIG. 62) or step S4303 of the special electric closing processing (FIG. 64).

When the value of the open/close counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4401: NO), that is, when the round game is newly started in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, steps S4402 to S4416 are shown. A process for starting a round game is executed. Specifically, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 2R high probability jackpot result (step S4402: YES), the setting process for 2R is executed (step S4403). In the setting process for 2R, the open/close counter of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", and 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the open continuation period corresponding to the small winning result, is selected as the open continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32. . The selected open duration period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 in step S4108 of special electric start processing (Fig. 62) or step S4305 of special electric closing processing (Fig. 64), Measurement is started. In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high-probability jackpot result, in each of the two round games, the special electric prize winning device 32 opens once for 0.5 seconds, which is a short-term mode.

If it is the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result (step S4404: YES), "2" is set to the opening and closing counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S4405), and the current open continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 5 seconds is selected (step S4406). The selected open duration period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 in step S4108 of special electric start processing (Fig. 62) or step S4305 of special electric closing processing (Fig. 64), Measurement is started. Furthermore, 11 seconds, which is the upper limit period of the round game, is set in the round period counter of the main RAM 64 (step S4407). The update of the numerical information set in the round period counter is executed in the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), like the update of the numerical information set in the special special electric timer counter. .

If the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result (step S4404: NO), the number of openings of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game and the opening duration of each opening time It varies according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 . Specifically, if the target round number is less than the first reference value (step S4408: YES), the open/close counter of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S4409), and the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened this time. Eleven seconds is selected as the duration (step S4410). Also, if the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4411: YES), the open/close counter of the main side RAM 64 is set to "3" (step S4412), and the special electric winning device 3 seconds is selected as the current open duration of 32 (step S4413). If the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4411: NO), the open/close counter of the main side RAM 64 is set to "6" (step S4414), and the duration of opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 is 1 second. is selected (step S4415). These selected open continuation periods are set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 in step S4108 of the special electric start processing (Fig. 62) or step S4305 of the special electric closing processing (Fig. 64), Measurement is started.

As described above, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, in each of the 10 round games, the opening of the special electric winning device 32 occurs the number of times corresponding to the number of target rounds, and each The open continuation period of the open times is also a period corresponding to the number of target rounds. In this case, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the greater the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened in each round game, and the shorter the duration of opening each time. Furthermore, the total opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game becomes shorter as the value of the number of target rounds increases.

When the process of step S4403 is executed, when the process of step S4407 is executed, when the process of step S4410 is executed, when the process of step S4413 is executed, or when the process of step S4415 is executed, the main RAM 64 The upper limit number of "10" is set in the winning counter (step S4416). In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode and the target round number stored in the target round number area 205, the upper limit number in each round game is constant at 10 pieces.

If the value of the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 64 is 1 or more (step S4401: YES), that is, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, the opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32 after the second time in one round game When it is started, rear side opening processing shown in steps S4417 to S4421 is executed. Specifically, if it is the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result (step S4417: YES), 5 seconds is selected as the current opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4418). This selected open continuation period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 at step S4305 of special electric closing processing (FIG. 64), and measurement of the open continuation period is started.

Here, when the round game is newly started in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result, "2" is set to the opening/closing counter of the main side RAM 64 as already described, and the open duration period is 5. Seconds are selected, and the round duration counter is set to 11 seconds, which is the maximum duration of the round game. In addition, 5 seconds is selected as the open continuation period in the second and subsequent open rounds of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the opening of 5 seconds, which is longer than the short-term mode and shorter than the long-term mode, is 2 in each of the 5 round games. will occur several times. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result, the closing period between one opening time and the next opening time in the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game is the target round number area 205 However, regardless of which period is selected as the closing period, the round game will end when the upper limit period of 11 seconds has passed. It will happen.

If the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result (step S4417: NO), the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 as already described is the first reference value. In this case, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times in one round game. Then, when the number of target rounds is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4419: YES), 3 seconds is selected as the current opening continuation period of the special electric winning device 32 (step S4420 ), when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4419: NO), 1 second is selected as the current opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S4421). These selected open continuation periods are set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 in step S4305 of special electric closing processing (FIG. 64), and measurement of the open continuation period is started.

With the above configuration, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, if the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the special electric winning device 32 in each round game The number of opening times is one, and the opening duration is 11 seconds. In this case, in this embodiment, the shooting cycle of the game ball does not vary according to the number of target rounds. The shooting period of the game ball in the state where the operation is continued is constant at 0.6 seconds. In addition, the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32, which is the end condition of the round game, is ten. Then, when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the open duration period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game is the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32. is greater than the product of Therefore, it can be expected that more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game.

In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, if the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game is 3 times, and its open duration is 3 seconds. In this case, the total open continuation period in one round game is 9 seconds, which is a value larger than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32. . Therefore, it is possible to enter more than the upper limit number of game balls into the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game. However, since the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs three times in one round game, the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 depends on the supply mode of the game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32. It is possible that the number will not be reached. For example, there is a possibility that the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 is nine at a rate of one out of five round games.

In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened 6 times in each round game, and the opening is performed. The duration is 1 second. In this case, the total open continuation period in one round game is 6 seconds, which is the same as the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 . Furthermore, in one round game, opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 having an opening duration of 1 second occurs six times. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit number in each round game. For example, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is five.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the closed period selection process executed in step S4210 of the special electric open process (FIG. 63).

When the value of the opening/closing counter of the main side RAM 64 is 1 or more (step S4501: YES), that is, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is further opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result. Or, if it is the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the closing period setting process shown in steps S4502 to S4507 is executed. Specifically, if the opening and closing execution mode this time is triggered by any of the 10R low probability big hit result, the 10R high probability big hit result and the small hit result (step S4502: NO), select 1 second as the closing period ( step S4504). The selected closing period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 at step S4211 of the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), and the measurement of the closing period is started. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high-probability jackpot result, the opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 does not occur multiple times in one round game.

In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result and the 10R high-probability jackpot result, as already described, the special electric winning device 32 in one round game according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 The number of opening times may vary, but when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened multiple times in one round game, the closing period between one opening time and the next opening time is the target number of rounds. Regardless, it is constant at 1 second. As a result, even if the number of opening times of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game increases in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result and the 10R high probability jackpot result, the range of one round game It is possible to prevent the period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state from becoming excessively long.

In the setting process of the closing period during the round game, if the opening and closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result (step S4502: YES), 1 opening times of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game The closing period between the next open times varies according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 . Specifically, if the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value (step S4503: YES), 1 second is selected as the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S4504), and the number of target rounds is the first If it is equal to or more than the reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4505: YES), 4 seconds is selected as the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S4506), and the number of target rounds is equal to or more than the second reference value. If so (step S4505: NO), 5 seconds is selected as the current closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S4507). These selected closed periods are set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 in step S4211 of the special electric open process (FIG. 63), and the measurement of the closed period is started.

As described above, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the opening times of the special electric winning device 32 occur multiple times in each of the five round games, but one opening time and the next time in one round game The closing period between the opening rounds of is longer as the value of the number of target rounds is larger.

If the value of the open/close counter of the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S4501: NO), that is, if the interval period between a plurality of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started, steps S4508- Interval period setting processing shown in step S4516 is executed. Specifically, when the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4508: YES), the base interval period is selected as the interval period of the current open/close execution mode ( step S4509). The base interval period is set to 2 seconds. Information on the base interval period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and when the base interval period is selected in step S4509, the selected base interval The period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, measurement of the current interval period is started.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4510: YES), the base interval period information and the first Information on the common extension period is read out (step S4511). The base interval period is set to 2 seconds as already explained. The first common extension period is set to 1 second as already explained. Then, the current interval period is calculated by adding the first common extension period to the base interval period (step S4512). That is, when the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the current interval period is 2 seconds, which is the sum of the base interval period and the first common extension period. At step S4211 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), the period of the sum of the base interval period and the first common extension period is set to the special electric electric timer counter. As a result, measurement of the current interval period is started.

If the number of target rounds stored in the number of target rounds area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4510: NO), first, information on the base interval period and information on the first common extension period are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4513). The base interval period is set to 1 second as already explained, and the first common extension period is set to 1 second as already explained. Thereafter, the first common extension period is doubled (step S4514), and the period resulting from the doubling is added to the base interval period to calculate the current interval period (step S4515). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the current interval period is 3 seconds, which is the sum of the base interval period and twice the first common extension period. At step S4211 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), the period of the sum of the base interval period and twice the first common extension period is set to the special electric electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the current opening period is started.

When the process of step S4509, the process of step S4512, or the process of step S4515 is executed, a closing command in which the information of the interval period selected this time is set is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S4516). By receiving the close command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the current interval period and starts measuring the interval period, and displays the interval production corresponding to the current interval period by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. let it run. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an interval performance corresponding to the current interval period.

Here, in the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number regulation mode triggered by the small winning result, when the opening round in the middle of the special electric prize winning device 32 is completed, or in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode triggered by the big winning result When the opening round of the special electric prize winning device 32 during the game ends, the closing command is not transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number regulation mode triggered by the small winning result, when the opening round in the middle of the special electric prize winning device 32 is completed, or in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode triggered by the big winning result When the opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 ends in the middle of , the contents of the presentation during the opening/closing execution mode in the display light emitting portion 53, the speaker portion 54 and the pattern display device 41 are continued without being switched. As a result, in the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number regulation mode triggered by the small winning result, the opening round in the middle of the special electric prize winning device 32 is completed, and in the opening and closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode triggered by the big winning result It is possible to make it inconspicuous to the player that the special electric prize winning device 32 has been opened in the middle of the round game.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the interval period of the open/close execution mode. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (one hour), the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened. Since the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The interval period of the open/close execution mode is lengthened step by step as the value of the number of target rounds increases. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement period (one hour), the greater the number of occurrences, the longer the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Each time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, has passed, the information on the total number of rounds of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is The number of target rounds is calculated by overwriting the storage areas 203a to 203f shown in FIG. Then, the interval period of the open/close execution mode is changed according to the calculated number of target rounds. This makes it possible to appropriately change the interval period of the open/close execution mode according to the change in the number of target rounds.

When the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the interval period of the current opening/closing execution mode is calculated by adding the first common extension period read from the main-side ROM 63 to the base interval period. is measured, and if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, double the first common extension period read from the main ROM 63 is added to the base interval period, thereby increasing the interval period of the current open/close execution mode. Measured. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode by using the information of the first common extension period.

The information on the first common extension period is also used when extending the final stop period of the game cycle according to the increase in the number of target rounds. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the final stop period of the game cycle but also the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode by using the information of the first common extension period.

Next, how the execution mode of the round game changes according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b). FIG. 67(a) shows how the execution mode of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result (or 10R low probability jackpot result) changes according to the number of target rounds, and FIG. 67(b) shows how the execution mode of the round game in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result changes according to the number of target rounds. 67(a1) and 67(b1) show the execution period of the round game, and FIGS. 67(a2) and 67(b2) show the special electric winning device 32 when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value. Fig. 67(a3) and Fig. 67(b3) show the opening and closing modes of the special electric prize winning device 32 when the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. (a4) and 67th (b4) show the opening/closing mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value.

First, with reference to FIG. 67(a), the round game in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result will be described. A case will be described where the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit during the course of the round game.

As shown in FIG. 67(a1), the round game is executed from timing t1 to timing t2. The execution period of the round game is constant at 11 seconds regardless of the target round number value stored in the target round number area 205 . When the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(a2), the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state from timing t1 to timing t2.

In other words, when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the period during which the round game is executed coincides with the period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state. In this embodiment, the game ball shooting cycle is configured not to vary according to the number of target rounds. The shooting period of the game ball in the state where the ball is in the state of being held is constant at 0.6 seconds. In addition, the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32, which is the end condition of the round game, is ten. Then, when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, the open duration period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game is the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32. is greater than the product of Therefore, it can be expected that more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game.

When the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(a3), the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened for the first time from timing t1 to timing t3. After the first closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the second opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 over the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 occurs, and after the second closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, the third opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t6 to t2. Occur. Then, the round game ends when the third open round ends.

That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened three times in one round game, and the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. occurs twice. The open duration of each opening round is constant at 3 seconds, and each closing period is constant at 1 second. In this case, the total period of the opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 in one round game is 9 seconds, which is obtained from the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32. is also a large value. Therefore, it is possible to enter more than the upper limit number of game balls into the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game. However, since the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs three times in one round game, the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 depends on the supply mode of the game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32. It is possible that the number will not be reached. For example, there is a possibility that the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 is nine at a rate of one out of five round games. As a result, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in one round game becomes smaller than when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(a4), the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened for the first time from timing t1 to timing t7, and timing t7. ~ After the first closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t8, the second opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, and the timing of t9 ~ After the second closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t10, the third opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, and the timing of t11 to t12. After the third closed period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of , the fourth opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, and the timing of t13 to t14 After the fourth closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing, the fifth opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. After the 5th closed period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs, the 6th open time of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t16 to t2. Then, the round game ends when the sixth open round ends.

That is, when the target round number is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened six times and the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed five times in one round game. The opening duration of each opening cycle is constant at 1 second, and each closing period is constant at 1 second. In this case, the total open continuation period in one round game is 6 seconds, which is the same as the product of the game ball launch period and the upper limit number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 . Furthermore, in one round game, opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 having an opening duration of 1 second occurs six times. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit number in each round game. For example, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is five. As a result, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in one round game becomes smaller than when the number of target rounds is less than the second reference value.

From the above, if the value of the number of target rounds becomes a large value due to the repeated occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, during the measurement target period (1 hour), the 10R low probability jackpot result or 10R high probability The expected number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the jackpot is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The expected number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result decreases stepwise as the value of the number of target rounds increases. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the expected number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result according to the amount of profit given to the player. becomes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67(b), the round game in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result will be described. A case where the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit number during the round game will be described.

As shown in FIG. 67(b1), the round game is executed from timing t21 to timing t22. The execution period of the round game is constant at 11 seconds regardless of the target round number value stored in the target round number area 205 . When the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(b2), the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened for the first time from timing t21 to timing t23, and timing t23. After the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t24, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened for the second time over the timing of t24 to t22. Then, the round game ends when the second open round ends.

In this case, each opening has an open duration of 5 seconds and a closed duration of 1 second. The total duration of the open continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in one round game is 10 seconds, which is a value larger than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enter more than the upper limit number of game balls into the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game. However, since the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs twice in one round game, depending on the supply state of the game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32, the game ball entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game The number may not reach the upper limit. For example, in 1 out of 20 round games, there is a possibility that the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 ends with 9 pieces.

When the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(b3), the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened for the first time from timing t21 to timing t23. After the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t23 to the timing of t25, the second open time of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs from the timing of t25 to the timing of t22. . The second open round ends when the upper limit period of the round game elapses at timing t22, which is the timing before the open continuation period elapses, and the end condition of the round game is established.

In this case, the first opening duration is 5 seconds, the closing duration is 4 seconds, and the second substantial opening duration is 2 seconds. The total duration of the open continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in one round game is 7 seconds, which is a value larger than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enter more than the upper limit number of game balls into the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game. However, the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 will occur twice in one round game, and the substantial opening duration of the second time will be 2 seconds. Therefore, depending on the manner in which game balls are supplied to the special electric prize winning device 32, there is a possibility that the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit number in the round game. For example, there is a possibility that the number of game balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 is nine in one round game out of three round games. As a result, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in one round game becomes smaller than when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value.

When the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 67(b4), the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened for the first time from timing t21 to timing t23, and timing t23. After the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs over the timing of t26, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened for the second time over the timing of t26 to t22. The second open round ends when the upper limit period of the round game elapses at timing t22, which is the timing before the open continuation period elapses, and the end condition of the round game is satisfied.

In this case, the first opening duration is 5 seconds, the closing duration is 5 seconds, and the second substantial opening duration is 1 second. The total duration of the opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 in one round game is 6 seconds, which is the same as the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32. . Furthermore, the opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 is 1 second for the second opening time. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit number in each round game. For example, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is eight. As a result, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in one round game becomes smaller than when the number of target rounds is less than the second reference value.

From the above, if the value of the number of target rounds becomes a large value due to the repeated occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, during the measurement target period (1 hour), the 5R high probability jackpot result is triggered. The expected number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The expected number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result decreases stepwise as the value of the number of target rounds increases. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the expected number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result in accordance with the amount of profit given to the player.

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the ending period selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 . The ending period selection process is executed in step S4213 in the special electric open process (FIG. 63).

If the number of target rounds stored in the number of target rounds area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4601: YES), the base ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S4602). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds. Information on the base ending period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and when the base ending period is selected in step S4602, the selected base ending period is displayed in step S4214 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63). The period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started. Also, in step S4215 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), an ending command in which information indicating that the base ending period is the current ending period is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82 . By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. It is executed by the unit 54 . Also, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S4603: YES), the base ending period information and the second Information on the common extension period is read out (step S4604). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the current ending period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base ending period (step S4605). That is, when the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the current ending period is 11 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period. At step S4214 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), the period of the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period is set to the special special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the current ending period is started. Further, in step S4215 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), the ending command in which information indicating that the current ending period is the sum of the base ending period and the second common extended period is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82. sent to. By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. It is executed by the unit 54 . Also, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S4603: NO), first, information on the base ending period and information on the second common extension period are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4606). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. After that, the current ending period is calculated by doubling the second common extension period (step S4607) and adding the resulting period to the base ending period (step S4608). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the current ending period is 16 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), the period of the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special electric electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the current ending period is started. Also, in step S4215 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), an ending command set with information indicating that the current ending period is the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is played. It is transmitted to the optical side MPU 82 . By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. It is executed by the unit 54 . Also, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

As described above, the larger the value of the number of target rounds, the longer the ending period of the open/close execution mode. As a result, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (one hour). Since the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The ending period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes longer in stages as the value of the number of target rounds increases. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement period (one hour), the more times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the longer the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Each time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, has passed, the information on the total number of rounds of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is The number of target rounds is calculated by overwriting the storage areas 203a to 203f shown in FIG. Then, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is changed according to the calculated target round number. This makes it possible to appropriately change the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode according to the change in the number of target rounds.

If the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the second common extension period read from the main ROM 63 is added to the base ending period to obtain the ending period of the current open/close execution mode. is measured, and if the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, double the second common extension period read out from the main ROM 63 is added to the base ending period to determine the ending period of the current open/close execution mode. Measured. This makes it possible to increase the degree of extension of the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode by using the information of the second common extension period.

The information on the second common extension period is also used when extending the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode according to the increase in the number of target rounds. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode but also the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode by using the information of the second common extension period.

According to the tenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The final stop period of the game cycle that can affect the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32, and the interval period. And the ending period is changed according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 . As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player. In particular, the contents of a plurality of events such as the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the opening period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the interval period and the ending period are determined according to the number of target rounds. Therefore, when the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit time is varied according to the number of target rounds, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of variation.

The information of the first common extended period is used when extending the final stop period of the game cycle and the interval period of the open/close execution mode according to the increase in the number of target rounds. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the final stop period of the game cycle but also the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode by using the information of the first common extension period.

The information about the second common extended period is used when the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are lengthened according to the increase in the number of target rounds. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of not only the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode but also the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode by using the information of the second common extension period.

The opening period, the opening period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period included in the opening/closing execution mode are varied according to the number of target rounds stored in the number of target rounds area 205. As a result, the period required to complete the open/close execution mode will vary according to the number of target rounds. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately give a profit to the player.

According to the number of target rounds stored in the number of target rounds area 205, the opening period, which is the period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 does not win any prizes, the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period in the open/close execution mode. fluctuate. By varying the period during which no winning to the special electric winning device 32 occurs, the period required until the start of the period in which winning to the special electric winning device 32 can occur varies. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Without changing the upper limit period in the round game, the closed period in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed in the round game is changed according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205, so that the result Basically, the period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state is changed in the round game. As a result, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game can be made appropriate according to the number of target rounds.

In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, in a configuration in which the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs multiple times in each round game, the special electric prize sandwiched between the opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game The closing period of the winning device 32 is varied according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 . And, by changing the closed period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in such a manner that the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, the open period of the special electric prize winning device 32 that occurs after the closing period is changed as a result. It will happen. Therefore, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result can be made appropriate according to the number of target rounds.

In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is interposed in the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game without changing the upper limit period in each round game. The number of times that is in the open state varies according to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 . As a result, the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game varies according to the number of target rounds. In addition, in this configuration, the length of one opening of the special electric winning device 32 that occurs in the round game also varies. As the length of one opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 fluctuates, the ease with which a game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32 also fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the expected number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game according to the number of target rounds.

Each time the calculation trigger period of 10 minutes elapses, the information on the total number of rounds in the round number counter 201 for measurement at that point in time is written to The number of target rounds is calculated by overwriting the storage areas 203a to 203f shown in FIG. Then, the target round number area 205 is overwritten with information on the calculated target round number. As a result, the total number of round games in the opening and closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode executed in the immediately preceding measurement period (one hour) is measured each time 10 minutes, which is the calculation trigger period, has passed, and the measurement is completed. The resulting target round number information is stored in the target round number area 205 . That is, the number of target rounds in the next measurement target period can be set as the number of target rounds in a range shifted by the calculation trigger period with respect to the number of target rounds in one measurement target period. Therefore, it is possible to finely manage the number of target rounds.

Based on the elapse of the calculation trigger period shorter than the measurement target period, the information on the total number of rounds in the measurement round number counter 201 at that time is The storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 are overwritten. As a result, the number of target rounds in the next measurement target period can be set as the number of target rounds in a range shifted by the calculation trigger period with respect to the number of target rounds in one measurement target period.

Each time the calculation trigger period elapses, the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203 are overwritten with the value of the measurement round number counter 201 at that time. After the overwriting is completed, the target round number in the measurement target period is calculated based on the information on the number of round game executions stored in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f. As a result, the number of target rounds in the next measurement target period can be set to a range in which the number of target rounds in one measurement target period is shifted by the calculation trigger period.

In addition, when the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode ends, the number of round games generated in the opening and closing execution mode is added to the measurement round number counter 201 of the main side RAM 64, but it is limited to this. Instead, when the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games occurring in the opening/closing execution mode may be added to the round number counter 201 for measurement. Further, in place of the configuration, when the game cycle that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode ends, the number of round games occurring in the opening/closing execution mode is added to the round number counter 201 for measurement. It may be configured to be In addition, the number of round games that occur in the opening and closing execution mode is measured during the game round that triggers the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the game round starts. It may be configured to be added to the round number counter 201 for use. Further, when a game round that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games occurring in the opening/closing execution mode may be added to the round number counter 201 for measurement. good. In addition, the value of the round number counter 201 for measurement may be added by 1 each time one round game is started or one round game is completed in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. good. As a result, when a round game is executed or when a round game is executed, it is possible to immediately reflect it in the value of the round number counter 201 for measurement.

In addition, the round game to be added to the measurement round number counter 201 is not limited to the round game of the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode, but the opening and closing execution mode by the low frequency winning mode and the high frequency winning mode The round game executed in any of the opening and closing execution modes may be added to the measurement round number counter 201 .

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which all the round games in the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode are subject to addition to the measurement round number counter 201, and the opening/closing execution in the high-frequency winning mode and the maximum number of rounds is performed. The round game in the mode may be added to the round number counter 201 for measurement, while the other round games may not be added to the round number counter 201 for measurement. In addition, while the round game in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result is subject to addition to the measurement round number counter 201, the other round games are not subject to addition to the measurement round number counter 201. may be configured.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure with not only a long-term aspect and a short-term aspect as an opening continuation period of a round game but a medium-term aspect which becomes a period between these. In this case, only the number of round games in the long-term mode out of the round game in the short-term mode, the round game in the medium-term mode, and the round game in the long-term mode is added to the round number counter 201 for measurement. , the number of round games in the long-term mode and the number of round games in the medium-term mode may be added to the round number counter 201 for measurement, and the round game in the long-term mode, All the numbers of the round game of the medium-term mode and the round game of the short-term mode may be added to the round number counter 201 for measurement.

In addition, the final stop period of the game cycle, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the opening period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode. This parameter is not limited to the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205, and may be the value of the total round number counter 64c as in the first embodiment. It may be the target payout rate as in the embodiment, or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 as in the third embodiment.

In addition, although the measurement of the calculation trigger period using the period measurement counter 202 is configured to start when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 62 is started, it is not limited to this, and any It may be configured to be started when a type of opening and closing execution mode occurs, or may be configured to be started when an opening and closing execution mode that is a high frequency winning mode occurs. It may be configured to be started when the opening/closing execution mode is generated, or may be configured to be started when the high-frequency winning mode is started.

In addition, each time the calculation trigger period elapses, the information on the total number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is stored in the storage area 203a indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. The total number of rounds stored in the target round number area 205 each time the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode occurs or is completed, without being limited to the configuration overwritten to 203f. may be overwritten in the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. In this case, the overwritten storage area may be cleared to "0" when a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the overwriting was performed.

In addition, the upper limit period of the round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode is not limited to 11 seconds, and the closing period of the special electric winning device 32 or It is arbitrary if the expected number of winning balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game changes as the number of openings of the special electric prize winning device 32 changes. For example, the upper limit period of the round game may be less than 11 seconds, such as 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds, or longer than 11 seconds, such as 12 seconds, 13 seconds, and 14 seconds. good. However, when the number of target rounds is less than the first reference value, in the round game of the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, the game balls of the upper limit number or more of the round game can enter the special electric winning device 32. Therefore, the upper limit period of the round game is preferably a period equal to or longer than the product of the game ball launch period and the upper limit number of round games.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the tenth embodiment in the manner in which the opening period and ending period of the open/close execution mode are determined. The configuration that is different from the tenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the opening period selection process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

If the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the first reference value (step S4701: YES), the base opening period is selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode this time (step S4702). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds. Information on the base opening period is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and by selecting the base opening period in step S4002, the selected base The opening period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started. In addition, in step S805 in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 16), an opening command in which information indicating that the base opening period is the opening period of this time is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU82. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening performance corresponding to the opening period by displaying the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the unit 54 . In addition, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the third reference value (step S4703: YES), the base opening period information and the second Information on the common extension period is read out (step S4704). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds. Then, the current opening period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base opening period (step S4705). That is, when the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the third reference value, the current opening period is 9 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period. At step S804 in the special figure determination process (FIG. 16), the period of the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the current opening period is started. Also, in step S805 in the special figure finalization process (FIG. 16), the opening command in which the information indicating that the period of the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is the opening period of this time is set on the sound light side It is transmitted to MPU82. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening performance corresponding to the opening period by displaying the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the unit 54 . In addition, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

Here, the third reference value is the same as the first embodiment, when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs five times, which is the third plurality of times If the value is greater than the total number of round games to be executed, and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs six times, which is the fourth multiple times. It is the value of the total number of round games to be executed. Specifically, it is set to "60". As a result, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs in the measurement target period (1 hour), and the opening and closing triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result Even if the execution mode occurs four times, the number of target rounds does not reach the third reference value. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is further generated in the measurement target period (1 hour), the number of target rounds reaches the third reference value. The third reference value is not limited to "60", and may be less than 60 or greater than "60" as long as the value is greater than the second reference value. .

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S4703: NO), first, information on the base opening period and information on the second common extension period are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4706). The base opening period is set to 4 seconds as already explained, and the second common extended period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. After that, the second common extension period is doubled (step S4707), and the period resulting from the doubling is added to the base opening period to calculate the current opening period (step S4708). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the current opening period is 14 seconds, which is the sum of the base opening period and twice the second common extended period. At step S804 in the special figure determination process (FIG. 16), the period of the sum of the double of the base opening period and the second common extension period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the current opening period is started. Also, in step S805 in the special figure finalization process (FIG. 16), the opening command is set with information indicating that the period of the sum of the base opening period and the second common extension period is the current opening period. It is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening performance corresponding to the opening period by displaying the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the unit 54 . In addition, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the ending period selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 .

If the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 is less than the second reference value (step S4801: YES), the base ending period is selected as the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode this time (step S4802). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds. Information on the base ending period is pre-stored in the main ROM 63, and when the base ending period is selected in step S4602, the selected base ending period is displayed in step S4214 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63). The period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started. Also, in step S4215 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), an ending command in which information indicating that the base ending period is the current ending period is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82 . By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. It is executed by the unit 54 . Also, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S4803: YES), the base ending period information and the second Information on the common extension period is read out (step S4804). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained. The second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. Then, the current ending period is calculated by adding the second common extension period to the base ending period (step S4805). That is, when the number of target rounds is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the current ending period is 11 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period. At step S4214 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), the period of the sum of the base ending period and the second common extension period is set to the special special electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the current ending period is started. Further, in step S4215 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), the ending command in which information indicating that the current ending period is the sum of the base ending period and the second common extended period is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82. sent to. By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. It is executed by the unit 54 . Also, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

If the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S4803: NO), first, information on the base ending period and information on the second common extension period are read from the main ROM 63. (Step S4806). The base ending period is set to 6 seconds as already explained and the second common extension period is set to 5 seconds as already explained. After that, the current ending period is calculated by doubling the second common extension period (step S4807) and adding the resulting period to the base ending period (step S4808). That is, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the current ending period is 16 seconds, which is the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period. In step S4214 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), the period of the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is set in the special electric electric timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the current ending period is started. Also, in step S4215 in the special electric open processing (FIG. 63), an ending command set with information indicating that the current ending period is the sum of the base ending period and twice the second common extension period is played. It is transmitted to the optical side MPU 82 . By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. It is executed by the unit 54 . Also, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is caused to perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

According to the above configuration, when the number of target rounds is equal to or greater than the first reference value, the opening period of the opening period and the ending period of the open/close execution mode is lengthened, whereas the ending period is maintained, and the number of target rounds is maintained. If the number of target rounds exceeds the 2nd standard value, the ending period of the opening period and the ending period will be longer, but the opening period will be maintained, and if the number of target rounds exceeds the 3rd standard value, the opening period and the ending period are both lengthened. As a result, until the number of target rounds reaches or exceeds the third reference value, it is possible to smoothly increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being awarded to the player in a short time. When the third reference value or more is reached, it is possible to sharply enhance the function of suppressing excessively large profits being given to the player in a short time.

In addition, if the number of target rounds exceeds the first standard value, the ending period will be lengthened, but the opening period will be maintained. On the other hand, the ending period may be maintained, and both the opening period and the ending period may be lengthened when the number of target rounds reaches or exceeds the third reference value.

Further, the parameter that triggers the variation of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to the target round number stored in the target round number area 205, and is the same as in the first embodiment. It may be the value of the total round number counter 64c such as, the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment, or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 as in the third embodiment may be

<Twelfth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the manner in which the game round effect is modified when the game round variation continuation period is extended according to the value of the total round number counter 64c. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, standby areas SA1 to SA9 are set so that three patterns are displayed for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. A total of 9 patterns of 3 are displayed at the same time. Incidentally, each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, respectively, and when the symbols are finally stopped and displayed, the symbols waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are stopped at the respective stop positions. Is displayed.

On the display surface 41a, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1 and a middle line L2 are arranged so as to connect one standby area SA1 to SA9 (a total of three standby areas SA1 to SA9) in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. , right line L3, right-down line L4, and right-up line L5 are set. Then, the scroll display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 and switched to standby display. , all symbols that are being displayed during standby are switched to static display. This static display is continued over the final stop period of the game cycle. In this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round is fixed regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM64.

In the game cycle in which the game cycle effect is executed while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are maintained, scroll display of the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started in the high-speed fluctuation display of the low identification mode, and then, Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is switched in a predetermined order to a low-speed fluctuation display that is a high identification mode, and the standby display of symbols is started in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. be done. In the waiting areas ST1 to ST9 of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are displayed in a stationary state as a final stop display ( That is, the static display state is continued over the final stop period of the game cycle.

By the way, the swinging display, which is a kind of waiting display, means that the symbols waiting in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 swing within the same waiting areas SA1 to SA9, and each symbol corresponds to the waiting area SA1 to SA9. It swings in the range including the stop position in the areas SA1 to SA9, and each pattern swings in the range sandwiching the corresponding stop position.

On the other hand, in a game cycle in which the ready-to-win display is executed in a state where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not maintained, scroll display of symbols is started, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row, which are part of the symbol rows, are displayed. After the symbols Z3 are standby-displayed in the standby areas SA1-SA3 and SA7-SA9 and the ready-to-reach lines are formed, an image for super-ready-to-win is displayed. After that, in a state in which a combination of jackpot symbols or a combination of winning reach symbols is formed, the symbols standby-displayed in the respective standby areas SA1-SA9 on all the symbol rows Z1-Z3 are oscillatingly displayed over the oscillating display period. be done. Then, those symbols are statically displayed, and the static display state is continued over the final stop period.

In addition, at the bottom of the display surface 41a, the first reserved display area Ga for notifying the number of reserved and stored reserved information on the side of the first special figure, and the reserved information on the side of the second special figure are reserved and stored. A second reservation display area Gb is set for informing the number of stored items. The first reserved display area Ga and the second reserved display area Gb are set so as not to overlap the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the display surface 41a, but are not limited to this and are part of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. may be set so as to overlap with

FIG. 72 is a time chart showing how the symbol display mode changes when the game-turn effect is executed while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are maintained. FIG. 72(a) shows the period during which the game is executed, FIG. 72(b) shows how symbols are displayed in the upper symbol row Z1, and FIG. 72(c) shows how symbols are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. FIG. 72(d) shows how the symbols are changed in the lower symbol row Z3, FIG. 72(e) shows swing display periods in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 72(f). indicates the static display period.

At the timing t1, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 72(a), so that all the symbol rows are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 72(b) to 72(d). Scrolling display of patterns is started from Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols are variably displayed at high speed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the scroll display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display at the timing t2. At SA3, the standby display of the pattern is started. In this case, the oscillating display is started for the symbols for which the standby display is performed in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA3 of the upper symbol row Z1. At the timing t3, the scroll display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display as shown in FIG. At SA9, the standby display of the pattern is started. In this case, the oscillating display is started for the symbols for which the standby display is performed in each of the standby areas SA7 to SA9 of the lower symbol row Z3. Further, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 72(c), the scroll display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and at the timing t5, each waiting area SA4 of the middle symbol row Z2. At SA6, the standby display of the pattern is started. In this case, the swinging display is started for the symbols that are being displayed during standby in each of the standby areas SA4 to SA6 of the middle symbol row Z2.

Here, at the timing of t5, the symbols that are displayed in the waiting areas SA1 to SA3 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the standby areas SA7 to SA9 of the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed in the standby state. The swinging display has already started in the design. That is, the timing t5 corresponds to the standby timing at which the oscillating display of the symbols is started in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as shown in FIG. 72(e).

After that, at the timing of t6, the main side MPU 62 transmits a final stop command to the sound and light side MPU 82, and based on this, the sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92. ), the display mode of the symbols that have been oscillatingly displayed in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 is switched to a stationary display. After that, when the final display period of the game round (for example, 0.5 sec) elapses at the timing of t7, the effect for the current game round ends.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing period adjustment processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 . Note that the period adjustment process is executed in step S616 of the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14).

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variation continuation period of the current game round (step S4901: YES), the process for extending the variation continuation period of the game round shown in step S4902 and after is not executed. As in the first embodiment, when a game cycle that results in a big win occurs in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the fluctuation duration acquisition process (Fig. In step S604 in 14), the longest period is selected as the variation continuation period of the current game round. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, the processing for extending the variation duration period of game rounds shown in step S4902 and subsequent steps is not executed. It is possible to prevent the change from being accumulated and executed for the variable continuation period of one game round.

When the variation continuation period of game times is not the longest period (step S4901: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (Step S4902: YES), the first extension process of the variable duration period is executed (Step S4903). Specifically, 1 second is added as the first extension period to the fluctuation duration acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). Note that, in this embodiment, even if the first extension processing of the variable duration period is executed, no command corresponding thereto is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The first reference value is "10" as in the first embodiment, and the second reference value is "30" as in the first embodiment.

When the variation continuation period of game times is not the longest period (step S4901: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (Step S4904: YES), the second extension processing of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S4905). Specifically, 2 seconds is added as a second extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). Note that, in this embodiment, even if the second extension process of the variable duration period is executed, no corresponding command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . Also, the third reference value is "60" as in the first embodiment.

In a situation where the variation continuation period of game times is not the longest period (step S4901: NO), and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S4906: YES), variation A third duration extension process is executed (step S4907). Specifically, 3 seconds is added as a third extension period to the fluctuation duration acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). Note that, in this embodiment, even if the third extension process of the variable duration period is executed, the corresponding command is not transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 .

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern determination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the sound and light side MPU 82 . The effect pattern determination process is executed in step S1403 of the master side command correspondence process (FIG. 22).

First, information on the variation continuation period of the game cycle is grasped from the variation command received this time (step S5001). In this case, the information of the grasped variation continuation period of the game round is set in the period measuring counter provided in the sound and light side RAM 84 . The value set in the period measurement counter is decremented each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 21) in the sound and light side MPU 82 is started. Thereby, it is possible for the sound and light side MPU 82 to grasp the remaining period of the variation continuation period of the game round. It should be noted that, as in the first embodiment, information on the variation duration of game rounds acquired in step S614 in the variation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) is set in the variation command. Even if any extension process (step S4903, step S4905, step S4907) is executed in the process (FIG. 73), the information of the period extended by the extension process is not reflected.

After that, lottery processing for notice effects is executed (step S5002). The content of the lottery process for the announcement effect is the same as step S1702 of the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment. After that, stop symbol determination processing is executed (step S5003). The content of the stop symbol determination process is the same as step S1703 of the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

After that, information on the variation continuation period of the game round set in the variation command received this time, the contents of the winning judgment result and the distribution judgment result in this game round, and the production pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the advance notice production is selected, and the data table for the game round effect corresponding to the effect pattern is read from the sound and light side ROM 83 to the sound and light side RAM 84 (step S5004). It should be noted that the stop symbol information determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S5003) is not reflected in the effect pattern.

In step S1404 of the master side command correspondence processing (FIG. 22), as in the first embodiment, a pattern command corresponding to the game cycle effect data table read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 in step S5004 is executed. And a stop result command corresponding to the information of the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S5003) is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. By receiving these commands, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to these commands from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94 . By executing display control according to the display data table, the symbol display device 41 executes the moving image display of the current game round corresponding to the stop symbol determined by the effect pattern and the stop symbol determination process. be.

Here, in the production pattern determination process of this embodiment, the processes of steps S1705 to S1707 that are executed in the production pattern determination process (FIG. 25) of the first embodiment are not executed. In other words, even if the main MPU 62 extends the fluctuation continuation period of game rounds according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, the main MPU 62 does not transmit an extension command corresponding to the extension. The processing of steps S1705 to S1707 executed in the production pattern determination processing (FIG. 25) in the form is not executed. Instead, in the present embodiment, by extending the execution period of the standby display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 until the final stop command is transmitted from the main MPU 62, the game is played on the main MPU 62. It is configured to deal with the fact that the fluctuation duration period has been extended. The configuration will be described below.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table for game round effects.

Pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable continuation period of the target game round is set in the game round production data table, and information on the content of the task is set in association with each piece of pointer information. ing. The task content information is information set to perform an effect corresponding to the current game round. Light emission control and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed.

In the data table for the game cycle effect shown in FIG. 75, data at the start of the fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "0", and the pointer information of "160" indicates the low speed in the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1. The data at the start of the variable display is set in the pointer information of "200", the data at the time of stopping the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is set in the pointer information of "300". Data at the time of stopping the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z3 is set, data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "400", and super ready-to-win is started in the pointer information of "700". The pointer information of "1400" is set with the data at the start of all swing, which is the data of the timing at which the swing display is started as the standby display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the pointer information of "1450", data at the end of fluctuation, which is the data of the timing at which the swing display ends in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, is set.

In such a data table for game round presentation, the pointer information of "1400" to "1450" are displayed in a swinging manner as standby display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, when any one of the first to third extension processes of the fluctuation duration period (steps S4903, S4905, and step S4907) is executed in the main MPU 62, the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) The timing at which the final stop command is transmitted is later than the timing at which the variation continuation period of the game cycle acquired in step S614 in .

On the other hand, the sound and light side MPU 82 determines the variation continuation period of the game round grasped based on the command for variation, that is, When the final stop command is not received from the main side MPU 62 even though the fluctuation duration period has passed, the fluctuation duration period of the game round is extended by a predetermined extension period (specifically, 1 second), Until the predetermined extension period elapses, the data of the execution period of the swing display in the data table for game round effect (data in the range of pointer information "1400" to "1450" in FIG. 75) is repeated. refer. When the final stop command has not yet been received from the main MPU 62 even though the predetermined extension period has passed, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is set again for a predetermined extension period (specifically, one second). In addition to the extension, the data of the execution period of the swing display in the data table for game round effect (in the case of FIG. 75, the pointer information of "1400" to "1450" until the predetermined extension period has passed) data) repeatedly. Then, the state in which the data of the period during which the swing display is performed is repeatedly referred to ends when the final stop command is received from the main side MPU 62 . When the final stop command is received, the data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game cycle is read, and the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. The effect corresponding to the final stop period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 by the above. Further, when the sound/light side MPU 82 receives the final stop command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92 .

Here, as already explained, after the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is executed in the main side command corresponding process (FIG. 22) of the sound and light side MPU 82, in the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) A pattern command corresponding to the read data table for game cycle effect and a stop result command corresponding to the stop symbol information determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S5003) are transmitted to the display side MPU 92 .

When the display-side MPU 92 receives the pattern command and the stop result command, it first displays information corresponding to the combination of information corresponding to the data table for game cycle performance set in the pattern command and information corresponding to the stop result command. The data table for display is read from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94 . The data structure of the display data table is basically the same as that of the data table for game round presentation, and more specifically, the pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the target game round is set. Information on the content of the task is set in association with each piece of pointer information. The task content information in the display data table is information set in order to display a moving image corresponding to the current game round, and an image is displayed in accordance with the task content information in each frame. It is information for performing display control of the pattern display device 41 as follows.

In this case, the sound and light side MPU 82 transmits an extension command to the display side MPU 92 each time the variation continuation period of the game cycle is extended by a predetermined extension period (specifically, one second). When the display-side MPU 92 receives the extension command, the display-side MPU 92 repeatedly refers to the data of the swing display execution period in the current display data table until the predetermined extension period elapses. Then, the state in which the data of the execution period of the swing display is repeatedly referred to ends when a command corresponding to the final stop command is received from the sound and light side MPU 82 . When the command is received, the display data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game cycle is read out, and the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed according to the display data table to display the entire symbol row Z1. The static display of the symbols in Z3 is executed by the symbol display device 41 .

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing extension setting processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 82 to extend the execution period of the standby display as described above. Note that the extension setting process is executed in other processes (step S1415) in the master side command handling process (FIG. 22).

First, by determining whether or not the value of the period measurement counter of the sound and light side RAM 84 is "0", the variable command transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of the current game round was set. If the variation continuation period of game rounds has been extended by a predetermined extension period after that in the sound and light side MPU 82, it is determined whether or not the predetermined extension period has passed (step S5101). . When an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process of extending the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S5102). In the extension process, information corresponding to a predetermined extension period (specifically, one second) is set in the period continuation counter of the sound and light side RAM 84 (step S5102). Also, a data table correction process is executed (step S5103). In the correction process, the data of the execution period of the swing display in the data table for the game round effect read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 (in FIG. 75, the pointer information of "1400" to "1450" data) is referenced repeatedly. The state in which the data of the execution period of the swing display is repeatedly referred to ends when a command corresponding to the final stop command is received from the main MPU 62 . When the final stop command is received, the data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game cycle is read, and the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. The effect corresponding to the final stop period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 by the above.

After that, an extension command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 (step S5104). When the display-side MPU 92 receives the extension command, the display-side MPU 92 repeatedly refers to the data of the swing display execution period in the current display data table until the predetermined extension period elapses. The state in which the data of the execution period of the swing display is repeatedly referred to ends when a command corresponding to the final stop command is received from the sound and light side MPU 82 . When the command is received, the display data table corresponding to the final stop period of the game cycle is read out, and the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed according to the display data table to display the entire symbol row Z1. The static display of the symbols in Z3 is executed by the symbol display device 41 .

Next, the manner in which the execution period of the standby display of the symbols is extended when the variation continuation period of the game cycle is extended will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 77(a) shows a case where the variation continuation period of game rounds is not extended, and FIG. 77(b) shows a case where the variation continuation period of game rounds is extended, FIGS. 77(a1) and 77. (b1) shows the execution period of the game cycle, and FIGS. 77(a2) and 77(b2) show the period during which the symbols are scrolled in at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 77(a3). ) and FIG. 77(b3) show the period during which the waiting display is performed for all symbols, and FIG. 77(a4) and FIG. 77(b4) show the period during which the static display is performed for all symbols. .

First, with reference to FIG. 77(a), the case where the variation continuation period of game rounds is not extended will be described.

At the timing of t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 77(a1). At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 77(a2), scroll display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started. After that, the scrolling display of the symbols is finished in the order of the upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and the waiting display is started. Then, the standby display is executed. After that, at the timing of t3, the game cycle variation continuation period set in the variation command transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of the current game cycle passes, and the main side MPU 62 transmits the final stop command. Therefore, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 77(a3) and FIG. 77(a4), the state in which the standby display is performed for all symbols is changed to the state in which all symbols are displayed still. The period during which all symbols are statically displayed is constant at 0.5 seconds, which is the final stop period of the game round, regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. FIG. Then, when the final stop period of the game round elapses at the timing of t4, the static display of all symbols is terminated as shown in FIG. 77(a4), and the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 77(a1). do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77(b), the case where the variation continuation period of the game cycle is extended will be described.

At the timing of t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 77(b1). At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 77(b2), scroll display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started. After that, the scroll display of the symbols is finished in the order of the upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and the waiting display is started. Then, the standby display is executed.

After that, at the timing of t3, the variation continuation period of the game round set in the variation command transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the current game round passes, but the variation continuation period of the game round in the main MPU 62 is reached. Since it has been extended, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main MPU 62 . Therefore, at the timing of t3, the variation continuation period of game rounds is extended by the predetermined extension period in the sound and light side MPU 82 . In addition, the data of the execution period of the swing display in the data table for game round effect read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 (in the case of FIG. 75, the range of the pointer information of "1400" to "1450" Data) is repeatedly referred to, and the data of the swing display execution period in the display data table read out to the display side RAM 94 is repeatedly referred to. Settings are made.

After that, a final stop command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the timing of t13. Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIGS. 77(b3) and 77(b4), the state in which all the symbols are displayed during standby is changed to the state in which all the symbols are displayed still. The period during which all symbols are statically displayed is constant at 0.5 seconds, which is the final stop period of the game round, regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. FIG. Then, when the final stop period of the game round elapses at the timing of t14, the static display of all symbols is terminated as shown in FIG. 77(b4), and the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 77(b1). do.

As described above, when the variation continuation period of the game cycle is extended, the period during which the swing display is performed for all the symbols that are displayed during standby in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of the symbol display device 41 is extended. be extended. As a result, it is not necessary to store in the ROMs 83 and 93 in advance the data table for game round effect and the data table for display corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the extension of the variation continuation period of the game round while suppressing an increase in the necessary storage capacity of the ROMs 83 and 93 .

When the fluctuation continuation period of the game cycle is extended, the execution period of the waiting display, which is the stage before the stationary display is executed with the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, is extended. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound/light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 for extending the execution period during the scroll display of the pattern and the execution period during the ready-to-win display. .

It should be noted that the standby display after the symbols are standby-displayed in the respective standby areas SA1 to SA9 in the game-turn effect on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the swinging display, and for example, the symbols are vibrated. The design may be displayed in a blinking manner, or the design may be scaled and displayed. In addition, when the pattern is displayed in 3D or the like, the structure may be such that the pattern is displayed back and forth. Alternatively, the standby display may be performed by moving only part of the pattern. For example, if the pattern is composed of characters and letters, one of them is stationary and the other is in motion. may be used as a standby display. Also, the state in which the pattern is stationary but the color attached to the pattern is changing may be used as the standby display.

In addition, the symbols waiting in the respective standby areas SA1 to SA9 are all stationary, but blinking is displayed in the standby areas set separately from the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The waiting display may be a state in which a variable display of a pattern or the like is being performed. In this case, static display means a state in which not only the pattern but also the other areas are statically displayed.

Further, the parameter that triggers the variation of the variation continuation period of game rounds is not limited to the value of the total round number counter 64c, and may be the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment. , the value of the consecutive house counter 181 as in the third embodiment, or the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 as in the tenth embodiment.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the pending information acquisition process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 . In addition, the acquisition process of the pending information is executed in step S401 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12).

When the entry ball of the game ball to the first operation port 33 has occurred (step S5201: YES), the number of reservation information on the first special figure side that is reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is the upper limit. On the condition that the number (specifically four pieces) has not been reached (step S5202: NO), the acquisition processing of the reservation information on the first special figure side is executed (step S5203). In the acquisition process, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are retained on the first special figure side out of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d in the first special figure reservation area 125 Store in the area on the highest side where no information is stored. After that, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S5204). The sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the first pending command to the display side MPU 92 . By receiving the command, the display side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of pending information on the side of the first special figure in the design display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of pending items.

When the negative determination is made in step S5201, when the affirmative determination is made in step S5202, or when the process of step S5204 is executed, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second operation opening 34. Determine (step S5205). When the entry ball of the game ball to the second operation port 34 occurs (step S5205: YES), the number of reservation information on the second special figure side that is reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 is the upper limit. On the condition that the number (specifically four pieces) has not been reached (step S5206: NO), the second special figure side reservation information acquisition process is executed (step S5207). In the acquisition process, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are retained on the second special figure side among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d in the second special figure reservation area 126 Store in the area on the highest side where no information is stored.

After that, destination identification processing is executed (step S5208). The contents of the destination specifying process will be described later. After that, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S5209). The sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the second hold command to the display side MPU 92 . By receiving the command, the display side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of pending information on the second special figure side in the design display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the pending number.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing destination identification processing executed in step S5208 in the hold information acquisition processing (FIG. 78).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the jackpot specific flag provided in the main RAM 64 (step S5301). The jackpot identification flag specifies whether or not the reservation information on the second special-picture side corresponding to the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is already reserved and stored in the second special-picture reservation area 126 by the main side MPU 62. is a flag for If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, the destination specifying process is terminated. Therefore, if the reservation information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is already reserved and stored in the second special drawing reservation area 126, for destination identification shown after step S5302 do not process.

If a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode (step S5302). If the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode (step S5302: NO), the destination identification process ends. Therefore, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the processing for destination identification shown after step S5303 is not executed.

If the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (step S5302: YES), the propriety determination process is executed (step S5303). In the success/failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode table provided in the main side ROM 63, the information for the judgment of the second special figure side hold information acquired this time, that is, the random number counter It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Also, in the case of the low probability mode, referring to the low probability mode table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 63, the information for the judgment of the hold information on the second special figure side acquired this time, that is, the hit It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S5304: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S5305). In the distribution determination process, the distribution table for the second special figure provided in the main ROM 63 (see FIG. 8B) is referred to, and the second special figure side hold information acquired this time is distributed It is understood which type of jackpot result the information for determination, ie, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, corresponds to. Concretely, it grasps which one of the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result and the 10R high probability jackpot result corresponds.

If the result of the distribution determination process is the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result (step S5306: YES), that is, the jackpot result that triggers the execution of the opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode In this case, "1" is set to the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5307). In addition, information corresponding to the number of pending information on the side of the second special figure stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is set in the second special figure measurement counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S5308). The second special figure measurement counter is the second special figure required until the second special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of "1" to the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM 64 becomes the start target of the game round. It is a counter for specifying the number of times of execution of the game round triggered by the holding information on the side of the drawing in the main side MPU 62 .

After that, on the condition that the reservation information on the first special figure side is stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 (step S5309: YES), the first special figure side restriction flag provided in the main side RAM 64 "1" is set (step S5310). In addition, information corresponding to the number of reserved information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is set in the first special figure measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 64 (step S5311). The first special figure side restriction flag is whether or not the reservation information on the first special figure side was stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 at the timing when the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM 64 was set to "1". It is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 62 whether. In the first special figure measurement counter, all the reservation information on the first special figure side that was reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 at the timing when the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM 64 was set to "1" This is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not a game turn is to be started.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 . In addition, acquisition processing of the fluctuation duration is executed in step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13).

If the game round to be started this time is triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side (step S5401: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM 64 (step S5402). If the jackpot specific flag is not set to "1" (step S5402: NO), other processing is executed (step S5414). In other processing, when the game round this time corresponds to the result of the big win or the result of the small win, after executing the processing of step S603 of the acquisition processing of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment The process of step S614 is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either the big win result or the small win result, step S605 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment to execute the processing of step S614. After that, after transmitting to the sound and light side MPU 82 a variation command including information on the variation continuation period of the game round selected in the other processing, and a type command including the result of the win/loss determination and the result of allocation determination of this time (Step S5415), the acquisition processing of this variable duration period ends.

If "1" is set to the jackpot specific flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5402: YES), it is determined whether the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main RAM 64 is 2 or less (step S5403). If the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM64 is not less than 2 (step S5403: NO), after subtracting 1 from the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM64 (step S5404), other (step S5414). In other processing, when the game round this time corresponds to the result of the big win or the result of the small win, after executing the processing of step S603 of the acquisition processing of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment The process of step S614 is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either the big win result or the small win result, step S605 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment to execute the processing of step S614. After that, after transmitting to the sound and light side MPU 82 a variation command including information on the variation continuation period of the game round selected in the other processing, and a type command including the result of the win/loss determination and the result of allocation determination of this time (Step S5415), the acquisition processing of this variable duration period ends.

If the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM 64 is 2 or less (step S5403: YES), the longest period among the fluctuation continuation periods of the multiple types of game rounds set in this pachinko machine 10 is set this time. (step S5405). That is, in the high frequency support mode, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, the second special figure Not only the game round triggered by the holding information on the side, but also the game in the game round triggered by the holding information on the second special side, which is the order of digestion one before the holding information on the second special side The longest period is the fluctuation duration period.

This longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the period table for the first win. Specifically, it is 10 minutes. Therefore, if the second special figure side hold information corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, the hold information on the second special figure side The variation duration of the game round in the game round triggered by the game round triggered by the game round and the hold information on the second special side, which is the order of digestion one before the hold information on the second special side, is the longest. It will be a long period.

After that, the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5406). Then, when the value of the second special figure measurement counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5407: YES), it became an opportunity to set "1" to the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM 64 Since the hold information on the side of the second special figure means that the game cycle is to be started, the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5408). If a negative determination is made in step S5407, or if the process of step S5408 is executed, the variation command including the information on the maximum period and the type command including the current pass/fail determination result and distribution determination result After transmitting to the side MPU 82 (step S5415), this acquisition processing of the variable duration period ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5401, it means that the game round to be started this time is triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side. In this case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the first special figure side restriction flag of the main side RAM64 (step S5409). If a negative determination is made in step S5409, other processing is executed (step S5414). In other processing, when the game round this time corresponds to the result of the big win or the result of the small win, after executing the processing of step S603 of the acquisition processing of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment The process of step S614 is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either the big win result or the small win result, step S605 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment to execute the processing of step S614. After that, after transmitting to the sound and light side MPU 82 a variation command including information on the variation continuation period of the game round selected in the other processing, and a type command including the result of the win/loss determination and the result of allocation determination of this time (Step S5415), the acquisition processing of this variable duration period ends.

When "1" is set to the first special figure side restriction flag of the main side RAM 64 (step S5409: YES), the longest period among the fluctuation continuation periods of the multiple types of game times set in this pachinko machine 10 is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game round (step S5410). That is, at the timing when the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, it is reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 Regarding the hold information on the first special figure side that was held, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round becomes the longest period in all the game rounds triggered by the hold information.

This longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the period table for the first winning time. Specifically, it is 10 minutes. Therefore, at the timing when the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, it is reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 Regarding the hold information on the first special figure side that was held, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is the longest period in all the game rounds triggered by the hold information.

In this embodiment, in the data setting process (step S502) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) as in the first embodiment, the second special figure side hold information is higher than the first special figure side hold information It is prioritized as a shift target to the execution area 127 for special figures. Therefore, when the reservation information on the special figure side is stored in both the first special figure reservation area 125 and the second special figure reservation area 126, the second special figure side reservation corresponding to the second operation port 34 Information is prioritized as a target for starting a game cycle. In this case, as described above, in the second special figure reservation area 126 at the timing when the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored Regarding the hold information on the first special figure side stored in 125, the variation continuation period of the game round becomes the longest period in all the game rounds triggered by the hold information. After the game round triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is executed. And it is started when the second special figure side suspension information stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 becomes zero.

After that, the value of the first special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5411). And, if the value of the first special figure measurement counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5412: YES), 10R low probability big hit result or 10R high probability big hit in the second special figure reservation area 126 At the timing when the hold information on the side of the second special figure corresponding to the result is held and stored, all the hold information on the side of the first special figure held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 becomes the target for starting the game round. Since it means that, the first special figure side restriction flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5413). If a negative determination is made in step S5412, or if the process of step S5413 is executed, the change command including the information on the maximum period and the type command including the current pass/fail determination result and distribution determination result After transmitting to the side MPU 82 (step S5415), this acquisition processing of the variable duration period ends.

With the above configuration, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 in the high frequency support mode, Not only the game times triggered by the pending information on the second special side, but also the pending information on the second special side, which is the order of digestion one before the pending information on the second special side. The variation continuation period of the game rounds in the game rounds that have been made becomes the longest period. As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds will occur in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to lengthen the period required until the opening/closing execution mode occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

It was reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 at the timing when the reservation information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result was reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 126.例文帳に追加Regarding the hold information on the first special figure side, the variation continuation period of the game round becomes the longest period in all the game rounds triggered by the hold information. After the game round triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side, the game round triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is executed. And it is started when the second special figure side suspension information stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 becomes zero. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the variation continuation period of the game round is set to the longest period in response to the acquisition of the holding information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result. As a result, the effect of reducing the digestion efficiency of game rounds can be generated over a long period of time.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, the second special figure Continued fluctuation of game rounds in game rounds triggered by the holding information on the second special side, which is the order of digestion one before the holding information on the side (hereinafter referred to as the holding information on the predetermined second special side) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the period is the longest period, in the game round triggered by the hold information on the side of the second special figure, which is the second order of digestion before the hold information on the predetermined second special figure side The variation continuation period of the game round may be the longest period, and the game triggered by the hold information on the side of the second special figure, which is three pieces before the hold information on the side of the predetermined second special figure. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variation continuation period of the game round in the round becomes the longest period. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 In all of the game rounds triggered by the reservation information on the special figure side, the variation continuation period of the game rounds may be the longest period.

Also, in the high frequency support mode, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, the second special figure The holding information on the side (hereinafter referred to as the holding information on the predetermined second special side) is triggered by the holding information on the side of the second special side, which is earlier in the order of digestion. Although it is the longest period, in the game round triggered by the holding information on the predetermined second special figure side, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is determined by lottery with reference to the period table for the first winning time. good.

In addition, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is retained and stored, the second digestion order is earlier than the hold information on the second special figure side It is not limited to the configuration in which the fluctuation continuation period of the game round triggered by the reservation information on the special figure side is the longest period, and the reservation information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R high probability jackpot result is retained and stored. It may be configured such that the fluctuation duration of the game round as described above is extended only when the second special figure corresponding to the 5R high probability jackpot result, the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result When the holding information on the side is held and stored, it may be configured such that the variation continuation period of the game round as described above is prolonged, and the second feature corresponding to the 5R high probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result When the hold information on the drawing side is held and stored, it may be configured such that the variation continuation period of the game round as described above is extended, and the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to any jackpot result is retained and stored, the lengthening of the variation continuation period of the game cycle as described above may occur.

In addition, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is retained and stored, the second digestion order is earlier than the hold information on the second special figure side In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the fluctuation duration of the game round triggered by the reservation information on the special figure side is the longest period, the first special figure side reservation corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result When the information is retained and stored, the variation continuation period of the game cycle triggered by the retention information on the first special figure side, which is earlier in the order of digestion than the retention information on the first special figure side, is the longest period. Also, when the reservation information on the 1st special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is retained and stored, the digestion order is earlier than the reservation information on the 1st special figure side. The variation continuation period of the game times triggered by the hold information on the side of the 1 special figure or the hold information on the side of the 2nd special figure may be configured to be the longest period. In addition, the holding information on the first special figure side that triggers the lengthening of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round as described above is the first special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result It is not limited to the reservation information, it may be the reservation information on the first special figure side corresponding to the 10R high probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result, 10R low probability jackpot result or 10R high probability jackpot result It may be the corresponding reservation information on the first special figure side, it may be the reservation information on the first special figure side corresponding to the 5R high probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, any jackpot result It may be the reservation information on the corresponding first special figure side.

Further, the longest period may be the same as the fluctuation continuation period of the longest game cycle set in the period table for the first winning time. In this case, in the second special figure reservation area 126 in the high frequency support mode, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored, the second special In the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is earlier in the order of consumption than the hold information on the figure side, the longest variation among the fluctuation durations of the game rounds that can be selected even in other situations A duration will be selected.

Also, in the high frequency support mode, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, the second special figure In the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side whose consumption order is earlier than the hold information on the side, the fluctuation continuation period of the predetermined game round set in the period table for the first winning time A variable duration period of game rounds to be executed may be selected by lottery from a group of a plurality of types of variable duration periods of game rounds longer than the above. Even in this case, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 in the high frequency support mode, In the game round triggered by the hold information on the side of the second special figure whose consumption order is earlier than the hold information on the side of the second special figure, the predetermined game set in the period table for the first winning time A period longer than the fluctuation continuation period of the round is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the game round. It should be noted that the group of variable duration periods of the plurality of types of game rounds may or may not include the longest variable duration period of game rounds.

In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the second special figure side holding information (hereinafter referred to as the predetermined second special figure side holding information ) is retained and stored, variation of the game round triggered by the second special figure side suspension information that is one before the digestion order with respect to each predetermined second special figure side suspension information The duration may be the longest duration.

Further, in the game round of the longest period, the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period and the remaining time image G3 may be displayed as in the first embodiment.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the variation continuation period of the game round in the situation where the jackpot specific flag or the first special figure side restriction flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" is different from the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment. there is The configuration that is different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 . In addition, acquisition processing of the fluctuation duration is executed in step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13).

If the game round to be started this time is triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side (step S5501: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the big hit specific flag of the main side RAM 64 (step S5502). When "1" is not set to the jackpot specific flag (step S5502: NO), other processing is executed (step S5518). In other processing, when the game round this time corresponds to the result of the big win or the result of the small win, after executing the processing of step S603 of the acquisition processing of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment The process of step S614 is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either the big win result or the small win result, step S605 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment to execute the processing of step S614. After that, after transmitting to the sound and light side MPU 82 a variation command including information on the variation continuation period of the game round selected in the other processing, and a type command including the result of the win/loss determination and the result of allocation determination of this time (Step S5519), the acquisition processing of this variable duration period ends.

If "1" is set to the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM 64 (step S5502: YES), it is determined whether the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM 64 is 2 or less (step S5503). If the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM64 is not less than 2 (step S5503: NO), after subtracting 1 from the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM64 (step S5504), other (step S5518). In other processing, when the game round this time corresponds to the result of the big win or the result of the small win, after executing the processing of step S603 of the acquisition processing of the fluctuation continuation period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment The process of step S614 is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either the big win result or the small win result, step S605 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment to execute the processing of step S614. After that, after transmitting to the sound and light side MPU 82 a variation command including information on the variation continuation period of the game round selected in the other processing, and a type command including the result of the win/loss determination and the result of allocation determination of this time (Step S5519), the acquisition processing of this variable duration period ends.

When the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM64 is 2 or less (step S5503: YES), it is determined whether the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM64 is the third reference value or more (step S5505). The content of the total round number counter 64c is the same as in the first embodiment. Also, the third reference value is "60" as in the first embodiment.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S5505: NO), the second longest fluctuation duration among the plurality of game round fluctuation durations set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game round (step S5506). On the other hand, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S5505: YES), the longest period among the fluctuation durations of the multiple types of game rounds set in the pachinko machine 10 is set to this time. It is selected as the variable continuation period of the game round (step S5507). That is, in the high frequency support mode, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, the second special figure Not only the game round triggered by the holding information on the side, but also the game in the game round triggered by the holding information on the second special side, which is the order of digestion one before the holding information on the second special side The fluctuation duration period of times is the semi-longest period or the longest period.

The longest period is a period longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the period table for the first hit, specifically 10 minutes. In addition, the semi-longest period is a period that is longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period and shorter than the longest period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the first hit period table. is 9 minutes and 10 seconds.

When the process of step S5506 or the process of step S5507 is performed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S5508). And, when the value of the second special figure measurement counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5509: YES), it became an opportunity to set "1" to the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM64. Since the holding information on the second special figure side means that the game round has been started, the jackpot specific flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5510). If a negative determination is made in step S5509, or if the process of step S5510 is executed, the command for variation containing the information on the maximum period or the information on the semi-maximum period, the result of this judgment and the result of distribution judgment are sent. After transmitting the type command including the type command to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S5519), the acquisition processing of this fluctuation duration period ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5501, it means that the game round to be started this time is triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side. In this case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the first special figure side restriction flag of the main side RAM64 (step S5511). If a negative determination is made in step S5511, other processing is executed (step S5518). In other processing, when the current game round corresponds to the result of the big win or the result of the small win, after executing the processing of step S603 of the acquisition processing of the fluctuation duration (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment The process of step S614 is executed, and if the current game round does not correspond to either the big win result or the small win result, step S605 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment to execute the processing of step S614. After that, after transmitting to the sound and light side MPU 82 a variation command including information on the variation continuation period of the game round selected in the other processing, and a type command including the result of this winning/failure determination and the distribution determination result. (Step S5519), the acquisition processing of this variable duration period ends.

If "1" is set to the first special figure side restriction flag of the main side RAM64 (step S5511: YES), whether the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM64 is the third reference value or more is determined (step S5512). When the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S5512: NO), the second longest variation duration period among the variation duration periods of the multiple types of game rounds set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game round (step S5513). On the other hand, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S5512: YES), the longest period among the fluctuation durations of the multiple types of game rounds set in the pachinko machine 10 is set to this time. It is selected as the variable continuation period of the game round (step S5514). That is, at the timing when the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, it is reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 Regarding the hold information on the side of the first special figure, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round becomes the semi-longest period or the longest period in all the game rounds triggered by the holding information.

The longest period is a period longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the period table for the first hit, specifically 10 minutes. In addition, the semi-longest period is a period that is longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the first hit period table and is shorter than the longest period. is 9 minutes and 10 seconds.

When the processing of step S5513 or the processing of step S5514 is executed, the value of the first special figure measurement counter of the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5515). And, if the value of the first special figure measurement counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S5516: YES), 10R low probability big hit result or 10R high probability big hit in the second special figure reservation area 126 At the timing when the hold information on the side of the second special figure corresponding to the result is held and stored, all of the hold information on the side of the first special figure held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 becomes the target for starting the game cycle. In order to mean that, the first special figure side restriction flag of the main side RAM64 is cleared to "0" (step S5517). If a negative determination is made in step S5516, or if the process of step S5517 is executed, the command for variation containing the information on the maximum period or the information on the semi-maximum period, and the results of this judgment and the distribution judgment are sent. After transmitting to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S5519), this fluctuation duration acquisition processing is terminated.

With the above configuration, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 in the high frequency support mode, A game triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, and a game triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the order of digestion one before the hold information on the second special figure side The fluctuation continuation period of the game round in the round becomes a semi-longest period when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the third reference value, and when the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value. The longest period, if any. As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode will occur in the high-frequency support mode, the period required until the opening/closing execution mode occurs is extended, While making it possible to suppress the excessively large profits being given to the player in a short time, the extension of the length of time is set according to the number of round games in the high-frequency winning mode generated in the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to make it a meaningful one.

It was reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 at the timing when the reservation information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result was reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 126.例文帳に追加Regarding the hold information on the first special figure side, the fluctuation continuation period of the game rounds in all the game rounds triggered by the hold information is, if the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the third reference value It becomes the semi-longest period, and if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, it becomes the longest period. As a result, in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure side holding information corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is acquired. By setting the period, the effect of reducing the digestion efficiency of the game rounds can be generated over a long period of time, and the lengthening is the number of round games in the high-frequency winning mode that occurred in the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to make it stepwise according to

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, the second special figure Continued fluctuation of game rounds in game rounds triggered by the holding information on the second special side, which is the order of digestion one before the holding information on the side (hereinafter referred to as the holding information on the predetermined second special side) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the period is the longest period or the semi-longest period, triggered by the hold information on the side of the second special figure, which is the second order of digestion before the hold information on the predetermined second special figure side The variation continuation period of the game round in the game round may be configured to be the longest period or the semi-longest period, and the second special figure side, which is the order of digestion three pieces before the predetermined second special figure side reserved information The variation continuation period of the game rounds in the game rounds triggered by the hold information may be the longest period or the semi-longest period. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 In all of the game rounds triggered by the reservation information on the special figure side, the variation continuation period of the game rounds may be the longest period or the semi-longest period.

Also, in the high frequency support mode, if the second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, the second special figure The holding information on the side (hereinafter referred to as the holding information on the predetermined second special side) is triggered by the holding information on the side of the second special side, which is earlier in the order of digestion. Although it is the longest period or semi-longest period, in the game round triggered by the holding information on the predetermined second special figure side, the variable continuation period of the game round is determined by lottery with reference to the winning time period table. may be

In addition, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is retained and stored, the second digestion order is earlier than the hold information on the second special figure side The variation continuation period of the game round triggered by the holding information on the special figure side is not limited to the configuration in which the longest period or the semi-longest period, and the holding information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R high probability jackpot result It may be configured such that the above-mentioned lengthening of the fluctuation duration of the game cycle occurs only when is stored withholding, and corresponds to the 5R high probability jackpot result, the 10R low probability jackpot result, or the 10R high probability jackpot result. When the hold information on the second special figure side is held and stored, it may be configured such that the above-mentioned variation continuation period of the game cycle is prolonged, and corresponds to the 5R high probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result When the hold information on the side of the second special figure is reserved and stored, it may be configured such that the fluctuation continuation period of the game round as described above is prolonged, and the second special figure corresponding to one of the jackpot results A configuration may be adopted in which, when the hold information on the side is held and stored, the variation continuation period of the game cycle is lengthened as described above.

In addition, when the hold information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is retained and stored, the second digestion order is earlier than the hold information on the second special figure side In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the fluctuation duration of the game round triggered by the reservation information on the special figure side is the longest period or semi-longest period, the first special corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result When the hold information on the drawing side is held and stored, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round triggered by the holding information on the 1st special drawing side, which is earlier in the order of digestion than the holding information on the 1st special drawing side, is the longest period. Or it may be configured to have a semi-longest period, and when the hold information on the 1st special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is retained and stored, from the hold information on the 1st special figure side It may be configured such that the variation continuation period of the game cycle triggered by the first special figure side hold information or the second special figure side hold information whose digestion order is earlier becomes the longest period or the semi-longest period. In addition, the holding information on the first special figure side that triggers the lengthening of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round as described above is the first special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result It is not limited to the reservation information, it may be the reservation information on the first special figure side corresponding to the 10R high probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result, 10R low probability jackpot result or 10R high probability jackpot result It may be the corresponding reservation information on the first special figure side, it may be the reservation information on the first special figure side corresponding to the 5R high probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, any jackpot result It may be the reservation information on the corresponding first special figure side.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure side reservation information (hereinafter referred to as the predetermined second special figure side reservation information corresponding to the 10R low probability big hit result or the 10R high probability big hit result ) are retained and stored, variation of the game round triggered by the second special figure side suspension information that is one before the digestion order with respect to each predetermined second special figure side suspension information The continuous period may be configured to be the longest period or semi-longest period.

Further, in the game round with the longest period or semi-longest period, the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period and the remaining time image G3 may be displayed as in the first embodiment.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 62 .

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game cycle has passed (step S5601). When the negative determination is made in step S5601, the process during this special figure determination is terminated as it is.

If the final stop period of the game round this time has passed (step S5601: YES), on condition that the result of the judgment that triggered the game round this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S5602: YES), a process for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result (step S5603).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, it is determined whether or not the value of the consumption count counter in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more (step S5604). The number of times of digestion counter is the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, that is, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode. This is a counter for the main side MPU 62 to specify whether or not the number of game times executed without execution of the opening/closing execution mode of the number of rounds is within the range of 30 times, which is the standard number of consecutive games. In other words, in step S5604, after the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is completed, the number of rounds with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode will be It is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode has occurred again.

After the end of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result, the high-probability mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, but the high-frequency support mode continues until the next opening/closing execution mode occurs. In addition, after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result, it becomes a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode. is terminated and the low-frequency support mode is entered. On the other hand, the reference number of consecutive villas is set to 30 times as described above. Therefore, the high frequency support mode is not ended before the standard number of games are executed after the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5604, "1" is set to the consecutive villa occurrence flag provided in the main RAM 64 (step S5605). The continuous game occurrence flag is opened and closed in the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode after the execution mode of opening and closing the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game rounds, which is the standard number of consecutive games, are completed. After the execution mode reoccurs, the main MPU 62 determines whether or not the 30 game times, which is the reference number of consecutive games, have not been completed since the open/close execution mode is terminated. is a flag for When a negative determination is made in step S5604, or when the process of step S5605 is executed, "30", which is the value corresponding to the reference number of consecutive villas, is set in the number-of-digestion counter of the main RAM 64 (step S5605).

On the other hand, if the current game round is a game round corresponding to a hit result different from the 10R low probability big hit result and the 10R high probability big hit result, that is, the small hit result, the 2R high probability big hit result or the 5R high probability big hit result (step S5603: NO), the process advances to step S5607 without executing the processing of steps S5604 to S5606. In step S5607, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-digestions counter in the main RAM 64 . If the value of the counter for the number of times of digestion is already "0", it is maintained as "0" without being decremented by one. After that, if "1" is set in the continuous spawning flag in the main RAM 64 (step S5608: YES), and if the value of the counter for the number of digests in the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S5609: YES), The continuous residence occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5610). In other words, in the state where "1" is set to the consecutive spawning flag, the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs after the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode ends. It is canceled when 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive games, have been completed.

If the process of step S5606 is executed, if the determination is negative in step S5608, if the determination is negative in step S5609, or if the process of step S5610 is executed, the opening period selection process is executed (step S5611). ). Two types of periods, 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period), are set as the period to be the target of the opening period in the same manner as in the first embodiment. One of the two types of periods is selected as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode.

Then, the information of the opening period selected in step S5611 is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of main side RAM64 (step S5612). As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

Thereafter, an opening command including information on the opening period selected this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S5613). By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period. It is executed by the unit 54 . In addition, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the pattern display device 41 is made to perform an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S5614). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from that corresponding to the special figure fixing process to that corresponding to the special figure start processing.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result that triggered the game round this time is neither a big win result nor a small win result (step S5602: NO), the value of the number of times of completion counter of the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S5615). . If the value of the counter for the number of times of digestion is already "0", it is maintained as "0" without being decremented by one.

After that, if "1" is set in the continuous spawning flag in the main RAM 64 (step S5616: YES), and if the value of the counter for the number of times consumed in the main RAM 64 is "0" (step S5617: YES), The continuous residence occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5618). In other words, in the state where "1" is set to the continuous spawning flag, the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode occurs after the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode ends. It is canceled when 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive games, have been completed.

When a negative determination is made in step S5616, when a negative determination is made in step S5617, or when the process of step S5618 is executed, the high probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is "0" and the high frequency support flag is " 1", it is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the fact that the game round ended this time resulted in a 10R low probability jackpot result. It is determined whether or not it is a game round executed in a certain situation (step S5619).

If it is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S5619: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S5620). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. (step S5621). When the value of the number-of-games counter is "0" (step S5621: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S5622). This results in a situation of the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode.

When the negative determination is made in step S5619, when the negative determination is made in step S5621, or when the process of step S5622 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S5623). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the special figure variation start process.

FIG. 83(a) is a flow chart showing the period setting process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. FIG.

If "1" is not set in the consecutive game occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5701: NO), the first game ball that allows 100 game balls to be shot per minute is stored in the shooting cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64. Information corresponding to the cycle is set (step S5702). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b allows the game balls to reach the game area PA. When the amount of rotation operation is such that the first period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

When "1" is set to the consecutive game occurrence flag of the main side RAM 64 (step S5701: YES), the second game ball that allows 90 game balls to be shot per minute is stored in the shooting cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64. Information corresponding to the cycle is set (step S5703). The second period is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, the firing control process (FIG. 11) will continue to receive the condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 78c. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c every time the elapses. As a result, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period elapses, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the rotational operation amount is such that the second period passes, game balls are supplied to the game area PA.

As described above, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode will be executed from the end of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game rounds, which is the standard number of times of consecutive games, are completed. After reoccurrence, in a situation where 30 game rounds, which is the standard number of consecutive games, have not been completed after the open/close execution mode is ended, the shooting cycle of the game ball becomes longer. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode is repeatedly generated in a short time, the game ball firing cycle is lengthened, and the number of game balls per unit time to the game area PA is reduced. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode occurrence frequency per unit time becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

If the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once, the shooting period of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest shooting period. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

FIG. 83(b) is a flow chart showing the period adjustment process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. FIG.

If "1" is not set in the continuous residence occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 (step S5711: NO), the adjustment process for this period ends. If "1" is set in the continuous residence occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5711: YES), the variation duration extension process is executed (step S5712). In the extension process, as in step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the extension period is added to the variable duration period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). Add 1 second as In addition, an extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the extension period is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 (step S5713). When the sound and light side MPU 82 receives the extension command, it grasps that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the extension period, and corrects the contents of the data table for game round production in correspondence with the extension. do. The correction of the contents of the data table for the game round effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. However, it is not limited to this, and the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game cycle is performed by extending the period during which the waiting display is performed in all symbols as in the tenth embodiment. may be

As described above, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode will be executed from the end of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode to the end of the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive games. After reoccurring, in a situation where 30 game rounds, which is the standard number of consecutive homes, have not been completed after the open/close execution mode is ended, the variation continuation period of the game rounds becomes longer. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is repeatedly generated in a short time, the fluctuation duration of the game rounds becomes longer, and the number of times the game rounds occur per unit time decreases. In general, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The variation continuation period of game rounds is not extended only when the open/close execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of times the game is played per unit time.

FIG. 84(a) is a flow chart showing the selection process of the final stop period in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. FIG.

If "1" is not set in the consecutive game occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5801: NO), the first final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S5802). The first final stop period is 0.5 seconds. When "1" is set in the consecutive game occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5801: YES), the second final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S5803). The second final stop period is 3 seconds.

As described above, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode will be executed from the end of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode to the end of the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive games. After the recurrence, the final stopping period of the game rounds is lengthened in a situation where the 30 game rounds, which is the standard number of consecutive residences, have not been completed after the open/close execution mode ends. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is repeatedly generated in a short period of time, the final stop period of the game round is lengthened, and the number of occurrences of the game round per unit time is reduced. In general, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The final stop period of the game cycle does not become long if the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive regulation on the number of times the game is played per unit time.

FIG. 84(b) is a flow chart showing the selection process of the opening period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG.

If "1" is not set in the consecutive house occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5811: NO), the first opening period is selected as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S5812). The first opening period is 4 seconds. If "1" is set in the consecutive house occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5811: YES), the second opening period is selected as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S5813). The second opening period is 10 seconds.

As described above, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode will be executed from the end of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game rounds, which is the standard number of times of consecutive games, are completed. After reoccurrence, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened in a situation where 30 games, which is the reference number of consecutive games, have not been completed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Thus, when the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is repeatedly generated in a short period of time, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, thereby lowering the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The opening period of the opening/closing execution mode does not become long if the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

FIG. 84(c) is a flow chart showing interval period selection processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62 .

If "1" is not set in the continuous residence occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5821: NO), the first interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S5822). The first interval period is 2 seconds. If "1" is set in the consecutive residence occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5821: YES), the second interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S5823). The second interval period is 6 seconds.

As described above, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode will be executed from the end of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode until the 30 game rounds, which is the standard number of times of consecutive games, are completed. After reoccurrence, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened in a situation where 30 game rounds, which is the reference number of consecutive games, have not been completed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is repeatedly generated in a short period of time, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, thereby reducing the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The interval period of the opening/closing execution mode does not become long if the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

FIG. 84(d) is a flow chart showing the ending period selection process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. FIG.

If "1" is not set in the consecutive house occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5831: NO), the first ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S5832). The first ending period is 6 seconds. When "1" is set in the consecutive house occurrence flag of the main RAM 64 (step S5831: YES), the second ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S5833). The second ending period is 12 seconds.

As described above, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode will be executed from the end of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode to the end of the 30 game times, which is the standard number of consecutive games. After reoccurrence, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened in a situation where 30 games, which is the reference number of consecutive games, have not been completed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Thus, when the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode is repeatedly generated in a short time, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is lengthened, and the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

The ending period of the opening/closing execution mode does not become long if the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restriction on the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Next, the manner in which the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time is regulated according to the occurrence frequency of the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. . Figure 85 (a) shows a period of game times corresponding to 10R low probability jackpot result or 10R high probability jackpot result, Figure 85 (b) shows a period of opening and closing execution mode, Figure 85 (c) shows a high FIG. 85(d) shows a continuous monitoring period during which the value of the number of consumption counter in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more, and FIG. It indicates the period during which the generation flag is set to "1".

In the low-frequency support mode shown in FIG. 85(c) and not in the continuous monitoring period as shown in FIG. As shown, the game round corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is executed. Then, the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is executed from timing t2 to timing t3. At the timing t3 when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode changes to the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 85(c), and the continuous villa monitoring period starts as shown in FIG. 85(d).

After that, in the situation of the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 85(c) and the consecutive villa monitoring period as shown in FIG. A game cycle corresponding to the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs again over the timing of . Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode is started. In this case, the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency prize winning mode is started during the continuous monitoring period. Therefore, at the timing t5, which is the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode is started, the continuous-shoe occurrence flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(e). As a result, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are lengthened. Further, after the timing t6, which is the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode started this time ends, the variation continuation period of the game rounds and the final stop period of the game rounds are lengthened. Furthermore, in the situation where "1" is set in the continuous flag occurrence flag, any of the small hit result, 2R high probability big hit result, 5R high probability big hit result, 10R low probability big hit result and 10R high probability big hit result is triggered When such an opening/closing execution mode occurs, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period are lengthened in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, at the timing of t7, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode does not occur, and the standard number of game rounds for consecutive villas are completed, and as shown in FIG. 85(e), the continuous spawning flag in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0". By clearing the consecutive game occurrence flag to "0", the shooting cycle of the game ball returns to the first cycle, the variation continuation period of the game round is not extended, and the final stop period of the game round is It returns to the first final stop period, which is a relatively short period. It should be noted that even if the continuous residence occurrence flag is cleared to "0", the high-frequency support mode continues as shown in FIG. 85(c).

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(c), it is in the high-frequency support mode, not in the continuous monitoring period as shown in FIG. In a situation where the generation flag is not set to "1", a game round corresponding to the 10R low-probability jackpot result is executed from timing t8 to timing t9 as shown in FIG. 85(a). Then, from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10, the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is executed. In this case, since "1" is not set to the consecutive spawning flag, the opening period is the first opening period, which is a relatively short period, and the interval period is the first interval period, which is a relatively short period. The ending period is the first ending period, which is a relatively short period.

Since the opening/closing execution mode this time is the opening/closing execution mode with the largest number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode, the consecutive villa monitoring period is started at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 85(d). After that, at the timing of t11, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode does not occur, and the standard number of game rounds for the consecutive game are completed, so that the consecutive game monitoring period is changed as shown in FIG. 85(d). ends. In addition, at the timing of t12, after the previous opening/closing execution mode ends, the game times of the end reference number of times are completed, so that the high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode ends as shown in FIG. 85(c). becomes.

According to the above configuration, the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode is executed from the end of the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode to the completion of the game rounds of the standard number of consecutive games. In such a case, the continuous occurrence flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", so that various periods are lengthened. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode in which a large profit is awarded is repeatedly generated in a short time, the number of times the game is played per unit time is reduced and the unit time The frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode in the win is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Even if the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurred only once, the various periods did not become long, and the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode occurred repeatedly in a short period of time. Prolongation of various periods occurs in some cases. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game rounds per unit time and the frequency of opening/closing execution modes per unit time.

Even if the high-frequency support mode continues, the above-mentioned various periods do not lengthen unless the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency prize winning mode occurs within the range of the consecutive villa monitoring period. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the number of game rounds per unit time and the frequency of opening/closing execution modes per unit time.

It should be noted that the state in which "1" is set to the consecutive residence occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 is not limited to the configuration in which the consecutive residence occurrence flag is set to "1" when the consecutive residence monitoring period elapses. When the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds by the frequency winning mode occurs, or when the high frequency support mode ends, the state in which the consecutive spawning flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" is released. It may be configured to be

Further, when the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds is generated in the next high-frequency winning mode, the state in which "1" is set to the consecutive game occurrence flag of the main side RAM 64 may be canceled. In this case, if the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the next high-frequency winning mode occurs within the range of the continuous villa monitoring period, the continuous villa monitoring period is newly set and the continuous villa occurrence flag is set to "1". ” continues to be set, and if the opening and closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the next high-frequency winning mode occurs after the Renso monitoring period has elapsed, the Renso monitoring period will be newly set. The state in which "1" is set to the consecutive spawning flag is cancelled.

Further, when the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is generated during the consecutive game monitoring period, it is not limited to the configuration in which the consecutive game occurrence flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". If the open/close execution mode by the high-frequency prize winning mode occurs during the monitoring period of the villa, it may be configured such that the consecutive villa occurrence flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", and the opening and closing is triggered by the result of the jackpot during the period of monitoring the consecutive villa. When the execution mode occurs, it may be configured such that the consecutive game occurrence flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", and when the open/close execution mode occurs in the consecutive game monitoring period triggered by the result of the big win or the result of the small win. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which "1" is set to the consecutive spawning flag of the main side RAM 64 at the beginning.

In addition, when an event in which the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency prize winning mode occurs continuously occurs during the consecutive villa monitoring period, the various periods may be further lengthened.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the tenth embodiment in the structure for preventing the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. The configuration that is different from the tenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62 .

First, 1 is added to the value of the period measurement counter 202 of the main RAM 64 (step S5901). Then, if the value of the period measurement counter 202 after the addition of 1 is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the calculation trigger period (10 minutes) (step S5902: YES), the processing shown in steps S5903 to S5909 is executed.

Specifically, the information of the round number counter 201 for measurement in the main RAM 64 is overwritten in the storage areas 203a to 203f indicated by the value of the write pointer 204 among the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f of the management area 203. (step S5903). After that, update processing of the write pointer 204 is executed (step S5904). In the updating process, 1 is added to the value of the write pointer 204, and when the value after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 204, the write pointer 204 is cleared to "0".

After that, all the information on the total number of rounds stored in the first to sixth storage areas 203a to 203f in the management area 203 are added (step S5905), and the result of the addition is used as information on the number of target rounds. The area 205 is overwritten (step S5906). In addition, the target round number command in which the target round number information overwritten in the target round number area 205 is set is transmitted to the payout control device 77 (step S5907). Thereafter, the value of the measurement round number counter 201 is cleared to "0" (step S5908), and the value of the period measurement counter 202 is cleared to "0" (step S5909).

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing command reception processing executed by the MPU provided in the payout control device 77. FIG. The command reception process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds). In addition, the MPU of the payout control device 77 has a ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and various data etc. temporarily stored in the ROM when executing the control program stored in the ROM. A RAM, which is a memory for storing data, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, various counter circuits as data input/output circuits, and the like are incorporated.

First, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command is received from the main side MPU 62 (step S6001). As in the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 controls the payout of a prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31. device 77, and when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, a prize ball command instructing the payout of 15 game balls is sent to the payout control device 77, and the first When one game ball enters the operating port 33, a prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 77, and one game ball enters the second operating port 34. When a game ball is entered, a prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 77.例文帳に追加The number of game balls to be paid out is stored in the main side RAM 64, and when the stored number reaches a predetermined number such as 15, the main side MPU 62 performs payout control. A prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls may be transmitted to the device 77 .

When a prize ball command is received from the main side MPU 62 (step S6001: YES), the prize ball number storage counter provided in the RAM of the payout control device 77 corresponds to the number of game balls to be paid out set in the prize ball command. Information is added (step S6002). The prize ball number storage counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls to be paid out by the MPU of the payout control device 77 .

When a negative determination is made in step S6001, or when the process of step S6002 is executed, it is determined whether or not the target round number command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S6003). Information on the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 of the main RAM 64 is set in the target round number command as already described. When the target round number command is received from the main side MPU 62 (step S6003: YES), the target round number command received this time is set in the payout side round number area provided in the RAM of the payout control device 77 Information on the number of target rounds is overwritten (step S6004). The payout side round number area is an area for the MPU of the payout control device 77 to specify information on the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 of the main side RAM 64 .

If a negative determination is made in step S6003, or if the processing of step S6004 is executed, other processing is executed (step S6005). In other processing, when a command other than the prize ball command and the target round number command is received from the main side MPU 62, the corresponding processing is executed.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing payout control processing executed by the MPU of the payout control device 77. FIG. The payout control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

If the value of the prize ball number storage counter in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is 1 or more (step S6101: YES), the value of the target round number stored in the payout side round number area in the RAM of the payout control device 77 is the If it is less than the 1 reference value (step S6102: YES), the game ball payout speed by the payout device 76 is set to the first speed (step S6103), and the target round number is equal to or greater than the first reference value. If it is less than the second reference value (step S6104: YES), the payout speed of the game ball by the payout device 76 is set to the second speed (step S6105), and if the value of the number of target rounds is the second reference value or more If (step S6104: NO), the payout speed of the game ball by the payout device 76 is set to the third speed (step S6106). As in the tenth embodiment, the first reference value is "10" and the second reference value is "30".

The first speed is the fastest speed among the game ball payout speeds set in the pachinko machine 10, and when the game ball payout is executed by the payout device 76 at the first speed, the speed is changed once every 60 milliseconds. Game balls are paid out from the payout device 76 in a payout period of 1, and are supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a. The second speed is the second fastest speed among the game ball payout speeds set in the pachinko machine 10. When the game ball payout is executed by the payout device 76 at the second speed, it takes 120 milliseconds. A game ball is paid out from the payout device 76 in one payout cycle and supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a. The third speed is the slowest speed among the game ball payout speeds set in the pachinko machine 10. When the game ball payout is executed by the payout device 76 at the third speed, the speed is 1 every 180 milliseconds. Game balls are paid out from the payout device 76 in a payout period of 1, and are supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a.

Here, in a situation where game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball shooting mechanism 27 and the shooting operation of the game balls is continued, the shooting cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds (600 milliseconds). It has become. Therefore, even if the payout speed of the game ball is the slowest third speed, the cycle in which the game balls are supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a when the payout of the game balls is continued is shorter than the firing period of As a result, even if the game ball payout speed is set to any one of the first to third speeds, if the game ball payout continues, the game ball payout will catch up with the game ball launch. It is possible to prevent a situation in which there is none.

When the process of step S6103, the process of step S6105, or the process of step S6106 is executed, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled so that the game balls are put out at the set payout speed (step S6107). After that, when the payout detection sensor for detecting the game balls put out from the payout device 76 detects the payout of one game ball (step S6108: YES), the number of prize balls is stored in the RAM of the payout control device 77. 1 is subtracted from the counter value (step S6109). In addition, 1 is added to the value of the winning ball counter provided in the RAM of the payout control device 77 (step S6110). The awarded ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls that have been paid out by the MPU of the payout control device 77 . Thereafter, external output processing is executed (step S6111). In the external output process, a winning ball completion signal is output to the management computer of the game hall through an external terminal plate provided in the pachinko machine 10 every time the value of the winning ball counter reaches "10", which is the output reference number. . In other words, every time the output reference number of game balls is completed, a prize ball completion signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall. When the winning ball completion signal is output to the outside, "10", which is the output reference number, is subtracted from the winning ball completed counter.

Thereafter, when the value of the number-of-balls storage counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S6112: YES), payout stop processing is executed (step S6113). As a result, the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 is stopped.

According to the above configuration, the game ball payout speed by the payout device 76 becomes slower as the value of the number of target rounds increases. As a result, the payout speed of the game balls by the payout device 76 slows down when the open/close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly during the measurement target period (one hour). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Even if the game ball payout speed is the slowest third speed, the cycle in which the game balls are supplied to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a when the game ball payout continues is the same as the game ball ejection speed. shorter than the cycle. As a result, even if the game ball payout speed is set to any one of the first to third speeds, if the game ball payout continues, the game ball payout will catch up with the game ball launch. It is possible to prevent a situation in which there is none.

It should be noted that the configuration of slowing down the game ball payout speed when the player's advantage becomes high may be applied to the fifteenth embodiment. In this case, when "1" is set in the consecutive spawning flag of the main side RAM 64, the payout of game balls is stopped until a predetermined stop period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after "1" is set. It may be configured to be Further, when the continuous game occurrence flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", the game balls are put out at a predetermined payout speed and the game ball payout is stopped for a predetermined stop period (for example, 10 seconds). It is good also as a structure repeated alternately.

Further, the parameter that triggers the variation of the game ball payout speed as in the above embodiment is not limited to the number of target rounds stored in the number of target rounds area 205. It may be the value of the total round number counter 64c, the target ball payout rate as in the second embodiment, or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 as in the third embodiment. may

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the above first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, The trigger for changing the shooting cycle of the game ball according to the target ball output rate (the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment), and the variation duration of the game round according to the player's advantage Although the configuration is such that the trigger for changing the determination mode is the same, the configuration may be such that at least a part of the trigger is different. For example, when the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value, one of the game ball firing cycle and the average period of the variation continuation period of the game cycle is lengthened, while the other is maintained. When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the other one of the game ball firing period and the average period of the variation continuation period of the game round becomes longer, but one of them is maintained. . As a result, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing excessively large profits being granted to the player in a short period of time.

Further, for example, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first reference value, one of the game ball firing period and the average period of the variation duration of the game cycle is lengthened, while the other is maintained. When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, one of the game ball firing period and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game round is lengthened while the other is maintained. When the advantage of is equal to or higher than the third reference value, both the game ball shooting cycle and the average period of the fluctuation duration of game rounds may be lengthened. As a result, until the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing excessively large profits being awarded to the player in a short time. becomes equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is possible to sharply increase the function of suppressing excessively large profit being given to the player in a short period of time.

(2) The player's advantage in the first to sixth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, The final stop period of the game cycle is the first final stop period or the second final stop period depending on whether or not the target ball output rate (the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than the second reference value. However, it is not limited to this, and depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, the final stop period of the game round is changed to the first final stop period. The final stop period may be switched between the second final stop period and the final stop period of the game cycle depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. It is good also as a structure switched between periods.

In addition, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the game cycle is finally stopped depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the another reference value. The period may be switched between the first final stop period and the second final stop period. In this case, the final stop period of the game round is changed at a different opportunity from the opportunity for changing the game ball firing period and the average period of the variation continuation period of the game round.

(3) In the first to sixth embodiments, the final stop period of the game round is the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, (i.e., the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment). However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to switch in three or four or more steps. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest final stop period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, the second reference value is selected. If less than the second shortest final stop period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the longest final stop period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the final stop period of the game cycle is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and the function of suppressing excessively large profits being awarded to the player in a short time is implemented step by step. can be increased.

(4) The player's advantage in the first to sixth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, The opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is changed between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether or not the target ball output rate (the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than the second reference value. However, it is not limited to this, and the opening period is set between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. Alternatively, the opening period may be switched between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value.

In addition, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the opening period is set to the first value depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the another reference value. It may be configured to be switched between the opening period and the second opening period. In this case, the opening period is changed at an opportunity different from the opportunity for changing the game ball firing period and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game round.

(5) In the first to sixth embodiments, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is determined by the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, The first opening period and the second opening period are switched according to the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment. , but is not limited to this, and may be configured to be switched in three steps or four steps or more. In the case of a structure that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest opening period is selected, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest opening period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the longest opening period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the opening period is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being given to the player in a short period of time. becomes.

(6) The player's advantage in the first to sixth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, The interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is determined between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether or not the target ball output rate (the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than the second reference value. The interval period is switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value. Alternatively, the interval period may be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value.

Further, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the interval period is set to the first value depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the another reference value. It may be configured to be switched between the interval period and the second interval period. In this case, the interval period is changed at a different timing from the timing at which the firing period of the game ball and the average period of the variation continuation period of the game round are changed.

(7) In the first to sixth embodiments, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, For example, the first interval period and the second interval period are switched according to the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment). , but is not limited to this, and may be configured to be switched in three steps or four steps or more. In the case of a structure that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest interval period is selected, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest interval period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the longest interval period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the interval period is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and the function of suppressing excessively large profits being given to the player in a short period of time can be enhanced step by step. becomes.

(8) In the first to sixth, tenth, and fifteenth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173, the value of the renso counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment). When the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is changed by the opening/closing execution mode, all the interval periods included in one opening/closing execution mode are changed. may be changed, and the rest may not be changed.

(9) The player's advantage in the first to sixth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, The ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is changed between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether or not the target ball output rate (the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or greater than the second reference value. However, it is not limited to this, and the ending period is between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the first reference value. Alternatively, the ending period may be switched between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value.

In addition, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the ending period is set to the first value depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the another reference value. It may be configured to be switched between the ending period and the second ending period. In this case, the ending period is changed at an opportunity different from the opportunity for changing the game ball firing period and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game round.

(10) In the first to sixth embodiments, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is determined by the player's advantage (the value of the total round counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round counter 64c in the second embodiment, For example, the first ending period and the second ending period are switched according to the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment). , but is not limited to this, and may be configured to be switched in three steps or four steps or more. In the case of a structure that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest ending period is selected, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest ending period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the longest ending period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the ending period is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and it is possible to gradually increase the function to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. becomes.

(11) In the first to sixth, tenth, and fifteenth embodiments, all of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode determine the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the total round The value of the number counter 64c, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the target in the tenth embodiment The target round number stored in the round number area 205) is changed according to the configuration, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that while it is changed according to the player's advantage, the rest is not changed according to the player's advantage.

(12) In the first to sixth, tenth, and fifteenth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target in the second embodiment) According to the target ball payout rate in the ball payout rate area 173, the value of the renso counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the target round number stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment) , the opportunity to change the final stop period of the game cycle, the opportunity to change the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the opportunity to change the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the opportunity to change the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. Although the configurations are all the same, the configuration may be such that at least a part of these triggers are different. For example, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, the final stop period of the game cycle is changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value. Both the opening period and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a third reference value, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is changed to be longer. may be configured. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing excessively large profits being granted to the player in a short period of time.

Further, for example, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first reference value, the final stop period of the game cycle is changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value. , both the opening period and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is changed to be longer. When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the fourth reference value, the final stop period of the game cycle, the opening period, the ending period and the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode are all changed to be longer. may be configured. As a result, until the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the fourth reference value, it is possible to smoothly increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being awarded to the player in a short time. becomes equal to or higher than the fourth reference value, it is possible to sharply increase the function of suppressing excessively large profit being given to the player in a short period of time.

(13) In the first to fourth embodiments, the longest period may be the same as the longest variation continuation period of the game set in the period table for the first winning time. In this case, either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c in the second embodiment, When the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 (the value of the renso counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the number of game rounds that can be selected in other situations is increased. The longest fluctuation continuation period is selected from the fluctuation continuation periods.

In addition, the player's advantage in either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target in the second embodiment When the target ball payout rate in the ball payout rate area 173 (the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is set in the period table for the first winning time. A variable duration period of game rounds to be executed may be selected by lottery from a group of a plurality of types of variable duration periods of game rounds longer than a predetermined variable duration period of game rounds. Even in this case, if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, it is set in the first win time period table. A period longer than the predetermined fluctuation continuation period of the game round is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the game round. It should be noted that the group of variable duration periods of the plurality of types of game rounds may or may not include the longest variable duration period of game rounds.

(14) In the first to fourth embodiments, the player's advantage in either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result (in the first embodiment, the total number of rounds counter 64c value, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) is greater than or equal to the third reference value. It is not limited to the configuration in which the longest period is selected as the variable continuation period, and the advantage of the player is any of the jackpot results that trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode as the third criterion. value or more, the longest period may be selected as the variation continuation period of the game round. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of . In addition, the player's advantage, which triggers the selection of the longest period of time as the variable continuation period of game rounds, is not limited to the third reference value or higher, and may be the second reference value or higher. , may be greater than or equal to the first reference value, or may be greater than or equal to another reference value.

(15) The player's advantage in the first to fourth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, The longest period in the game cycle in which either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the target ball output rate (the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value It is not limited to the configuration in which the dedicated movie image G2 is displayed, and the longest period is selected only in the game rounds that result in a 10R high-probability jackpot in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. In addition, the configuration may be such that the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period is displayed. In this case, in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, if the open/close execution mode for the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs, and after that, if the high-probability mode is entered, the game round Since the duration of fluctuation of is the longest period, it takes a long time for the most advantageous situation to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. In addition, by displaying the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period, it is possible for the player to recognize that the open/close execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, will occur, and that the high-probability mode will follow. becomes.

(16) In the first to fourth embodiments, a semi-longest period is set separately from the longest period, and the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c, the 10R low probability jackpot result in a situation where the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, or the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment) is greater than or equal to the third reference value. When a different game cycle occurs, the semi-maximum period is selected as the variable continuation period of the game cycle, and a movie image dedicated to the semi-maximum period is displayed, and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. When a game round resulting in a 10R high-probability jackpot occurs, the longest period may be selected as the variation continuation period of the game round and a movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed. In this case, the semi-maximum period is 9 minutes and 30 seconds. It is possible to make it take a long time until the opening and closing execution mode is generated, and different performances are executed depending on whether the 10R low probability big win result occurs or the 10R high probability big win result occurs. It becomes possible to do so.

(17) The player's advantage in the first to fourth and twelfth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target payout rate in the second embodiment) The variable continuation period of the game round is not limited to the configuration in which the variation continuation period of the game round is lengthened according to the target ball output rate in the area 173 (the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment), and the variation continuation period of the game round may be configured such that the averaging period of is long. For example, various period tables for determining the variable continuation period of game rounds by lottery may be changed according to the player's advantage. In this case, a first table group of various period tables and a second table group of various period tables are provided, and when the second table group is referred to more than the first table group, the average variation continuation period of game rounds Make the period longer. Then, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined reference value, the table group referred to when determining the variation continuation period of the game round is changed from the first table group to the second table group. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value, the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds is lengthened.

Further, as the table group, a third table group is provided in which the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game rounds when referred to is longer than that of the second table group, and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. In this case, the group of tables referred to when determining the variable continuation period of the game round is changed from the first group of tables to the second group of tables. A configuration may be adopted in which the group of tables referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of a round is changed from the second group of tables to the third group of tables. As a result, the average period of the variable continuation period of the number of games can be lengthened step by step according to the player's advantage.

(18) In the first to seventh and twelfth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target payout rate in the second embodiment) The variation continuation period of the game cycle or the variation continuation period of the game cycle according to the target ball output rate in the area 173, the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment) When the averaging period of is long, the probability of occurrence of game rounds in which the out-of-reach display is displayed may be increased accordingly. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity when the variation continuation period of the game rounds or the average period of the variation continuation period of the game rounds is lengthened.

(19) The player's advantage in the first to seventh and fifteenth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target payout rate in the second embodiment) The target payout rate in the area 173, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment, the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, and the consecutive game occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment. value) of the game ball is changed to a longer cycle than the first cycle, the changed long firing cycle is applied only in the opening and closing execution mode during the advantageous period, and the opening and closing in the advantageous period In a period in which the execution mode is not executed, the shooting cycle of game balls may be changed to the first cycle. Conversely, the changed long firing cycle may be applied only during the period in which the open/close execution mode is not in the advantageous period, and may not be applied in the open/close execution mode during the advantageous period.

(20) In the first to fourth embodiments, the timing at which the display of the remaining time image G3 is started is arbitrary as long as it is after the timing at which the display of the longest period dedicated movie image G2 is started. For example, the display of the remaining time image G3 may be started after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period was started.

(21) As a configuration for changing the game situation according to the player's advantage, the following configuration may be applied in addition to or instead of the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(21-1) Player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the third In the case of the embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181; in the tenth embodiment, the target round number stored in the target round number area 205; value) at least during the opening and closing execution mode, the opening duration period of T seconds has elapsed in one round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, and the special electric It is a configuration that ends when one of the conditions is satisfied that Q game balls enter the winning device 32, and the game ball shooting cycle is when the player's advantage is less than a predetermined reference value. t1 seconds if the
t1×Q<T≦t2×Q
It is good also as composition which becomes. As a result, before the firing cycle of the game ball is changed to a longer cycle according to the player's advantage, Q or more special calls, which is the upper limit number, are generated in each round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. While it is possible for the game ball to enter the winning device 32, after the firing cycle of the game ball is changed to a longer cycle according to the player's advantage, opening and closing in the high frequency winning mode. It becomes impossible or difficult for game balls to enter Q or more special electric prize winning devices 32, which is the upper limit number, in each round game in the execution mode. In this way, by varying the firing cycle of the game balls according to the player's advantage, it is possible to vary the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode. becomes.

In addition, one of the following conditions is met: that one round game in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode has passed an opening duration period of T seconds, or that Q game balls enter the special electric winning device 32. If the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shooting cycle of the game ball is t1 second, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, the second If it is less than the reference value, it takes t2 seconds (t2>t1), and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, it takes t3 seconds (t3>t2).
t1×Q<t2×Q≦T<t3×Q,
or t1×Q<t2×Q<T≦t3×Q,
or t1×Q<t2×Q<T<t3×Q,
It is good also as composition called this. With this configuration, Q or more, which is the upper limit number, in each round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode until the game ball firing cycle is lengthened by one step according to the player's advantage. While it is possible to enter the game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32, the shooting cycle of the game ball is extended by two stages according to the player's advantage, so that the high frequency winning mode In each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes impossible or difficult for game balls to enter Q or more special electric prize winning devices 32, which is the upper limit number. In this way, by varying the firing cycle of the game balls in stages according to the player's advantage, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode can be changed in stages. can be changed to

(21-2) In the configuration in which one round game in the opening and closing execution mode ends when the upper limit number of game balls enter the special electric winning device 32, the upper limit number is the player's advantage (first implementation In the case of the form, the value of the total round number counter 64c; in the second embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173; In the embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205, or in the fifteenth embodiment, it may be configured to vary according to the value of the consecutive spawning flag in the main side RAM 64). For example, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the upper limit number is 10, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the upper limit number is is eight, and if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the upper limit number may be five. By varying the upper limit number of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game according to the player's advantage in this way, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode in the high frequency prize winning mode. It is possible to change the number.

(21-3) In the configuration in which one round game in the opening and closing execution mode ends when the upper limit period of the round game elapses, the upper limit period is the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the total round The value of the number counter 64c, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the target in the tenth embodiment The number of target rounds stored in the number-of-rounds area 205 may be changed in accordance with the value of the consecutive spawning flag of the main side RAM 64 in the case of the fifteenth embodiment. For example, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the upper limit period is 11 seconds, and if the player's advantage is greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the upper limit period is 6 seconds, and if the player's advantage is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the upper limit period may be 4 seconds. Thus, by varying the upper limit period of the round game according to the player's advantage, it is possible to vary the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. It becomes possible.

(21-4) Two gates through which the game ball can pass are provided in the game area PA, and the game ball passes through one of the two gates after the game round resulting in the big win is completed. Then, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode of the round game of 5 times after that, and when the game ball passes through the other gate, either of the opening/closing execution mode of the round game of 2 times or the opening/closing execution mode of the round game of 10 times is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the mode is determined by lottery and the mode is shifted to the determined opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the two gates are arranged side by side, and a game ball that reaches the area where the two gates are provided is guided to one of the gates by a distribution member or the like with a predetermined probability, and the other gate is guided to the other gate. It is configured to be guided to the gate with a specific probability. In the configuration, when the opening and closing execution mode of the round game occurs 10 times, the game ball firing cycle, the game round fluctuation continuation period, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening and closing execution mode is longer than before, and when another opening/closing execution mode occurs, the lengthening may not occur. In addition, when the opening and closing execution mode of the round game of 5 times or the opening and closing execution mode of the round game of 10 times occurs, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening and closing execution mode At least one of the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period may be longer than before, and when another opening/closing execution mode occurs, the lengthening may not occur.

(21-5) Player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the third In the case of the embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181; in the tenth embodiment, the target round number stored in the target round number area 205; value) is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, stopping the progress of the game, stopping the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 62, and during the opening/closing execution mode, a game ball into a predetermined ball entering portion (for example, the general winning hole 31). Decrease in the number of game balls paid out for each incoming ball, stop the progress of the game after the opening/closing execution mode ends, shift to the normal game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and determine the player's advantage If there are multiple stages of setting values, a transition to the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage, waiting for the start of the opening/closing execution mode, initialization of the main side RAM 64, and the like may occur. For example, when the total number of game balls paid out to the player reaches 12000 during the advantage period, the progress of the game may be forcibly stopped at that point.

(21-6) Player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the third In the case of the embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181; in the tenth embodiment, the target round number stored in the target round number area 205; value) is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the jackpot result may not be selected in the success/failure determination process. In this case, during the period in which the big hit result is not selected in the success/failure determination process, the high-frequency support mode is set, and the frequency of balls entering the second operation opening 34 increases, so that the number of game balls owned by the player does not decrease so much. A small hit result can occur with a high probability based on the entry of the game ball into the second operation opening 34, and in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, about one or two game balls can land in the special electric prize winning device 32, so that the number of game balls owned by the player can be slightly increased.

(21-7) The interval period in the open/close execution mode may be set to a relatively long period such as 5 seconds. In this case, by setting the support mode to be the high-frequency support mode instead of the low-frequency support mode during the interval period, the second operation is performed during the interval period even if the interval period is set to a relatively long period. It is also possible that the number of game balls owned by the player does not decrease so much because the game balls enter the opening 34 at a high frequency.

(21-8) As the high-probability mode of the success/fail lottery mode, a first high-probability mode and a second high-probability mode are set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result is relatively high and low, and open and close during the advantageous period. The first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode may alternately switch each time the execution mode occurs. In addition, in the win/fail lottery mode, there is one type of high-probability mode, and as a game state that is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, a continuation state is set in which the game state continues until the next open/close execution mode occurs. In this configuration, the high-probability mode and the continuous state may alternately switch each time the opening/closing execution mode occurs during the advantageous period.

(21-9) The winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target payout rate in the second embodiment). The target ball payout rate in the area 173, the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the If there is, the value of the consecutive spawning flag in the main side RAM 64) may be configured to decrease as the value increases. In addition, in a configuration in which the number of executions of games in which the high-probability mode continues is limited, the limited number of times is determined by the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c, the second The target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the embodiment, the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the target stored in the target number of rounds area 205 in the tenth embodiment. The number of rounds (the value of the consecutive spawning flag in the main RAM 64 in the case of the fifteenth embodiment) may decrease as the number of rounds increases. In addition, in the configuration in which the number of executions of games in which the high-frequency support mode continues is limited, the limited number of times is determined by the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c, the second The target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the embodiment, the value of the consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the target number of rounds area 205 in the tenth embodiment The number of target rounds, or the value of the continuous spawning flag in the main side RAM 64 in the case of the fifteenth embodiment), may decrease as the number increases.

(21-10) The period in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state in the opening/closing execution mode is determined by the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, In the case of the tenth embodiment, the number of target rounds stored in the target number of rounds area 205, In the case of the fifteenth embodiment, it may be configured such that the higher the value of the consecutive spawning flag in the main side RAM 64, the shorter the time.

(21-11) The opening/closing number of the special electric prize winning device 32 in one round game in the opening/closing execution mode may vary according to the player's advantage. For example, until the total number of game balls acquired by the player during the advantageous period reaches 2000, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 opens and closes in one round game is 1, and when the number reaches 2000 or more, , the number of times of opening and closing the special electric prize winning device 32 in one round game is 2 times, and when the number is 3000 or more, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric prize winning device 32 in one round game may be 3 times. .

(21-12) In the high-frequency support mode, the frequency of the second operating port 34 being open per unit time may gradually decrease as the number of occurrences of the jackpot result increases during the advantageous period. For example, as the number of occurrences of the jackpot result increases during the advantageous period, the period during which the pattern is displayed in the normal pattern display section 38a may be longer. Further, for example, the period during which the second operation port 34 is open in the high-frequency support mode may be shortened as the number of occurrences of the jackpot result increases during the advantageous period.

(21-13) By slowing down the game ball payout capability itself of the payout device 76 instead of changing the game situation according to the player's advantage, The ratio of the total number of balls paid out may be less than 2.2 times.

(22) The types of player's advantages that trigger the change of the game situation are not limited to those in the above embodiments, and the following may be applied.

(22-1) A predetermined advantageous period, which is one of a high-probability mode game state, a high-frequency support mode game state, and a high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode game state, has started. The game situation may be changed according to the number of times the game has been completed from the start to the occurrence of a predetermined big win result. For example, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 30 games after the start of the predetermined advantageous period, the game ball firing period, the game round fluctuation continuation period, the game round final stop period, and the open/close execution mode The target period, which is at least one of the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period, may be longer than before. As a result, when a predetermined big winning result occurs early after the start of the predetermined advantageous period, it is possible to lengthen the target period.

Further, when a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 50 games after the start of the predetermined advantageous period, the target period becomes a first target period longer than before, and the predetermined advantageous period is started. The target period may be a second target period longer than the first target period when a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 25 games from the first target period. As a result, the smaller the number of games played between the start of the predetermined advantageous period and the occurrence of the predetermined big win result, the longer the target period.

The predetermined jackpot results may be all the jackpot results, may be the jackpot results that trigger the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode, or may be the opening/closing in the high-frequency winning mode with the maximum number of rounds. It may be a jackpot result that triggers the execution mode, it may be a jackpot result in which the success/failure lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is frequently performed. It may be a big win result in the support mode, or a big win result in which the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

(22-2) Regardless of the winning lottery mode, the period of the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the advantageous period, and the period of the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is the advantageous period. may be configured. In this case, in the first embodiment, the number of round games that occurred during the advantageous period is counted using the total round number counter 64c. The number of opening/closing execution modes, which are prize-winning modes, is counted using the consecutive counter 181 .

(22-3) The opening period and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode may vary according to the total number of game balls to be paid out. For example, when the total number of paid out game balls reaches 5000, the first stage of the opening period and the ending period is lengthened, and when the total number of paid out game balls reaches 10000, the opening period Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the second stage of the ending period is lengthened. In this case, the opening period and the ending period are longer when the second stage of lengthening is performed than when the first stage of lengthening is performed. Further, the lengthening of the first stage is performed by adding an additional period to each of the initial period of the opening period and the initial period of the ending period, and the extension of the second stage is the initial period of the opening period. and the initial period of the ending period may be added by twice the additional period.

(22-4) The opening period and the ending period of the open/close execution mode may be changed according to the total number of acquired game balls (total number of game balls paid out - total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA). good. For example, when the total number of acquired game balls reaches 2000, the first stage of the opening period and the ending period is prolonged, and when the total number of acquired game balls reaches 3000, the opening period Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the second stage of the ending period is lengthened. In this case, the opening period and the ending period are longer when the second stage of lengthening is performed than when the first stage of lengthening is performed. Further, the lengthening of the first stage is performed by adding an additional period to each of the initial period of the opening period and the initial period of the ending period, and the extension of the second stage is the initial period of the opening period. and the initial period of the ending period may be added by twice the additional period.

(23) When the high-frequency support mode ends, it is not limited to the configuration in which the status with various periods changed is released, and a configuration in which the status with various periods changed is released under the following conditions is also possible. good.

(23-1) When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the various periods are changed reaches the end reference number, the state in which the various periods are changed may be canceled.

(23-2) In the second embodiment, when the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 reaches the end reference value, the state in which the various periods are changed is canceled. good too. In this case, by setting the end reference value to a value smaller than the first reference value, it is possible to prevent the repetition of changing and canceling various periods in a short period of time.

(23-3) A configuration in which the state in which the various periods are changed is canceled when the number of game rounds executed without occurrence of the predetermined open/close execution mode after the various periods are changed reaches the end reference number. may be In this case, the predetermined opening/closing execution mode may be an all opening/closing execution mode, an opening/closing execution mode based on a high-frequency winning mode, or a high-frequency winning mode and an opening/closing execution mode based on the maximum number of rounds.

(23-4) A configuration may be adopted in which the state in which the various periods are changed is canceled when the end reference period has passed since the various periods were changed.

(23-5) A configuration may be adopted in which the state in which the various periods are changed is canceled when a game round can be executed in the low probability mode.

(24) When the player's advantage becomes low in addition to or in place of the configuration for changing the game situation to allow the player's advantage to be lowered when the player's advantage becomes high. A configuration may be adopted in which the game situation is changed to one in which the player's advantage can be increased immediately. For example, when the player's advantage is below a predetermined reference value, the firing period of the game ball, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the special electric At least one of the closing period, the interval period, and the ending period of the winning device 32 may be shortened, and the shortening may be performed in stages according to the player's advantage. good too.

(25) Player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the third embodiment) If so, the value of the consecutive game counter 181, the number of target rounds stored in the target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment, and the value of the consecutive game occurrence flag in the main RAM 64 in the fifteenth embodiment) At least one of the final stop period of the game cycle, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode is varied according to the It may be configured such that it is not varied according to the above-mentioned advantage of .

(26) A configuration in which the programs in the main ROM 63 are divided into a group of internal programs and a group of programs outside the area, and the storage areas of the main RAM 64 are divided into a group of internal storage areas and a group of external storage areas. good too. In this case, a program for executing the processing for advancing the game is set in the intra-region program group, and the intra-region storage area group of the main side RAM 64 is used when the processing for advancing the game is executed. and Also, in the first embodiment, processing for updating the total round number counter 64c, and in the second embodiment, the entering ball number area 150, the management area 160, the calculation area 171, and the write pointer 172 and processing for updating the target ball payout rate area 173, processing for updating the consecutive house counter 181 of the main side RAM 64 in the third embodiment, and measurement rounds in the tenth embodiment. Processing for updating the number counter 201, the period measurement counter 202, the management area 203, the write pointer 204, and the target round number area 205. In the case of the fifteenth embodiment, for updating the continuous spawning flag in the main RAM 64. Programs corresponding to the processes of (1) are set in the out-of-area program group, and when these processes are executed, the out-of-area storage area group of the main side RAM 64 is used. As a result, the process for updating can be executed while being clearly distinguished from the process for progressing the game. Even when processing using programs contained in the program group within the area is being executed, although it is possible to refer to the storage area of the storage area group outside the area, rewriting is prohibited. It is preferable that the storage areas of the intra-region storage area group can be referred to but not rewritten even in a situation where the process using the program included in the is being executed.

(27) A configuration may be adopted in which the pending information acquired due to the occurrence of the winning in the first operating port 33 and the pending information acquired due to the occurrence of the winning in the second operating port 34 are not stored separately. . Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the retained information on the side of the second operating port 34 is preferentially digested, and conversely, the configuration in which the retained information on the side of the first operating port 33 is preferentially digested may be employed. It may be applied, and a configuration in which the acquisition order is digested regardless of whether it is the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 may be applied.

(28) When the hold information acquired due to the occurrence of the winning to the first operation opening 33 is the target of the winning judgment, and the holding information acquired due to the occurrence of the winning to the second operation opening 34 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the distribution mode of the jackpot result is the same in the case where is the target of the judgment.

(29) Display control based on a command sent from the main controller 60 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 80 based on the command sent from the main controller 60 The device 90 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 80 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main controller 60 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 60 . Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 80 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 80 to the display control device 90 are arbitrary.

(30) The device on which the game-playing motion is executed is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and a configuration in which the game-playing motion is performed by the operation of a movable decorative member is also possible. Alternatively, the game-playing action may be performed by lighting a predetermined light-emitting portion, or the game-playing action may be performed by a combination of all or part of the above modes.

(31) In the above embodiment, the stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed in the special figure display units 37a and 37b, but instead of this, the special figure display units 37a and 37b may be defective Well, any game result may be configured to display a common stop result in the special figure display units 37a and 37b, and by randomly displaying the stop result in the special figure display units 37a and 37b, As a result, the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b may be configured such that it is not possible to identify which game result. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the special figure display units 37a and 37b are displayed in a predetermined pattern regardless of the results of the judgment and the distribution judgment. Although it was configured to notify the results of the success/failure determination and the distribution determination based on the stop result, the special figure display units 37a and 37b may also be configured to perform reach display and reach production, and the game times in which reach production occurs Then, the stop result different from the game times in which the reach effect does not occur may be configured to be displayed in the special figure display portions 37a and 37b.

(32) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that are different from the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, and a game ball is dropped from the upper part of the game area instead of being supplied to the game area by the shooting of the game ball. A pachinko machine in which game balls are supplied to a game area by pressing a pachinko machine, a pachinko machine that generates a right when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device and generates a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine , the present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as majournals.

The present invention is also applied to a ball circulation type pachinko machine in which the game balls discharged from the game area are circulated in the pachinko machine without being discharged from the game area to be supplied to the game area again. can. In the ball circulation type pachinko machine, the player is not allowed to touch the game balls circulated in the pachinko machine, and furthermore, the game ball is used based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part. The number of possible game balls is provided to the player, and when one game ball is shot into the game area, the number of usable game balls is reduced by one.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines. The present invention can also be applied to a medalless slot machine in which information on the number of virtual medals available to the player is used as game value instead of using medals as game value.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

(33) The characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the second embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the seventh embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the ninth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the ninth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the fifteenth embodiment may be combined, or the characteristic configuration of the third embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the fifth embodiment. The characteristic configuration and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment may be combined. , and the characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment may be combined. In addition, any combination of the configurations of the different modes may be applied to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Based on the occurrence of a profit giving event (entering a game ball into one of the ball entry units 31 to 34, a game turn corresponding to the result of a big hit) due to the game being played, a profit is given to the player (ball entry unit 31 to 34 is a profit giving event, the game ball is a profit giving event, and if the game turn corresponding to the jackpot result is a profit giving event, the opening and closing execution mode is generated). If the entry of the game ball into any one of the ball sections 31 to 34 is a profit giving event, the function of executing the processing of steps S209 and S217 in the main side MPU 62, the payout control device 77, and the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is a benefit giving event, the function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main MPU 62);
Player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth, and twelfth embodiments, the target ball output rate in the second embodiment, and the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment , the presence or absence of the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the presence or absence of the advantageous period in the eighth embodiment, the presence or absence of the open/close execution mode in the ninth embodiment, and the target in the tenth, eleventh, and sixteenth embodiments. The number of rounds, in the 13th and 14th embodiments, the reservation information on the second special figure side corresponding to the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result is reserved and stored. status determination means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the period setting process in the main MPU 62, A function of performing period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62, a function of performing final stop period selection processing in the main side MPU 62, a function of performing opening period selection processing in the main side MPU 62, and an interval period selection processing in the main side MPU 62. , the function of executing the ending period selection processing in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the cycle setting processing in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the processing of steps S2201 to S2204 in the main MPU 62. function to execute period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62; in the third embodiment, a function to execute cycle setting processing in the main MPU 62; A function of executing period adjustment processing in the side MPU 62, a function of executing period adjustment processing in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing steps S2901 to S2907 in the main side MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment. , the function of executing the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps S3103 to S3109 and steps S3207 to S3212 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment. , in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3406, S3407, and S3413 in the main MPU 62; In the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the final stop period selection process, the opening start process, the closing period selection process, and the ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of executing the opening period selection process and the ending period selection process in the main side MPU 62, the function of executing the period adjustment process in the main side MPU 62 in the 12th embodiment, and the main side A function to execute the processing of steps S5403 to S5407 and steps S5408 to S5412 in the MPU 62. In the 14th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S5503 to S5509 and steps S5510 to S5516 in the main MPU 62. In the embodiment of the main side MPU 62, the function of executing cycle setting processing, period adjustment processing, final stop period selection processing, opening period selection processing, interval period selection processing, and ending period selection processing, 16th embodiment Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S6101 to S6106 by the MPU of the payout control device 77),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, the player is given a profit based on the occurrence of the profit giving event by playing the game, so the player plays the game expecting the profit giving event to occur. Become. In this case, since the subsequent game situation is determined according to the player's advantage, it is possible to appropriately give the player a profit.

Feature A2. Target period (in the first to third and fifteenth embodiments, the firing period, the variation continuation period of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, and the opening and closing execution mode The ending period, the variation continuation period of the game round in the fourth embodiment, the average variation continuation period of the game round in the fifth to sixth embodiments, the firing cycle and the variation continuation period of the game round in the seventh embodiment. Average, firing cycle in the eighth and ninth embodiments, final stop period of the game round in the tenth embodiment, opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, opening period of the special electric prize winning device 32, closing period of the opening and closing execution mode, opening and closing The interval period of the execution mode, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, the opening period and the ending period in the eleventh embodiment, the variation continuation period of the game round in the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, and the number of game balls in the sixteenth embodiment. (payout speed) fluctuates, the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit giving event may vary,
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the situation determining means varies the target period according to the player's advantage.

According to feature A2, in a configuration in which the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit granting event can vary due to changes in the target period, the subsequent target period varies according to the player's advantage. be. Then, by changing the target period, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit granting event will change, and as a result, the period required from the predetermined timing to the granting of the benefit will fluctuate. Become. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature A3. The situation determining means determines when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value) or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage (first reference value). value, second reference value, or third reference value), the target period is set to be longer than before.

According to the feature A3, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the target period becomes longer than before, and the target period is extended to the predetermined advantage or higher. , the period required from the predetermined timing until the occurrence of the predetermined benefit giving event is lengthened, and the length of the period lengthens the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A4. As the predetermined advantages, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) in which the player's advantage is higher than the first predetermined advantage are set. has been
The situation determining means
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, means for making the target period longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1504, S1603, and S1604 in the main MPU 62; in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2104, S2303, and S2304 in the main MPU 62; In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2504, S2703, and S2704 in the main MPU 62; A function of executing the processing of steps S4413, S4506, S4511, S4512, S4604 and S4605, and executing the processing of S4704, S4705, S4804 and S4805 in the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment. function, a function of executing the processing of step S4903 in the main side MPU 62 in the 12th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6105 in the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the 16th embodiment);
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, means for making the target period longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1506, S1606, and S1607 in the main MPU 62; in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2106, S2306, and S2307 in the main MPU 62; In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2506, S2706, and S2707 in the main MPU 62; A function of executing the processing of steps S4415, S4507, steps S4513 to S4515, steps S4607 and S4608, and in the eleventh embodiment, executing the processing of steps S4707, S4708, S4807 and S4808 in the main MPU 62 function, the function of executing the processing of step S4905 in the main side MPU 62 in the 12th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6106 in the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the 16th embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A4, the target period is lengthened step by step according to the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's advantage, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the occurrence of the predetermined profit giving event. The time required to reach the As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being granted to the player in a short period of time.

Feature A5. supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to a game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a supply operation is performed by a player in a state where game balls can be supplied;
The profit giving event is generated when a game ball enters a ball entry means (general prize winning port 31, special electric prize winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) provided in the game area. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the target period is the predetermined period.

According to the feature A5, the predetermined cycle in which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied according to the player's advantage. By varying the predetermined period, the period required from when one game ball enters the ball entering means to when the next game ball enters the ball entering means varies, and the period varies, thereby increasing profits. The period required for granting will vary. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature A6. In each game cycle, the game cycle operation is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the game cycle operation is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the circulation operation is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92),
The game control means includes an operation period determination means (main in the first and fourth embodiments) for determining an operation execution period (a variation continuation period of a game round or an execution period of a game round) during which the game round operation is executed. The function of executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, the function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the steps S2601 to S2601 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step S2614, a function of executing the processing of steps S2901 to S2910 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and executing the processing of steps S3001 to S3013 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. function to execute the processing of steps S3301 to S3303 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment),
The profit awarding event is configured to occur after the game replay action corresponding to the awarding of the profit is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the target period is the action execution period or an average period of the action execution periods.

According to feature A6, the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period varies according to the player's advantage. Then, when the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates, the period required for completion of the game-playing action corresponding to the awarding of the profit fluctuates, and the profit is awarded as the period fluctuates. The period required for this will vary. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the situation determining means changes the mode of determination of the action execution period by the action period deciding means in accordance with the player's advantage.

According to feature A7, when the action execution period of the game-playing action is changed according to the player's advantage, the mode of determining the action execution period by the action period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately give a profit to the player while using the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature A8. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, normal period table 191 and shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of first to third base array tables 195 to 197) is provided,
The operation period determination means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type corresponding to the game situation,
The plurality of types of period information groups are set so that the average period of the action execution period determined by referring to the action period determination means is different,
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the situation determination means changes the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determination means according to the player's advantage.

According to feature A8, the type of period information group referred to by the action period determination means is configured to differ according to the player's degree of advantage, so that the type of period information group to be referred to is made different. With such a simple configuration, it is possible to vary the average period of the operation execution period.

Feature A9. The information storage means stores, as the period information group, a first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment), and an average period of the operation execution period shorter than that of the first period information group. at least a second period information group (shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment),
The operation period determining means is
With reference to the first period information group in the first game situation (high-frequency support mode and the number of pieces of hold information on the second special figure side that are held and stored is less than 2), the operation execution period means for determining (function for executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
In the second game situation (high frequency support mode and the number of pieces of hold information stored on the second special figure side is two or more), the operation execution period with reference to the second period information group means for determining (function for executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
with
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage, the situation determination means causes the action period determination means to refer to the first period information group even in the second game situation (the first period information group). 6. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the function of executing affirmative determination in step S3008 of the main side MPU 62 in the embodiment of 6).

According to the feature A9, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the action execution determining means normally selects the second period information group having a shorter average action execution period than the first period information group. Instead of being referred to, the first period information group is referred to. As a result, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the average period of the operation execution period can be lengthened, and accordingly, the game-turning operation corresponding to the award of profit is terminated. It will take longer to receive the benefits, and the fluctuations in that period will lengthen the time it takes to receive the benefits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Further, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the first period information group to be referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second game situation is the operation period determining means in the first game situation. It is a period information group referred to by . As a result, there is no need to prepare a dedicated period information group corresponding to the case where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, so the above-described superior performance can be achieved while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity. It becomes possible to produce an effect.

Feature A10. The situation determination means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determination means according to the player's advantage (the function of executing the period adjustment processing of the main side MPU 62 in the first to fourth embodiments). ), the game machine according to feature A6.

According to feature A10, when the action execution period of the action for game replay is changed according to the player's advantage, the action period determination is performed instead of changing the action execution period determination mode by the action period determining means. The operation execution period determined by the means is varied. As a result, it is possible to change the action execution period according to the player's advantage while maintaining the action execution period determination mode in the action period determining means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature A11. When the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied according to the player's advantage, the situation determination means is configured to correspond to the length of the action execution period determined by the action period determination means. (function of executing the period adjustment processing of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature A11, when the action execution period determined by the action period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the change is made in accordance with the length of the action executing period determined by the action period determining means. is done. This makes it possible to change the action execution period so as to effectively optimize the provision of profits to the player.

Feature A12. The situation determining means
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, means for extending the action execution period determined by the action period determining means by an additional period (steps S2802 to S2802 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment a function to execute the processing of step S2804);
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a second predetermined advantage higher than the first predetermined advantage, the action execution period determined by the action period determining means is set to be equal to or greater than the additional period. A means for lengthening by several times (a function of executing the processing of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, comprising:

According to the feature A12, when the player's advantage increases, the action execution period becomes longer than before, and the action execution period becomes longer than before, so that the game replay corresponding to the provision of profits is made. The period required for the action to be completed becomes longer than before, and the period required until the profit is given becomes longer than before due to the fluctuation of the period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Also, the action execution period is lengthened step by step according to the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's advantage, the longer the action execution period, and the stepwise lengthening of the action execution period lengthens the period required for completion of the game replay action corresponding to the provision of profit. It is lengthened step by step, and as the period is lengthened, the period required until the benefit is granted is lengthened step by step. As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being granted to the player in a short period of time.

Further, when the operation period determining means is lengthened in stages, the natural number is increased in the case of adding a natural number multiple of the additional period to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which a plurality of types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Feature A13. When the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is changed according to the player's advantage, the situation determination means changes the action execution period determined by the action period determination means to a first action execution period and a second action execution period. A feature characterized by varying the same period from the operation execution period in any of the second operation execution periods (the function of executing the period adjustment processing of the main side MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments) The gaming machine according to any one of A10 to A12.

According to feature A13, when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is varied according to the player's advantage, the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is the first action execution period and the second action execution period. Since the same period is varied from the operation execution period regardless of the operation execution period, the configuration for varying the operation execution period can be simplified.

Feature A14. The game control means controls the game execution means in accordance with a group of operation mode information (data table for game round performance) pre-stored in specific storage means (sound and light side ROM 83) to execute the game round operation. and
The situation determination means changes the action execution period according to the player's advantage by processing the action mode information group corresponding to the action execution period determined by the action period decision means (first The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A13, characterized in that the function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound and light side MPU 82 in the embodiment).

According to the feature A14, by processing the action mode information group corresponding to the action execution period determined by the action period determination means, the action execution period is varied according to the player's advantage, It is possible to vary the action execution period in accordance with the player's advantage without increasing the number of action mode information groups pre-stored in the storage means.

Feature A15. A configuration in which a variable display of patterns is performed in the game-playing operation,
As the display mode of the pattern in the variable display of the pattern, a high identification display mode (low speed fluctuation display) and a low identification display mode (high speed fluctuation display) in which the recognizability of the pattern by appearance is relatively high and low are set. ,
As a mode of the variable display of the patterns, after the state in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode continues for a predetermined period, the predetermined patterns are switched to the state in which the high identification display mode is displayed. has the form of
The situation determination means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determination means according to the player's advantage by varying the period during which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A14, characterized in that the function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound and light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment.

According to feature A15, by varying the period displayed in the low-identification display mode, the action execution period determined by the action period determining means is varied according to the player's advantage. There is no need to store information for determining the mode of variable display of patterns corresponding to each pattern whose execution period can vary. Furthermore, when the action execution period is varied, the period during which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode is changed, so the pattern variable display mode is processed so as to correspond to the variation in the action execution period. Even if this is done, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature A16. Special transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player (10R low-probability jackpot result or 10R high-probability jackpot result triggered opening/closing execution mode) (function to execute special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) with
Said game control means is means (main side A function of executing the processing of steps S506 and S703 in the MPU 62, and a function of executing the processing of step S1703 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (third reference value), the situation determination means extends the action execution period of the game-turning action to shift to the special game state to a predetermined length. Long-term selection means (function for executing the processing of step S604 of the main side MPU 62 in the first embodiment, the processing of step S2204 of the main side MPU 62 in the second embodiment , and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2604 of the main side MPU 62).

According to the characteristic A16, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage, the action execution period of the action for the game turn, which shifts to the special game state, is longer than the predetermined period. Become. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required for the special game state to occur can be prevented from becoming shorter than the predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit over time.

Feature A17. The long-term selection means is characterized in that, when the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the predetermined advantage, the action execution period for shifting to the special game state is the longest period of the action execution period. The gaming machine according to feature A16.

According to the feature A17, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage, the action execution period of the action for game turn, which shifts to the special game state, becomes the longest period of the action execution period. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required until the special game state occurs can be reliably lengthened, and the player can receive an excessively large profit in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is granted.

Feature A18. Characteristic A17, characterized in that said longest period is longer than the longest period in said action execution period that can be determined by said action period determining means when the player's advantage is less than said predetermined advantage. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature A18, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the action for game turn, which shifts to the special game state, is set so that the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. The operation execution period is longer than the longest period among the operation execution periods that can be selected when the value is less than the operation execution period. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, it is possible to reliably lengthen the period required until the special game state occurs, and the player's advantage increases to the predetermined advantage. It is possible to set the operation execution period different from the case of less than.

Feature A19. When the action for game replay is performed for the longest period of time, a notice (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the action for game replay ends is executed. A game machine according to feature A17 or A18, characterized by comprising means (sound and light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92).

According to the feature A19, when the game-repeating action is performed for the longest period, a notice is executed that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the game-returning action ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy about the fact that the game-repeating motion is not finished when the game-reversing motion with the longest motion execution period is being performed. Become.

Feature A20. A predetermined game state (5R high probability big win result, 2R high probability big win result or small win result), which is a game state that is advantageous to the player and is a game state with a lower advantage than the special game state Opening and closing execution mode ) has a predetermined transition means (a function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state,
The situation determination means sets the action execution period of the game-playing action to shift to the predetermined game state even in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, characterized in that it can be a period of length.

According to the feature A20, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game-turning operation that shifts to the special game state is set to a period longer than a predetermined length of period. On the other hand, the operation execution period of the game-turning operation, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player and is less advantageous than the special game state, is a predetermined length of time. can be a period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time while preventing the action execution period from becoming excessively long.

Feature A21. In each game cycle, the game cycle operation is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the game cycle operation is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the circulation operation is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92),
The profit giving event is configured to occur after the game replay action corresponding to the giving of the profit is completed,
In the game round operation, the variable display of the pattern is performed, and after the variable display of the pattern is performed, the predetermined stop pattern is displayed over the stop display period (the final stop period of the game round). It is a configuration in which a stop display is performed by pressing
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A20, wherein the target period is the stop display period.

According to feature A21, the stop display period varies according to the player's advantage. As the stop display period changes, the period required until the game replay action corresponding to the awarding of the profit is completed changes, and the period required until the profit is given changes due to the change in the period. do. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature A22. Special transition means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player,
The special game state includes a first period (a period in which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state) during which the predetermined profit awarding event can occur, and a second period during which the predetermined profit awarding event does not occur (opening period, interval period, ending period) and,
The target period is the second period. and a function of executing an ending period selection process).

According to feature A22, the second period in the special game state varies according to the player's advantage. As the second period changes, the period required until the occurrence of the first period in which a predetermined profit giving event can occur changes. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player. In addition, since the first period itself does not fluctuate, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while avoiding fluctuations in the expected number of occurrences of the predetermined profit giving event in the special game state.

Feature A23. In the special game state, the second period is configured to occur multiple times,
The gaming machine according to feature A22, wherein the situation determining means varies each of the plurality of second periods according to the degree of advantage of the player.

According to feature A23, since each of the plurality of second periods in the special game state fluctuates according to the player's advantage, it is possible to increase the number of periods subject to fluctuation, and one second period. It is possible to increase the total amount of variation in the second period in the special game state without excessively increasing the amount of variation in .

Feature A24. The situation determination means makes the target period longer than the normal game state in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state (steps S3105 to 3105 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment A function of executing the processing of steps S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109, a function of executing the processing of step S3407 of the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, and executing the processing of step S3507 of the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A23, characterized by:

According to feature A24, the target period is longer than in the normal game state in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state. Since the target period is longer than in the normal gaming state, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit giving event is longer than in the normal gaming state. The period required until is granted is longer than the normal game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A25. There are at least a first transition opportunity (5R high probability jackpot result) and a second transition opportunity (10R high probability jackpot result) as a transition trigger for the advantageous period,
The occurrence of the second transition opportunity is more advantageous for the player than the occurrence of the first transition opportunity,
The situation determining means
Means for making the target period longer than the normal game state in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 of the main side MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment function) and
Means for making the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (main in the seventh embodiment A function of executing the processing of steps S3108 to S3109 of the side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to feature A24, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A25, in the structure in which the target period is longer in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state, the advantageous period generated by the transition opportunity in which the advantage is higher is longer in the target period. Become. Therefore, the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is given becomes longer in the advantageous period generated by the transition opportunity with the higher degree of advantage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A26. At least a first transition opportunity (5R high probability big win result) and a second transition opportunity (10R high probability big win result) exist as a transition opportunity of an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal game state,
The occurrence of the second transition opportunity is more advantageous for the player than the occurrence of the first transition opportunity,
The situation determination means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (second The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A25, characterized in that the main side MPU 62 in the embodiment of No. 7 performs the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109).

According to feature A26, in a configuration in which the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is more advantageous to the player than the occurrence of the first transition opportunity, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state , the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. As the target period becomes longer, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit grant event becomes longer, and the longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the benefit is granted. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A27. The first transition opportunity is to transition to the first special game state,
The gaming machine according to feature A25 or A26, wherein the second transition opportunity is transition to a second special game state more advantageous to the player than the first special game state.

According to the feature A27, the higher the advantage of the special game state that triggers the transition to the advantageous period, the longer the target period of the advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A28. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics A24 to A27, wherein the situation determining means cancels the situation in which the target period is extended when the advantageous period ends.

According to feature A28, it is possible to limit the situation in which the target period is lengthened to within the range of one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive extension of the target period.

Feature A29. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics A24 to A28, wherein the situation determining means does not change the target period set when the advantageous period starts until the advantageous period ends.

According to feature A29, since the target period does not change during the advantageous period, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature A30. A lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) that determines by lottery whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) based on the occurrence of a lottery opportunity;
Special transition means for shifting the game state to the special game state based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to shifting the game state to the special game state (starting a special electric call in the main MPU 62 function to perform processing) and
In the special game state, the lottery is not performed by the lottery means,
As game states in which the lottery opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The advantageous period is a period in which at least one of the special game state and the advantageous game state continues without intervening the normal game state. game machine.

According to the feature A30, when the situation advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the target period is extended.

Feature A31. The situation determining means
Predetermined history information (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth, twelfth, and fourteenth embodiments, and The target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment, the number of target rounds in the tenth, eleventh, and sixteenth embodiments, and the value of the consecutive game occurrence flag in the fifteenth embodiment). Information grasping means (total number of rounds counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth, twelfth and fourteenth embodiments, target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, consecutive counter in the third embodiment 181, the target round number area 205 in the tenth, eleventh, and sixteenth embodiments, and the consecutive spawning flag in the fifteenth embodiment);
Based on the predetermined history information, information correspondence determination means for determining the subsequent game situation (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the main side MPU 62, the period setting processing in the main side MPU 62 is executed function to execute period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62; function to execute final stop period selection processing in the main MPU 62; function to execute opening period selection processing in the main MPU 62; interval period in the main MPU 62 , a function of executing the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU 62, a function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function of steps S2201 to S2204 in the main MPU 62. A function to execute processing, a function to execute period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62, a function to execute period setting processing in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62. function, a function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, a function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment, and the process of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the main MPU 62 functions to execute the processes of steps S3005 to S3009. In the tenth embodiment, the main MPU 62 selects the final stop period, the process at the start of opening, the closing A function of executing a period selection process and an ending period selection process, a function of executing an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment, and a function of the main MPU 62 in the twelfth embodiment. In the 13th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5403 to S5407 and steps S5408 to S5412 in the main MPU 62. In the 14th embodiment, steps S5503 to S5503 in the main MPU 62. A function of executing the processing of steps S5509 and steps S5510 to S5516, and in the fifteenth embodiment, cycle setting processing, period adjustment processing, final stop period selection processing, opening period selection processing, and interval period selection in the main MPU 62 Ability to execute processing and ending period selection processing, In the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6101 to S6106 by the MPU of the payout control device 77),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A30, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A31, the predetermined history information is grasped based on the predetermined game history by playing the game, and the subsequent game situation is determined based on the grasped predetermined history information. As a result, since the subsequent game situation changes in accordance with the predetermined game history, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with a profit.

Feature A32. The gaming machine according to feature A31, wherein the predetermined history information varies according to the profit given to the player.

According to feature A32, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the profit given to the player, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, since the subsequent game situation changes according to the profit given to the player, it is possible to appropriately give the profit to the player.

Feature A33. The profit giving means gives a game value that enables a game to be played as the profit,
The gaming machine according to feature A31 or A32, wherein the predetermined history information varies according to the game value given to the player.

According to feature A33, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the game value given to the player, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, since the subsequent game situation changes according to the game value given to the player, it is possible to properly give the player a profit.

Feature A34. The predetermined history information is information corresponding to the ratio of the number of game values awarded to the player to the number of game values used by the player (target ball payout rate in the second embodiment). The gaming machine of feature A33.

According to feature A34, the subsequent game situation is determined according to the ratio of the number of game values given to the player to the number of game values used by the player. As a result, since the subsequent game situation changes in accordance with the increase in the game value owned by the player, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with a profit.

Feature A35. The expected value of the profit to be given is higher than the first predetermined period (other than the round game in the first, tenth, eleventh, twelfth and sixteenth embodiments, and other than the opening and closing execution mode in the third embodiment). Period generating means (main side The function of executing the processing of steps S912 and S1107 in the MPU 62, the function of executing the special transmission start processing in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, and the processing of steps S4402 to S4416 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment. functions to execute),
The gaming machine according to feature A31, wherein the predetermined history information varies according to the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period.

According to the feature A35, in the configuration in which the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the expected value of the profit to be given is higher than the first predetermined period, the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. It is determined. As a result, since the subsequent game situation changes according to the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with a profit.

Feature A36. The gaming machine according to feature A35, wherein, when it is determined that the second predetermined period occurs, the information grasping means updates the predetermined history information before the second predetermined period ends. .

According to feature A36, if it is determined that the second predetermined period will occur, the predetermined history information is updated before the second predetermined period ends. It is possible to change the game situation after that.

Feature A37. supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
Variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means (the function of executing the processing of steps S912, S1003 and S1107 in the main side MPU 62); ,
special transition means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
with
The gaming machine according to feature A35 or A36, wherein the second predetermined period is a predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state.

According to feature A37, in the configuration in which the predetermined history information varies according to the predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game state changes according to the number of occurrences of the variable ball entry means in the predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is open in the special game state, so that profits are appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to

Feature A38. As the special game state, the first special game state (opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big hit result) and the number of times the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the open state are the first special game state The gaming machine according to feature A37, wherein there is at least a second special game state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result) different from the above.

According to feature A38, in a configuration in which the number of times the variable ball entry means is in the open state differs between the first special game state and the second special game state, the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state. The predetermined history information fluctuates according to the predetermined period of time. As a result, it is possible to change the game situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player, compared to the configuration in which the predetermined history information is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special game state.

Feature A39. As the predetermined period, a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball-entering means is relatively large and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the number is relatively small. is at least present and
The gaming machine according to feature A37 or A38, wherein the second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to feature A39, while the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences in the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is relatively large, The predetermined history information does not change depending on the number of occurrences in the predetermined second period in which the expected number of incoming balls is relatively small. As a result, it is possible to change the game situation in a mode corresponding to the profit actually given to the player.

Feature A40. Predetermined determining means (steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode by high-frequency winning mode) advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of the determination opportunity function) and
A special transition to shift the game state to the special game state based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming a predetermined transition result (5R high probability big hit result, 10R low probability big hit result or 10R high probability big hit result) Means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 62);
a number storage means (Renso counter 181) for storing information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences;
When the special game state occurs based on the result of determination by the predetermined determination means becoming the predetermined transition result during an advantageous period advantageous to the player, or when the special game state occurs, the number of times is such that the specific number of times of occurrence increases. updating means for updating information in the storage means (function for executing the process of step S2407 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment);
with
The game according to any one of features A1 to A39, wherein the situation determination means determines a subsequent game situation based on information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number storage means. machine.

According to feature A40, the specific number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of the special game state based on the predetermined transition result in the advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent game situation is determined based on the specific number of occurrences. As a result, the subsequent game state changes according to the number of times the special game state occurs based on the predetermined transition result in the advantage period, so that profits are appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to

Feature A41. The special transition means shifts the game state to the special game state based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means being a specific transition result (2R high probability big hit result or small hit result),
The updating means stores the number of times storing means for increasing the number of times of occurrence of the specific game state even if the special game state occurs based on the result of determination by the predetermined determining means in the advantageous period being the result of the specific transition. The gaming machine according to feature A40, characterized in that information is not updated.

According to the feature A41, the occurrence of the special game state may or may not be reflected in the specific number of occurrences depending on the type of transition result in the predetermined determining means that triggered the transition to the special game state. . As a result, it is possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determining means that affect the game situation to the predetermined transition results, and it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A42. The special game state transitioned based on the result of determination by the predetermined determination means being the specific transition result is the special game state transitioned based on the result determined by the predetermined determination means being the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to feature A41, wherein the player's advantage is lower than .

According to feature A42, even if a special game state with a low advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special game state is not reflected in the specific number of occurrences. As a result, it is possible to determine the subsequent game situation according to the number of occurrences of a special game state with a high degree of advantage during the advantageous period.

Feature A43. A configuration in which no decision is made by the predetermined decision means in the special game state,
As game states in which the decision opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The advantageous period is a period in which at least one of the special game state and the advantageous game state continues without intervening the normal game state,
The update means is means for updating the number storage means so that the specific number of occurrences becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends (executing the processing of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). function).

According to feature A43, the number of specific occurrences is measured within one advantageous period. As a result, it is possible to set the game situation according to the number of occurrences of the special game state within the range of one advantageous period.

For the configuration of features A1 to A43, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to a game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a supply operation is performed by a player in a state where game balls can be supplied;
Based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (general prize winning port 31, special electric prize winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) provided in the game area If the game ball entering any one of the ball parts 31 to 34 is a profit giving event, a game ball is given, and if the game turn corresponding to the jackpot result is a profit giving event, the opening and closing execution mode is given). Means (a function of executing the processing of steps S209 and S217 in the main side MPU 62 if the entry of the game ball into any of the ball entry units 31 to 34 is a profit giving event, and the payout control device 77, corresponding to the jackpot result A function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main side MPU 62 if the game round to be played is a profit giving event);
Cycle changing means for changing the predetermined cycle (function for executing cycle setting processing in the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments, step S3105, step S3108 and step S3211 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment) A function to execute processing, a function to execute the processing of steps S3407 and S3413 in the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S3507 and S3603 in the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment, In the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing cycle setting processing in the main MPU 62);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B1, since the game ball flowing down the game area enters the predetermined ball entering means, the player is provided with a profit, so the player is expected to enter the game ball into the prescribed ball entering means. You will play the game while expecting In this case, the predetermined cycle in which game balls are supplied to the game area is appropriately changed, and by changing the predetermined cycle, the frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time is also changed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately give the game value to the player.

Feature B2. The period changing means determines the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, the target ball-out rate in the second embodiment, and the continuous rate in the third embodiment). The predetermined period is changed according to the value of the shoe counter 181, the presence or absence of the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the presence or absence of the advantageous period in the eighth embodiment, and the presence or absence of the opening/closing execution mode in the ninth embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by:

According to the feature B2, the predetermined cycle of supplying game balls to the game area is varied according to the player's advantage. As the predetermined cycle varies, the frequency of game ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means per unit time is also changed, and as the frequency of entry changes, the period required until the profit is given also varies. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature B3. The period changing means is configured such that when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value) or when the player's advantage increases to the predetermined advantage (first reference value) value, a second reference value, or a third reference value), the predetermined cycle is made longer than before.

According to the characteristic B3, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the predetermined cycle is longer than before, and the predetermined cycle is longer than before. , the frequency of game ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means per unit time is also reduced, and the reduction in the frequency of entry increases the period required until profit is given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B4. As the predetermined advantages, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) in which the player's advantage is higher than the first predetermined advantage are set. has been
The cycle changing means is
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, means ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1504, S1603, and S1604 in the main MPU 62; in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2104, S2303, and S2304 in the main MPU 62; In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2504, S2703 and S2704 in the main MPU 62);
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, means ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1506, S1606, and S1607 in the main MPU 62; in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2106, S2306, and S2307 in the main MPU 62; In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2506, S2706 and S2707 in the main MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to feature B3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B4, the predetermined period is lengthened step by step according to the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's advantage, the lower the frequency of game ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means per unit time stepwise, and the stepwise reduction of the frequency of ball entry results in the award of profit. The time required to reach the As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being granted to the player in a short period of time.

Feature B5. The period changing means makes the predetermined period longer than the normal game state in an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state (step S3105 and A function of executing the processing of step S3108, a function of executing the processing of step S3407 of the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S3507 of the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein:

According to feature B5, the predetermined cycle is longer than in the normal game state during the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state. By making the predetermined period longer than in the normal game state, the frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball-entering means per unit time becomes lower than in the normal game state, and the decrease in the frequency of ball entry results in profits. The period required until is granted is longer than the normal game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B6. There are at least a first transition opportunity (5R high probability jackpot result) and a second transition opportunity (10R high probability jackpot result) as a transition trigger for the advantageous period,
The occurrence of the second transition opportunity is more advantageous for the player than the occurrence of the first transition opportunity,
The cycle changing means is
Means for making the predetermined period longer than the normal game state in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (executing the processing of step S3105 of the main side MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment function) and
Means for making the predetermined period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (main in the seventh embodiment) a function of executing the processing of step S3108 of the side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic B6, in the configuration in which the predetermined period is longer in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state, the predetermined period is longer in the advantageous period generated by the transition opportunity in which the advantage is higher. Become. Therefore, the advantageous period generated by the transition opportunity with the high advantage takes a long time until the profit is given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B7. There are at least a first transition opportunity (5R high probability big win result) and a second transition opportunity (10R high probability big win result) as a transition opportunity of an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal game state,
The occurrence of the second transition opportunity is more advantageous for the player than the occurrence of the first transition opportunity,
The period changing means makes the predetermined period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the predetermined period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (second The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of No. 7 performs the processing of steps S3105 and S3108.

According to the feature B7, in a configuration in which the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is more advantageous for the player than the occurrence of the first transition opportunity, the predetermined cycle in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state , the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. As the predetermined cycle lengthens, the frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball-entering means per unit time also decreases, and the decrease in the frequency of ball-entering prolongs the period required until a profit is given. It will happen. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B8. The first transition opportunity is to transition to the first special game state,
The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, wherein the second transition opportunity is transition to a second special game state more advantageous to the player than the first special game state.

According to the feature B8, the higher the advantage of the special game state that triggers the transition to the advantageous period, the longer the predetermined period of the advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, wherein the period changing means cancels the situation in which the predetermined period is prolonged when the advantageous period ends.

According to feature B9, it is possible to limit the situation in which the predetermined period is extended to within the range of one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined cycle from being excessively prolonged.

Feature B10. A lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) that determines by lottery whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) based on the occurrence of a lottery opportunity;
Special transition means for shifting the game state to the special game state based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to shifting the game state to the special game state (starting a special electric call in the main MPU 62 function to perform processing) and
In the special game state, the lottery is not performed by the lottery means,
As game states in which the lottery opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
According to any one of features B5 to B9, the advantageous period is a state in which at least one of the special game state and the advantageous game state continues without intervening the normal game state. game machine.

According to the characteristic B10, when the situation advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the predetermined period is prolonged.

For the configuration of features B1 to B10, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
Variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means (the function of executing the processing of steps S912, S1003 and S1107 in the main side MPU 62); ,
Special transition means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
with
In the special game state, a first predetermined period (other than the round game in the open/close execution mode) in which the variable ball entry means is maintained in the closed state, and a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. A second predetermined period (a round game in the open/close execution mode) is a period during which the variable ball-entering means ends in the closed state based on the completion condition being satisfied in the state where the variable ball-entering means is in the open state. is the configuration that occurs,
This game machine is
Information grasping means for grasping the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of the predetermined second predetermined period (the total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, the tenth, eleventh, and sixteenth Target round number area 205) in the embodiment,
Based on the predetermined number of occurrences, the number of times determination means for determining the subsequent game situation (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the main side MPU 62, the period setting processing in the main side MPU 62 is executed function to execute period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62; function to execute final stop period selection processing in the main MPU 62; function to execute opening period selection processing in the main MPU 62; interval period in the main MPU 62 , a function of executing the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU 62, a function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment. A function of executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2907, a function of executing the processes of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment, and a final stop period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment. , a function of executing opening start processing, closing period selection processing, and ending period selection processing; in the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing opening period selection processing and ending period selection processing in the main MPU 62; In the 16th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6101 to S6106 by the MPU of the payout control device 77),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state, so that profits are appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to

Feature C2. As the special game state, the first special game state (opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big hit result) and the second special game in which the number of times the second predetermined period occurs is different from the first special game state The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that there is at least a state (an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result).

According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which the number of times the second predetermined period occurs differs between the first special game state and the second special game state, the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state The subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of . As a result, it is possible to change the game situation in a mode corresponding to the profit actually given to the player, as compared with the structure in which the subsequent game situation is determined according to the number of occurrences of the special game state.

Feature C3. As the second predetermined period, a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball-entering means is relatively large and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the number is relatively small. ) and at least exist, and
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the predetermined second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to the feature C3, the predetermined number of occurrences varies according to the number of occurrences in the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is relatively large, while the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means The predetermined number of occurrences does not change depending on the number of occurrences in the predetermined second period in which the expected number of incoming balls is relatively small. As a result, it is possible to change the game situation in a mode corresponding to the profit actually given to the player.

Feature C4. Target period (in the first embodiment, the firing cycle, the variation continuation period of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening and closing execution mode, the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, the fourth In the embodiment, the variation duration of the game rounds (the average of the variation duration period of the game rounds in the fifth and sixth embodiments) fluctuates. a variable configuration,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, wherein the number-of-times correspondence determination means varies the target period according to the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to feature C4, in a configuration in which the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit giving event can vary due to changes in the target period, the subsequent target period is extended according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. be changed. By changing the target period, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit giving event changes. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature C5. The frequency correspondence determination means determines whether the predetermined number of occurrences is greater than or equal to a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value) or when the predetermined number of occurrences exceeds a predetermined reference value (first reference value). , second reference value, or third reference value), the target period is made longer than before.

According to feature C5, when the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, or when the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the target period becomes longer than before. As the period becomes longer than before, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit giving event becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature C6. As the predetermined reference value, at least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) that is a larger value than the first reference value are set,
The number-of-times correspondence determination means
Means (first implementation a function of executing the processing of steps S1504, S1603 and S1604 of the main MPU 62 in the form);
Means (first implementation a function of executing the processing of steps S1506, S1606 and S1607 of the main MPU 62 in the form);
The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C6, the target period is lengthened stepwise according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Therefore, as the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period increases, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit giving event becomes longer in stages. As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being granted to the player in a short period of time.

Feature C7. The supply means supplies game balls to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a supply operation is performed by a player in a state where game balls can be supplied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C6, wherein the target period is the predetermined period.

According to the feature C7, the predetermined cycle of supplying game balls to the game area is varied according to the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period. As the predetermined period fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit giving event fluctuates. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature C8. In each game cycle, the game cycle operation is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the game cycle operation is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the circulation operation is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92),
The game control means includes an operation period determination means (main in the first and fourth embodiments) for determining an operation execution period (a variation continuation period of a game round or an execution period of a game round) during which the game round operation is executed. The function of executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, the function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the steps S2601 to S2601 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step S2614, a function of executing the processing of steps S2901 to S2910 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and executing the processing of steps S3001 to S3013 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. function to execute the processing of steps S3301 to S3303 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment),
The profit awarding event is configured to occur after the game replay action corresponding to the awarding of the profit is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C7, wherein the target period is the action execution period or an average period of the action execution periods.

According to the feature C8, the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period varies according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Then, when the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates, the period required for completion of the game-playing action corresponding to the awarding of the profit fluctuates, and the profit is awarded as the period fluctuates. The period required for this will vary. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature C9. The number-of-times correspondence determining means changes the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determining means in accordance with the predetermined number of occurrences (in the fifth embodiment, the processing of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main MPU 62 is executed). function to execute the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main side MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment).

According to the feature C9, when the action execution period of the game-playing action is changed according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the mode of determining the action execution period by the action period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately give a profit to the player while using the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature C10. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, normal period table 191 and shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197) is provided,
The operation period determination means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type corresponding to the game situation,
The plurality of types of period information groups are set so that the average period of the action execution period determined by referring to the action period determination means is different,
The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the number-of-times correspondence determination means changes the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determination means according to the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to feature C10, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means differs according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. The simple configuration of making them different makes it possible to change the average period of the operation execution period.

Feature C11. The information storage means stores, as the period information group, a first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment), and an average period of the operation execution period shorter than that of the first period information group. At least a second period information group (shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored,
The operation period determining means is
With reference to the first period information group in the first game situation (high-frequency support mode and the number of pieces of hold information on the second special figure side that are held and stored is less than 2), the operation execution period means for determining (function for executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
In the second game situation (high frequency support mode and the number of pieces of hold information stored on the second special figure side is two or more), the operation execution period with reference to the second period information group means for determining (function for executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
with
When the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the number-of-times correspondence determining means causes the operation period determining means to refer to the first period information group even in the second game situation (the first period information group). The gaming machine according to feature C10, characterized in that the function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3008 of the main side MPU 62 in the embodiment of 6).

According to feature C11, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the second period information group in which the average period of the action execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group is determined by the action execution determining means. Instead of being referenced, the first period information group is now referenced. As a result, when the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the average period of the operation execution period can be lengthened, and accordingly, the game-turning operation corresponding to the provision of profit. The period required for the period to be completed will be longer, and the period required for the benefit to be granted will be longer due to the fluctuation of the period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Further, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the first period information group to be referred to by the operation period determination means even in the second game situation is the operation period in the first game situation. It is a period information group referred to by the determination means. As a result, there is no need to prepare a dedicated period information group corresponding to the case where the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value. It becomes possible to exhibit an excellent effect.

Feature C12. The number-of-times determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the predetermined number of occurrences (the function of executing the period adjusting process of the main MPU 62 in the first and fourth embodiments). ), the game machine according to feature C8.

According to the feature C12, when the action execution period of the game-playing action is changed according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the decision mode of the action execution period by the action period determining means is not changed, but the action The operation execution period determined by the period determining means is changed. This makes it possible to change the action execution period according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period while maintaining the action execution period determination mode in the action period determining means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

For the configuration of features C1 to C12, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Predetermined decision means for deciding whether to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player (opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode) (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62 )When,
In each game cycle, the game cycle operation is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the game cycle operation is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the circulation operation is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 a function to execute the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92);
When the determination result by the predetermined determining means is a predetermined transition result (10R low probability big hit result or 10R high probability big hit result), and after the operation for game rotation is completed, the game state is changed to the special game state. Special transfer means for transferring (function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 62);
with
The game control means is an operation period determination means (in the first embodiment, steps S601 to S614 in the main side MPU 62) that determines an operation execution period (variation continuation period of the game round) during which the game round operation is executed. A function to execute processing, a function to execute the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S2601 to S2614 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing acquisition processing of the fluctuation duration period),
The operation period determination means, in a specific situation, sets the operation execution period of the game-playing operation corresponding to the determination result by the predetermined determination means being the predetermined transition result to be longer than a period of a predetermined length. Long-term selection means (function of executing the process of step S604 of the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, function of executing the process of step S2204 of the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, function of executing the process of step S2204 of the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, 3, the function of executing the processing of step S2604 of the main MPU 62 in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5403 to S5407 and steps S5408 to S5412 in the main MPU 62 in the thirteenth embodiment, and the fourteenth embodiment. A game machine characterized by having a function of executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5509 and steps S5510 to S5516 in the main side MPU 62 in the form.

According to feature D1, in the case of a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game-turning operation that transitions to the special game state when the determination result by the predetermined determining means becomes the predetermined transition result is a period of a predetermined length. a longer period than As a result, it is possible to prevent the period required for the special game state to occur when the predetermined transition result is obtained in the specific situation from being shorter than the predetermined length of time. It is possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to the player.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific situation is a case where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (third reference value).

According to the feature D2, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the determination result by the predetermined determining means becomes the predetermined transition result, thereby shifting to the special game state. The operation execution period becomes a period longer than the period of the predetermined length. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required until the special game state occurs triggered by the predetermined transition result becomes less than or equal to the predetermined length of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature D3. In the case of the specific situation, the long-term selection means sets the action execution period of the game-playing action corresponding to the predetermined transition result as the determination result of the predetermined decision means to the longest period in the action execution period. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized by:

According to feature D3, in the case of a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game-turning operation that shifts to the special game state when the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result is within the operation execution period. the longest period. As a result, it is possible to reliably lengthen the period required for the special game state to occur when a predetermined transition result occurs in a specific situation, and an excessively large profit is given to the player in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the longest period is longer than the longest period in the action execution period determined by the action period determining means when the specific situation is not met.

According to the characteristic D4, when the specific situation is the special game state, the determination result by the predetermined determining means becomes the predetermined transition result, so that the game-turning operation that shifts to the special game state is performed. The action execution period is the action execution period longer than the longest period among the action execution periods selected in the non-specific situation. As a result, it is possible to reliably lengthen the period required for the special game state to occur when the predetermined transition result is obtained in the specific situation, and the operation execution period is different from that in the non-specific situation. It becomes possible to

Feature D5. When the action for game replay is performed for the longest period of time, a notice (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the action for game replay ends is executed. A game machine according to feature D3 or D4, characterized by comprising means (sound and light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92).

According to the feature D5, when the game-repeating action is performed for the longest period, a notice is executed that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the game-returning action ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy about the fact that the game-repeating motion is not finished when the game-reversing motion with the longest motion execution period is being performed. Become.

Feature D6. A predetermined game state (5R high probability big win result, 2R high probability big win result or small win result), which is a game state that is advantageous to the player and is a game state with a lower advantage than the special game state Opening and closing execution mode ) has a predetermined transition means (a function for executing a special electric start process in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the game state,
The operation period determination means is characterized in that even in the specific situation, the operation execution period of the game-playing operation that shifts to the predetermined game state can be a period of the predetermined length. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.

According to the feature D6, in the case of the specific situation, the operation execution period of the game-turning operation that shifts to the special game state when the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result is longer than the predetermined length of the period. Execution of a game-turning action that shifts to a predetermined game state that is a game state that is advantageous to the player and has a lower degree of advantage than the special game state. The time period can be a period of time of predetermined length. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time while preventing the action execution period from becoming excessively long.

For the configuration of features D1 to D6, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. Predetermined determination means (steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode by high-frequency winning mode) advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of the determination opportunity function) and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the predetermined determination means has become a predetermined transition result (5R high probability big hit result, 10R low probability big hit result or 10R high probability big hit result) Special transition to shift the game state to the special game state Means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 62);
a number storage means (Renso counter 181) for storing information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences;
When the special game state occurs based on the result of determination by the predetermined determination means becoming the predetermined transition result during an advantageous period advantageous to the player, or when the special game state occurs, the number of occurrences is such that the number of occurrences of the specific occurrence increases. updating means for updating information in the storage means (function for executing the process of step S2407 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment);
Based on the information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number storage means, the specific response determination means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the cycle setting process in the main side MPU 62, A function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62, a function of executing period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, the specific number of occurrences, which is the number of times the special game state occurs based on the predetermined transition result during the advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent game situation is determined based on the specific number of occurrences. As a result, the subsequent game state changes according to the number of times the special game state occurs based on the predetermined transition result in the advantage period, so that profits are appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to

Feature E2. The special transition means shifts the game state to the special game state based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means being a specific transition result (2R high probability big hit result or small hit result),
The updating means stores the number of times storing means for increasing the number of times of occurrence of the specific game state even if the special game state occurs based on the result of determination by the predetermined determining means in the advantageous period being the result of the specific transition. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that information is not updated.

According to feature E2, the occurrence of the special game state may or may not be reflected in the specific number of occurrences depending on the type of transition result in the predetermined determining means that triggered the transition to the special game state. . As a result, it is possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determining means that affect the game situation to the predetermined transition results, and it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature E3. The special game state transitioned based on the result of determination by the predetermined determination means being the specific transition result is the special game state transitioned based on the result determined by the predetermined determination means being the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the player's advantage is lower than that.

According to feature E3, even if a special game state with a low advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special game state is not reflected in the specific number of occurrences. As a result, it is possible to determine the subsequent game situation according to the number of occurrences of a special game state with a high degree of advantage during the advantageous period.

Feature E4. A configuration in which no decision is made by the predetermined decision means in the special game state,
As game states in which the decision opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The advantageous period is a period in which at least one of the special game state and the advantageous game state continues without intervening the normal game state,
The update means is means for updating the number storage means so that the specific number of occurrences becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends (executing the processing of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). function).

According to feature E4, the number of specific occurrences is measured within one advantageous period. As a result, it is possible to set the game situation according to the number of occurrences of the special game state within the range of one advantageous period.

Feature E5. The target period (firing cycle in the third embodiment, variation continuation period of the game round, final stop period of the game round, opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode) fluctuates. Therefore, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit giving event can vary,
The game according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the specific response determination means varies the target period according to information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number storage means. machine.

According to feature E5, in a configuration in which the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit granting event may vary due to changes in the target period, subsequent targets are determined according to the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period. period is changed. By changing the target period, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit giving event changes. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature E6. The specific correspondence determining means determines whether the number of specific occurrences exceeds a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value) or when the number of specific occurrences exceeds a predetermined reference value (first reference value). , second reference value, or third reference value), the target period is made longer than before.

According to feature E6, when the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, or when the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the target period is longer than before. As the target period becomes longer than before, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit giving event becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature E7. As the predetermined reference value, at least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) that is a value larger than the first reference value are set,
The specific correspondence determination means is
If the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the first reference value, or if the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the first reference value, means for making the target period longer than before (third implementation a function of executing the processing of steps S2504, S2703 and S2704 of the main MPU 62 in the form);
If the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the second reference value, or if the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the second reference value, means for making the target period longer than before (third implementation a function of executing the processing of steps S2506, S2706 and S2707 of the main MPU 62 in the form);
The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E7, the target period is lengthened in stages according to the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period. Therefore, as the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period increases, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit giving event becomes longer in stages. As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being granted to the player in a short period of time.

Feature E8. Supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to a game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a supply operation is performed by a player in a state where game balls can be supplied,
The profit giving event is generated when a game ball enters the ball entry means (general prize winning port 31, special electric prize winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) provided in the game area. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, wherein the target period is the predetermined period.

According to the feature E8, the predetermined cycle of supplying game balls to the game area is varied according to the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period. As the predetermined period fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit giving event fluctuates. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature E9. In each game cycle, the game cycle operation is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the game cycle operation is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the circulation operation is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92),
The game control means is an operation period determination means (in the third embodiment, the main side MPU 62 in the main side MPU 62 A function to execute the processing of steps S2601 to S2614),
The profit giving event is configured to occur after the game replay action corresponding to the giving of the profit is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E8, wherein the target period is the action execution period or an average period of the action execution periods.

According to the feature E9, the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period. Then, when the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates, the period required for completion of the game-playing action corresponding to the awarding of the profit fluctuates, and the profit is awarded as the period fluctuates. The period required for this will vary. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature E10. The specific correspondence determining means changes the manner in which the action execution period is decided by the action period deciding means according to the information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number of times storage means (in the fifth embodiment, A function of executing the processing of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main side MPU 62, a function of executing the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main side MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment). .

According to the feature E10, when the action execution period of the action for the game cycle is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period, the mode of determining the action execution period by the action period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately give a profit to the player while using the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature E11. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, normal period table 191 and shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197) is provided,
The operation period determination means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type corresponding to the game situation,
The plurality of types of period information groups are set so that the average period of the action execution period determined by referring to the action period determination means is different,
The specific correspondence determination means is characterized in that the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determination means is made different based on the information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number storage means. The gaming machine described in E10.

According to feature E11, the type of the period information group referred to by the operating period determining means differs according to the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period. A simple configuration in which the types are differentiated makes it possible to vary the average period of the operation execution period.

Feature E12. The information storage means stores, as the period information group, a first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment), and an average period of the operation execution period shorter than that of the first period information group. At least a second period information group (shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored,
The operation period determining means is
With reference to the first period information group in the first game situation (high-frequency support mode and the number of pieces of hold information on the second special figure side that are held and stored is less than 2), the operation execution period means for determining (function for executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
In the second game situation (high frequency support mode and the number of pieces of hold information stored on the second special figure side is two or more), the operation execution period with reference to the second period information group means for determining (function for executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
with
When the number of occurrences of the specific correspondence is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the specific response determining means causes the operation period determining means to refer to the first period information group even in the second game situation (the first period information group). The gaming machine according to feature E11, characterized in that the function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of 6).

According to the feature E12, when the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the second period information in which the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group in the operation execution determination means Where a group would otherwise be referenced, the first period information group is now referenced. As a result, when the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the operation execution period. The period required until the end of the use operation becomes longer, and the period required until the profit is given becomes longer due to the fluctuation of the period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Further, when the number of occurrences of the special game state in the advantageous period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the first period information group to be referred to by the operation period determination means even in the second game situation is the first period information group in the first game situation. It is a period information group referred to by the operation period determination means. As a result, since it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated period information group corresponding to the case where the number of occurrences of the special game state in the advantageous period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the increase in the necessary storage capacity is suppressed, and the above-mentioned problems are prevented. It becomes possible to produce such an excellent effect.

Feature E13. The specific correspondence determining means varies the action execution period decided by the action period deciding means according to information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number of times storage means (first and fourth embodiments). A gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized in that the function of executing period adjustment processing of the main side MPU 62 in the form).

According to the feature E13, when the action execution period of the action for the game cycle is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special game state during the advantageous period, the decision mode of the action execution period by the action period determining means is not changed. , the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the action execution period according to the number of times the special game state occurs during the advantageous period while maintaining the action execution period determination mode in the action period determination means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

For the configuration of features E1 to E13, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Based on the occurrence of a profit giving event (entering a game ball into one of the ball entry units 31 to 34, a game turn corresponding to the result of a big hit) due to the game being played, a profit is given to the player (ball entry unit 31 to 34 is a profit giving event, the game ball is a profit giving event, and if the game turn corresponding to the jackpot result is a profit giving event, the opening and closing execution mode is generated). If the entry of the game ball into any one of the ball sections 31 to 34 is a profit giving event, the function of executing the processing of steps S209 and S217 in the main side MPU 62, the payout control device 77, and the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is a benefit giving event, the main side MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S409 to S412),
The period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit giving event can be varied by varying the target period (the average of the variation duration period of the launch cycle and the game round in the seventh embodiment). ,
At least the first transition opportunity (5R high probability big hit result) and the second transition opportunity (10R high probability big hit result) exist as the transition opportunity of the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal game state,
The game machine determines the target period by making the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity and the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity different. means (in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3103 to S3109 and steps S3207 to S3212 in the main MPU 62).

According to the feature F1, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state is the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity and the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity. different period. Then, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit giving event varies due to the difference in the target period, and the period required from the predetermined timing to the giving of the profit varies due to the variation of the period. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature F2. The occurrence of the second transition opportunity is more advantageous for the player than the occurrence of the first transition opportunity,
The target period determination means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity ( The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized by the function of executing the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment.

According to the feature F2, in a configuration in which the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is more advantageous to the player than the occurrence of the first transition opportunity, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal game state , the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. As the target period becomes longer, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined benefit grant event becomes longer, and the longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the benefit is granted. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature F3. The first transition opportunity is to transition to the first special game state,
The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the second transition opportunity is a transition to a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state.

According to the feature F3, the higher the advantage of the special game state that triggers the transition to the advantageous period, the longer the target period of the advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the target period determining means sets the target period to a period corresponding to the normal game state when the advantageous period ends.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to limit the situation in which the target period is changed within the range of one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive extension of the target period.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the target period determining means does not change the target period set when the advantageous period starts until the advantageous period ends. .

According to the feature F5, since the target period does not change during the advantageous period, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F6. A lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) that determines by lottery whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) based on the occurrence of a lottery opportunity;
Special transition means for shifting the game state to the special game state based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to shifting the game state to the special game state (starting a special electric call in the main MPU 62 function to perform processing) and
In the special game state, the lottery is not performed by the lottery means,
As game states in which the lottery opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal game state and an advantageous game state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The advantageous period is a period in which at least one of the special game state and the advantageous game state continues without interposing the normal game state, according to any one of features F1 to F5. game machine.

According to the feature F6, when the situation advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the target period has been changed.

Feature F7. Supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to a game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a supply operation is performed by a player in a state where game balls can be supplied,
The profit giving event is generated when a game ball enters the ball entry means (general prize winning port 31, special electric prize winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) provided in the game area. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the target period is the predetermined period.

According to the feature F7, the predetermined cycle in which the game balls are supplied to the game area is varied according to the type of the transition opportunity to the advantageous period. As the predetermined period fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit giving event fluctuates. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature F8. In each game cycle, the game cycle operation is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the game cycle operation is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the circulation operation is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92),
The game control means is an operation period determination means (in the third embodiment, the main side MPU 62 in the main side MPU 62 A function to execute the processing of steps S2601 to S2614),
The profit giving event is configured to occur after the game replay action corresponding to the giving of the profit is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the target period is the action execution period or an average period of the action execution periods.

According to the feature F8, the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period fluctuates according to the type of transition trigger to the advantageous period. Then, when the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates, the period required for completion of the game-playing action corresponding to the awarding of the profit fluctuates, and the profit is awarded as the period fluctuates. The period required for this will vary. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature F9. The period-of-determination determination means determines the operation execution period determined by the operation-period determination means by determining the period of interest in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity and the occurrence of the second transition opportunity. The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the advantageous period is differentiated from the advantageous period based on.

According to the feature F9, when the action execution period of the game-playing action is varied according to the type of transition trigger to the advantageous period, the mode of determination of the action execution period by the action period determining means is varied. As a result, it is possible to appropriately give a profit to the player while using the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature F10. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, normal period table 191 and shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197) is provided,
The operation period determination means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type corresponding to the game situation,
The plurality of types of period information groups are set so that the average period of the action execution period determined by referring to the action period determination means is different,
The target period determining means selects the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means as the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity and the occurrence of the second transition opportunity. The gaming machine according to feature F9, wherein the advantageous period is set to be different based on the fact that the game is played.

According to the feature F10, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determination means differs according to the type of transition to the advantageous period. , it is possible to change the average period of the operation execution period.

For the configuration of features F1 to F10, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Predetermined decision means (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S505 in the main side MPU 62) for deciding whether to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player (opening and closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode) )When,
In each game cycle, the game cycle operation is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the game cycle operation is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the circulation operation is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 a function to execute the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92);
When the determination result by the predetermined determining means is a predetermined transition result (10R low probability big hit result or 10R high probability big hit result), and after the operation for game rotation is completed, the game state is changed to the special game state. Special transfer means for transferring (function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 62);
with
The game control means includes an operation period determining means (mainly in the first and fourth embodiments) for determining an operation execution period (a variation continuation period of a game round or an execution period of a game round) during which the game round operation is executed. A function of executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, a function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and steps S2601 to S2601 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment. function to execute the process of step S2614),
The gaming machine determines the action execution period determined by the action period determining means as the advantage of the player (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth embodiments, and the target ball output in the second embodiment). rate, value of consecutive counter 181 in the third embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that

According to the feature G1, the action execution period of the game-playing action determined by the action period determining means varies according to the player's advantage. Then, due to the change in the action execution period, the period required until the game-turning action corresponding to the transition to the special game state is completed changes, and the change in the period causes the special game state to occur. The required period will vary. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Further, when the action execution period of the game-playing action is changed according to the player's advantage, the action period deciding means does not change the decision mode of the action execution period, but the action period deciding means decides. The operation execution period is varied. As a result, it is possible to change the action execution period according to the player's advantage while maintaining the action execution period determination mode in the action period determining means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature G2. When the period varying means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determining means according to the player's advantage, the period varying means corresponds to the length of the action performing period determined by the action period determining means. (a function of executing period adjustment processing of the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature G2, when the action execution period determined by the action period determining means is varied according to the player's advantage, the change is made in accordance with the length of the action performing period determined by the action period determining means. is done. This makes it possible to change the action execution period so as to effectively optimize the provision of profits to the player.

Feature G3. The period varying means is
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a first predetermined advantage (first reference value), means for extending the action execution period determined by the action period determining means by an additional period (main in the fourth embodiment). A function of executing the processing of steps S2802 to S2804 of the side MPU 62);
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) higher than the first predetermined advantage, the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is added. means for lengthening the period by two or more natural number multiples (the function of executing the processing of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, comprising:

According to the feature G3, when the player's advantage becomes high, the action execution period becomes longer than before, and the action execution period becomes longer than before, so that the profit is given. The period required for the action to be completed becomes longer than before, and the period required until the profit is given becomes longer than before due to the fluctuation of the period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Also, the action execution period is lengthened step by step according to the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's advantage, the longer the action execution period, and the stepwise lengthening of the action execution period lengthens the period required for completion of the game replay action corresponding to the provision of profit. It is lengthened step by step, and as the period is lengthened, the period required until the benefit is granted is lengthened step by step. As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being granted to the player in a short period of time.

Further, when the operation period determining means is lengthened in stages, the natural number is increased in the case of adding a natural number multiple of the additional period to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which a plurality of types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Feature G4. When the period varying means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determination means according to the player's advantage, the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is a first action execution period and a first action execution period. A feature characterized by varying the same period from the operation execution period in any of the second operation execution periods (the function of executing the period adjustment processing of the main side MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments) The game machine according to any one of G1 to G3.

According to feature G4, when the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is changed according to the player's advantage, the action execution period determined by the action period determination means is the first action execution period and the second action execution period. Since the same period is varied from the operation execution period regardless of the operation execution period, the configuration for varying the operation execution period can be simplified.

Feature G5. The game control means executes the game cycle operation by controlling the game execution means in accordance with a group of operation mode information (data table for game cycle performance) pre-stored in the specific storage means (sound and light ROM 83). and
The period changing means changes the action execution period according to the player's advantage by processing the action mode information group corresponding to the action execution period determined by the action period determining means (first The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound and light side MPU 82 in the embodiment).

According to the feature G5, by processing the action mode information group corresponding to the action execution period determined by the action period determining means, the action execution period is varied according to the player's advantage, thereby enabling a predetermined It is possible to vary the action execution period in accordance with the player's advantage without increasing the number of action mode information groups pre-stored in the storage means.

Feature G6. A configuration in which a variable display of patterns is performed in the game-playing operation,
As the display mode of the pattern in the variable display of the pattern, a high identification display mode (low speed fluctuation display) and a low identification display mode (high speed fluctuation display) in which the recognizability of the pattern by appearance is relatively high and low are set. ,
As a mode of the variable display of the patterns, after the state in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode continues for a predetermined period, the predetermined patterns are switched to the state in which the high identification display mode is displayed. has the form of
The period varying means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determining means according to the player's advantage by varying the period during which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode ( The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the sound and light side MPU 82 of the first embodiment performs the processing of steps S1706 and S1707.

According to feature G6, by varying the period displayed in the low identification display mode, the action execution period determined by the action period determining means is varied according to the player's advantage. There is no need to store information for determining the mode of variable display of patterns corresponding to each pattern whose execution period can vary. Furthermore, when the action execution period is varied, the period during which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode is changed, so the pattern variable display mode is processed so as to correspond to the variation in the action execution period. Even if this is done, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

For the configuration of features G1 to G6, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. A first predetermined target capable of influencing the frequency of giving profits to a player per unit time (in the first to fourth embodiments, the game ball firing cycle, the variation Any one of the final stop period, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period; in the seventh embodiment, any of the game ball firing cycle and the game round fluctuation continuation period; and in the tenth embodiment, the final stop period of the game round. , the opening period, the opening period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period, either the opening period or the ending period in the eleventh embodiment, or the fifteenth embodiment The game ball firing period, the variation duration of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period) are determined by the player's advantage (first and fourth embodiments). Then, the value of the total round number counter 64c, the target ball output rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment, the presence or absence of an advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the tenth and eleventh In the embodiment, the number of target rounds, in the fifteenth embodiment, the consecutive spawning flag) is changed according to the first variable means (in the first to fourth embodiments, the cycle setting process, the period adjustment process, and the final A function of executing a stop period selection process, an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process; in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S3105 to S3109 in the main MPU 62; In the tenth embodiment, the main MPU 62 has the function of executing the final stop period selection process, the opening start process, the closing period selection process, and the ending period selection process. Functions for executing period selection processing and ending period selection processing, period setting processing, period adjustment processing, final stop period selection processing, opening period selection processing, and interval period selection in the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment a function to execute processing and ending period selection processing);
A second predetermined target capable of influencing the frequency of giving profits to a player per unit time (in the first to sixth embodiments, the game ball firing cycle, the variation Any one of the final stop period, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period; in the seventh embodiment, any of the game ball firing cycle and the game round fluctuation continuation period; and in the tenth embodiment, the final stop period of the game round. , the opening period, the opening period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the closing period of the special electric prize winning device 32, the interval period, and the ending period, either the opening period or the ending period in the eleventh embodiment, or the fifteenth embodiment A second variation that varies the content of any one of the game ball shooting cycle, the variation duration period of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the advantage of the player. Means (In the first to fourth embodiments, cycle setting processing, period adjustment processing, final stop period selection processing, opening period selection processing, interval period selection processing, and ending period selection processing in the main MPU 62 are executed In the seventh embodiment, the main MPU 62 functions to execute the processes of steps S3105 to S3109. In the tenth embodiment, the main MPU 62 selects the final stop period, opens the start process, and closes the period. A function of executing the selection process and the ending period selection process, a function of executing the opening period selection process and the ending period selection process in the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment, and a period in the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment a function of executing setting processing, period adjustment processing, final stop period selection processing, opening period selection processing, interval period selection processing, and ending period selection processing;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H1, the content of the first predetermined event that can affect the frequency of awarding profits to the player per unit time is changed according to the player's advantage, The content of the second predetermined event capable of influencing the frequency of awarding profits to the player is varied according to the player's advantage. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player. In particular, since the contents of a plurality of events, the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event, are varied according to the player's advantage, the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time can be adjusted according to the player's advantage. It becomes easier to adjust the degree of variation when the variation is made to vary accordingly.

Feature H2. The first variation means determines that the player's advantage has become a first target advantage (first reference value) or that the player's advantage has become a first target advantage (first reference value). Varying the content of the first predetermined target based on
The second variation means determines that the player's advantage has become a second target advantage (second reference value) or that the player's advantage has become a second target advantage (second reference value). The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the content of the second predetermined target is changed based on the above.

According to the feature H2, the content of the first predetermined target is changed based on whether or not the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage, and the player's advantage becomes the first target. The content of the second predetermined target is changed based on the second target advantage or the second target advantage. As a result, it is possible to gradually change the frequency of giving profit to a player per unit time according to the player's advantage while suppressing frequent fluctuations in the content of one predetermined event. becomes.

Feature H3. The first variable means determines that the player's advantage has become a third target advantage (third reference value) or that the player's advantage has become a third target advantage (third reference value). Varying the content of the first predetermined target based on
The second variation means determines whether the second predetermined target is determined based on the fact that the player's advantage has become the third target advantage or the fact that the player's advantage has become the third target advantage. The gaming machine according to feature H2, characterized in that the contents are varied.

According to the feature H3, the content of the first predetermined target is changed based on whether or not the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage, and the player's advantage becomes the first target. In the configuration in which the content of the second predetermined target is changed based on the second target advantage or the second target advantage, when the player's advantage becomes the third target advantage or the second target advantage Both the content of the first predetermined target and the content of the second predetermined target are changed based on the 3-target advantage. As a result, it is possible to rapidly change the frequency of giving profits to a player per unit time as needed.

Feature H4. The first predetermined target is a first target period, and the period required from a predetermined timing to the provision of the predetermined profit can be changed by changing the first target period,
The second predetermined target is a second target period, and the configuration is characterized in that the period required from a predetermined timing until the predetermined profit is granted can vary depending on the variation of the second target period. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3.

According to the feature H4, the first target period that can affect the frequency of awarding profits to the player per unit time is varied according to the player's advantage, and the player's per unit time A second target period that can affect the frequency of giving benefits to the player is varied according to the player's advantage. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player. In particular, since a plurality of periods such as the first target period and the second target period fluctuate according to the player's advantage, the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time can be adjusted according to the player's advantage. When varying, it becomes easier to adjust the degree of variation.

Feature H5. The first variation means determines whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a first target advantage (first reference value) or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a first target advantage (first reference value). In that case, make the first target period longer than before,
Said second variation means determines when said player's advantage is higher than said first target advantage (second reference value), or when said player's advantage is higher than said first target advantage. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the second target period is made longer than before when the target advantage is equal to or higher than the second target advantage.

According to the feature H5, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage, the first target period becomes longer and the player's advantage becomes longer. becomes the second target advantage or higher, or the second target period becomes longer than before. As these target periods become longer, the frequency with which profits are given to the player becomes lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. In addition, it is possible to gradually reduce the frequency of giving profits to a player per unit time according to the player's advantage, while suppressing the frequent occurrence of lengthening of one target period. Become.

Feature H6. The first variation means determines when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a third target advantage (third reference value), which is more advantageous than the first target advantage and the second target advantage, or the When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third target advantage, the first target period is made longer than before (the process of steps S4706 to S4708 of the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment is functions to perform),
The second variation means determines that when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third target advantage or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third target advantage, the second target period is The gaming machine according to feature H5, characterized in that it is made longer than before (a function of executing the processing of steps S4806 to S4808 of the main side MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment).

According to the feature H6, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage, the first target period becomes longer than before, and the player's advantage is increased. is equal to or higher than the second target advantage or the second target period is longer than before, the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the third target advantage. or the third target advantage or higher, both the first target period and the second target period are longer than before. As a result, it is possible to rapidly reduce the frequency of giving profits to players per unit time as needed.

Feature H7. The first variation means changes the first target period to a predetermined variation target period (first variation target period in the tenth embodiment) when a predetermined variation opportunity of the first target period occurs based on the player's advantage. The common extension period or the second common extension period, the second common extension period in the eleventh embodiment) is varied,
The second variation means varies the second target period by the predetermined variation target period when a predetermined variation opportunity for the second target period occurs based on the player's advantage. A gaming machine according to any one of characterizing features H4 to H6.

According to the feature H7, the change is performed for the predetermined change target period regardless of whether the first target period is changed or the second target period is changed. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to the configuration in which the variable target period is prepared in correspondence with each of the first target period and the second target period.

Feature H8. Special transition means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player,
The special game state includes a first period (a period in which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state) in which a predetermined opportunity to give the profit can occur, and a second period (opening period, closed period) in which the predetermined opportunity to give the profit does not occur. period, interval period, ending period) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features H4 to H7, wherein both the first target period and the second target period are the second period.

According to the feature H8, the second period in the special game state varies according to the player's advantage. As the second period changes, the period required until the occurrence of the first period in which a predetermined profit giving event can occur changes. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player. In addition, since each of the plurality of second periods in the special game state fluctuates according to the player's advantage, it is possible to increase the number of periods subject to fluctuation, and the amount of fluctuation in one second period can be reduced. It is possible to increase the total amount of variation in the second period in the special game state without excessively increasing it.

Feature H9. Special transition means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player,
The special game state includes a first period (a period in which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state) in which a predetermined opportunity to give the profit can occur, and a second period (opening period, closed period) in which the predetermined opportunity to give the profit does not occur. period, interval period, ending period) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features H4 to H7, wherein one of the first target period and the second target period is the first period, and the other is the second period.

According to the feature H9, both the first period and the second period in the special game state fluctuate according to the player's advantage. Thereby, it becomes possible to adjust each of the first period and the second period to an appropriate period according to the player's advantage.

Feature H10. In each game cycle, the game cycle operation is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the game cycle operation is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the circulation operation is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 a function to execute the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92);
Special transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) after the game rotation operation is completed in a situation where the special transition condition is established (function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) When,
with
Any one of the features H4 to H7, wherein one of the first target period and the second target period is a period included in the game round, and the other is a period included in the special game state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature H10, both the period of the game cycle and the period of the special game state fluctuate according to the player's advantage. As a result, it is possible to adjust each of the game round period and the special game state period to an appropriate period according to the player's advantage.

For the configuration of features H1 to H10, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. special transition means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) for shifting the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player;
The predetermined target period included in the special game state (opening period, period in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state, closing period, interval period, ending period) is the player's advantage (first, fourth to sixth) The value of the total round number counter 64c in the embodiment, the target ball output rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive house counter 181 in the third embodiment, the number of target rounds in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, (In the first to sixth embodiments, the opening period selection process, the interval period selection process, and the ending period selection process in the main side MPU 62 are performed.) Functions to be executed, in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing processing at the start of opening, closing period selection processing, and ending period selection processing in the main MPU 62, and in the eleventh embodiment, selection of an opening period in the main MPU 62 A function of executing processing and ending period selection processing, a function of executing opening period selection processing, interval period selection processing, and ending period selection processing in the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, the game state can shift to a special game state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player plays the game expecting that the game state shifts to the special game state. . In this case, since the predetermined target period included in the special game state fluctuates according to the player's advantage, the period required to complete the special game state fluctuates according to the player's advantage. Become. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately give a profit to the player.

Feature I2. The special game state includes a granting target period (a period in which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state) in which a predetermined granting opportunity of profit can occur, and a non-granting target period (opening period, closed period) in which the predetermined granting opportunity does not occur period, interval period, ending period) and
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the predetermined target period is the non-granting target period.

According to feature I2, the non-granting target period in the special game state varies according to the player's advantage. Then, when the non-granting target period changes, the period required until the granting target period in which a predetermined profit grant opportunity occurs changes. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature I3. As the non-granting target period, the first non-granting target period (opening period, closing period, interval period, ending period) and the second non-granting target period (opening period, closing period, interval period, ending period) ) and
The predetermined period variation means is
First predetermined period varying means for varying the first non-granting target period according to the player's advantage (in the first to fourth embodiments, the main side MPU 62 selects an opening period, selects an interval period and the function of executing the selection process of the ending period, the function of executing the process at the time of opening start in the main side MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment, the selection process of the closing period and the selection process of the ending period, and the function of executing the selection process of the closing period and the ending period in the eleventh embodiment. A function of executing an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the side MPU 62. In the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main side MPU 62. )When,
Second predetermined period varying means for varying the second non-granting target period according to the advantage of the player (in the first to fourth embodiments, selection processing of the opening period in the main side MPU 62, selection processing of the interval period and the function of executing the selection process of the ending period, the function of executing the process at the time of opening start in the main side MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment, the selection process of the closing period and the selection process of the ending period, and the function of executing the selection process of the closing period and the ending period in the eleventh embodiment. A function of executing an opening period selection process and an ending period selection process in the side MPU 62. In the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing an opening period selection process, an interval period selection process, and an ending period selection process in the main side MPU 62. )When,
The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I3, the first non-granting target period is varied according to the player's advantage, and the second non-granting target period is varied according to the player's advantage. As the first non-grant target period and the second non-grant target period fluctuate, the period required until the grant target period in which a predetermined profit opportunity may occur fluctuates. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player. In particular, since a plurality of non-granting target periods such as the first non-granting target period and the second non-granting target period fluctuate according to the player's advantage, the frequency of giving profits to the player per unit time is determined by the game It becomes easier to adjust the degree of variation when varying according to the degree of advantage of the user.

Feature I4. The first predetermined period variation means determines that the player's advantage has become a first target advantage (first reference value) or that the player's advantage has become a first target advantage (first reference value). Varying the first non-granting target period based on
The second predetermined period variation means determines that the player's advantage has reached a second target advantage (second reference value) or that the player's advantage has reached a second target advantage (second reference value). The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the second non-granting target period is varied based on the following.

According to feature I4, the first non-granting target period is changed based on whether or not the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage, and the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage. The second non-granting target period is changed based on whether the second target advantage is achieved or the second target advantage is achieved. As a result, while suppressing frequent fluctuations in one non-granting target period, the period required until the granting target period in which a predetermined opportunity for granting profits occurs occurs can be adjusted according to the player's advantage. It is possible to change step by step.

Feature I5. The first predetermined period variation means determines that the player's advantage has reached a third target advantage (third reference value) or that the player's advantage has reached a third target advantage (third reference value). Varying the first non-granting target period based on
The second predetermined period of time variation means is configured to change the second non-zero time based on the fact that the player's advantage has become the third object advantage or that the player's advantage has become the third object advantage. The gaming machine according to feature I4, characterized in that the award target period is varied.

According to feature I5, the first non-granting target period is changed based on whether or not the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage, and the player's advantage becomes the first target advantage. In the configuration in which the second non-granting target period is changed based on the second target advantage or the second target advantage, the player's advantage becomes the third target advantage or the third target advantage. Both the first non-grant target period and the second non-grant target period are changed based on the three target advantages. As a result, it is possible to rapidly change, as necessary, the period required until the granting target period in which the predetermined opportunity for granting of profit can occur.

Feature I6. The first predetermined period of time fluctuation means is configured to change when the player's advantage is greater than or equal to a first target advantage (first reference value), or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first target advantage (first reference value). ) If it is more than that, make the first non-granting target period longer than before,
The second predetermined period of time fluctuation means determines whether the player's advantage is greater than or equal to a second target advantage (second reference value), which is more advantageous than the first target advantage, or the player's advantage. is equal to or higher than the second target advantage, the second non-granting target period is made longer than before.

According to feature I6, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage, the first non-granting target period becomes longer than before, and the player's When the advantage becomes equal to or higher than the second target advantage, or when the advantage becomes equal to or higher than the second target advantage, the second non-granting target period becomes longer than before. As the non-granting target period becomes longer, the period required until the granting target period in which a predetermined opportunity to grant profits occurs becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time. In addition, while suppressing the frequent occurrence of lengthening of one non-granting target period, the period required until the granting target period in which a predetermined opportunity for granting of profits occurs occurs is adjusted according to the player's advantage. It becomes possible to lengthen it step by step.

Feature I7. When the player's advantage becomes higher than the first target advantage and the second target advantage (third reference value) or higher, the first predetermined period of time variation means Alternatively, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third target advantage, the first non-granting target period is made longer than before (step S4706 to step S4706 of the main MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment function to execute the processing of S4708),
If the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third target advantage, or if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third target advantage, the second predetermined period of time fluctuation means is configured to change the second non- The gaming machine according to feature I6, characterized in that the grant target period is made longer than before (the function of executing the processing of steps S4806 and S4808 of the main side MPU 62 in the eleventh embodiment).

According to feature I7, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first target advantage, the first non-granting target period becomes longer than before, and the player's When the advantage is equal to or higher than the second target advantage, or when the advantage is equal to or higher than the second target advantage, the second non-granting target period is longer than before, and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third target advantage. When it becomes more than the degree or when it becomes more than the third target advantage, both the first non-grant target period and the second non-grant target period become longer than before. As a result, it is possible to rapidly lengthen the period required until the granting target period in which a predetermined opportunity to grant profits occurs occurs, if necessary.

Feature I8. The first predetermined period varying means changes the first non-granting target period to a predetermined variable target period (10th The first common extension period or the second common extension period in the embodiment, the second common extension period in the eleventh embodiment) is changed,
The second predetermined period varying means varies the second non-granting target period by the predetermined variable target period when a predetermined variation opportunity of the second non-granting target period occurs based on the advantage of the player. The game machine according to any one of features I3 to I7, characterized in that it allows the game to be played.

According to the feature I8, the change for the predetermined change target period is performed regardless of whether the first non-grant target period is changed or the second non-grant target period is changed. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which variable periods are prepared in association with the first non-grant target period and the second non-grant target period.

Feature I9. supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
Variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means in the special game state (step S912, step S1003 and step S1107 in the main side MPU 62 function) and
In the special game state, the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs, a predetermined upper limit period elapses, and the number of game balls entered by the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit number. Round generating means (in the first to sixth embodiments, step S903 to step S907, step S1103 and step S1104 in the main side MPU 62 in the first to sixth embodiments) that generates a round game that ends based on the establishment of any condition for reaching function of executing the processing of, in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S4402 to S4416 in the main MPU 62);
with
The grant target period is a period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state,
The non-granting target period is a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state,
The predetermined target period is the non-granting target period that occurs in the round game,
According to any one of features I2 to I8, the predetermined period varying means varies the predetermined target period according to the player's advantage without varying the upper limit period in the round game. game machine.

According to feature I9, the non-granting target period, which is the period in which the variable ball entry means is closed in the round game, is varied according to the player's advantage without changing the upper limit period in the round game. As a result, the grant target period, which is the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the round game, is changed. As a result, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the round game can be made appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Feature I10. As the round game, a predetermined round game in which the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs a plurality of times (a round of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result in the tenth and eleventh embodiments gaming) exists,
The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the predetermined target period is the non-grant target period sandwiched between a plurality of grant target periods in the predetermined round game.

According to feature I10, in a configuration in which variable ball entry control occurs multiple times in a predetermined round game, a non-granting target period sandwiched between a plurality of granting target periods in the predetermined round game is an advantage for the player. Varies accordingly. And, by performing such a change in the non-granting target period in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, the granting target period that occurs after the non-granting target period changes as a result. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in a predetermined round game according to the player's advantage.

Feature I11. The predetermined period varying means lengthens the predetermined target period when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to feature I10.

According to the feature I11, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the non-granting target period sandwiched between a plurality of granting target periods becomes longer in a predetermined round game. . And, by lengthening the non-granting target period in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, as a result, the granting target period occurring after the non-granting target period is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature I12. The gaming machine according to feature I11, wherein the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game decreases as the predetermined target period lengthens in the predetermined round game. .

According to feature I12, the lengthening of the non-grant target period is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, so that the grant target period that occurs after the non-grant target period is shortened as a result, and Based on this, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in a predetermined round game is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature I13. The predetermined period varying means varies the number of times of the grant target period across the non-grant target period in the round game without varying the upper limit period in the round game according to the player's advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of features I9 to I12, wherein the predetermined target period is varied according to the player's advantage.

According to the feature I13, without changing the upper limit period in the round game, the number of times of the grant target period across the non-grant target period in the round game is changed according to the player's advantage, so that the game The predetermined target period will vary depending on the degree of advantage of the person. In addition, in the configuration, the length of one grant target period that occurs in the round game can also vary. As the length of one grant target period varies, the ease with which a game ball enters the variable ball entering means also varies. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the round game appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Feature I14. The predetermined period varying means varies the upper limit period in the round game when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to feature I13, characterized in that the predetermined target period is lengthened by increasing the number of times the grant target period intervenes between the non-grant target periods in the round game.

According to the feature I14, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the number of times of the grant target period with the non-grant target period in between in the round game is increased. By increasing the number of times of the grant target period in such a situation that the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, the predetermined target period in the round game becomes longer, and as a result, the grant target period in the round game becomes shorter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature I15. The gaming machine according to feature I14, wherein the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the round game decreases as the predetermined target period lengthens in the round game.

According to feature I15, the lengthening of the non-grant target period is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, so that the grant target period that occurs after the non-grant target period is shortened as a result, and Based on this, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in a predetermined round game is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

For the configuration of features I1 to I15, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Display means (symbol display device 41) for performing variable display of patterns;
In each game round, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the variable display of the pattern is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the display means so that the variation display of the pattern is performed (the function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the sound and light side MPU 82 function, display side MPU 92);
Means for giving the predetermined profit to the player after the game round corresponding to the giving of the predetermined profit (opening/closing execution mode) is completed (function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 62);
with
A configuration in which the pattern is waited in a predetermined waiting area (waiting areas SA1 to SA9) by waiting timing in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed,
In the game machine, the pre-end period included in the period from the standby timing in the game round to the end of the game round (in the first to sixth, tenth, eleventh, and fifteenth embodiments The final stop period of the game round, the period during which the waiting display is executed in the twelfth embodiment) is the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, the 2 embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment, the target number of rounds in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, and the consecutive game occurrence flag in the fifteenth embodiment). Varying pre-end variation means (function for executing final stop period selection processing in the main MPU 62 in the first to sixth, tenth, eleventh, and fifteenth embodiments; in the twelfth embodiment, the A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing period adjustment processing.

According to the feature J1, the pre-end period included in the period from the standby timing in a game round to the end of the game round varies according to the player's advantage. When the pre-end period fluctuates, the period required until the game cycle ends fluctuates, and the fluctuation of the period also fluctuates the given profit frequency per unit time. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player. In addition, in the case of this configuration, since the pre-termination period, which is the period after the pattern is waited in the waiting area, is varied, the contents of the variable display of the pattern are not changed in a complicated manner, as described above. It is possible to achieve excellent effects.

Feature J2. In the game round, after the pattern is put on standby in the waiting area, the pattern waiting in the waiting area is finally stopped and displayed, and the game round is finished in the state of being finally stopped and displayed. ,
Characteristic J1 characterized in that the pre-end period is a period during which the final stop display is performed (the final stop period of the game cycle in the first to sixth, tenth, eleventh, and fifteenth embodiments). The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature J2, in order to vary the period of the game cycle according to the player's advantage, the period during which the final stop display of the pattern is performed may be varied. It is possible to reduce the processing load for changing according to the degree of advantage.

Feature J3. In the game round, the pattern is waited in the waiting area based on the waiting timing, the waiting display is performed on the waiting pattern, and then the pattern is waiting in the waiting area. A pattern is displayed in a final stop state, and the game round is finished in the state of the final stop display,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the pre-end period is a waiting period during which the waiting display is performed (a period during which the waiting display in the twelfth embodiment is performed).

According to the feature J3, when the period of the game round is changed according to the player's advantage, the period during which the waiting display is performed before the final stop display of the pattern in the game round is changed. In this case, since the period after the pattern is waited in the standby area is changed, when the period of the game cycle is changed according to the player's advantage, the content of the variable display of the pattern is changed in a complicated manner. Furthermore, since the period before the final stop display is performed is variable, the player can be made aware that the game cycle has not ended even if the game cycle period is extended. It becomes possible.

Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the period during which the final stop display is performed is not varied according to the player's advantage.

According to feature J4, the period during which the final stop display of the pattern is performed does not change according to the player's advantage. It is possible to make the period during which the final stop display of is constant.

Feature J5. First control means (main side MPU 62) having a period determining means (function for executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the main side MPU 62) for determining the execution period of the game round and the pre-termination varying means;
A second control means (sound and light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92) having the game control means and controlling the display means based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
with
The first control means is
means for transmitting start information (variation command) including information on the execution period determined by the period determination means when the game round is started (function for executing the process of step S615 in the main side MPU 62);
means for transmitting final stop information (final stop command) instructing to start the final stop display in the game round (function for executing the process of step S706 in the main side MPU 62);
with
The game control means controls the display means so that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the reception of the start information, and the final stop display is started based on the reception of the final stop information. is to control
The pre-end varying means varies a period from the elapse of the execution period determined by the period determining means to the transmission of the final stop information according to the player's advantage. The gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4.

According to the feature J5, the execution period of the game round is determined by the first control means and the period of the game round is changed according to the player's advantage, and the display means is controlled by the second control means. is performed, it becomes possible to distribute the processing load to a plurality of control means. Further, when the game cycle is started, start information including information on the execution period is transmitted from the first control means, and the second control means starts the variable display of the pattern based on the reception of the start information, The second control means starts the final stop display of the pattern based on the transmission of the final stop information from the first control means. As a result, execution control of the variable display of the pattern is performed by the second control means in accordance with the information transmitted from the first control means. In this case, the period from the elapse of the execution period determined by the period determination means to the transmission of the final stop information varies according to the player's advantage. As a result, it is possible to change the game cycle period according to the player's advantage, simply by adjusting the timing of transmitting the final stop information.

Feature J6. The before-end variation means is configured to determine whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a target advantage (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value) or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the target advantage. In this case, the final stop information is transmitted after a predetermined extension period has passed after the execution period determined by the period determining means has passed (the main MPU 62 in the twelfth embodiment The gaming machine according to feature J5, characterized by: a function of executing the processes of steps S4903, S4905 and S4907.

According to the feature J6, the waiting period is lengthened when the player's advantage is higher than or equal to the target advantage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature J7. The game control means is
Based on the reception of the start information, a display mode information group (game round effect data table, display data table) corresponding to the execution period information included in the start information is stored in the first storage means. means for reading from (sound and light side ROM 83, display side ROM 93) to the second storage means (sound and light side RAM 84, display side RAM 94) (function for executing the processing of step S5004 of the sound and light side MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment); ,
means (display side MPU 92) for executing the variable display of the pattern by controlling the display means in accordance with the display mode information group read out to the second storage means;
When the final stop information is not received in the situation where control is performed by the last control information in the display mode information group read out to the second storage means, the standby display is displayed in the display mode information group. a means (a function of executing an extension setting process of the sound and light side MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment) for continuing the standby display on the display means by performing control again according to the control information for performing ,
The gaming machine according to feature J6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J7, the standby period is extended by processing the display mode information group corresponding to the execution period information included in the start information, so that it is stored in advance in the first storage means. It is possible to lengthen the waiting period according to the player's advantage without increasing the number of display mode information groups.

For the configuration of features J1 to J7, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (that the game ball enters the first operation port 33, that the game ball enters the second operation port 34), special information (first special figure side hold information, second special figure side hold information) information acquisition means (the function of executing the processing of steps S5203 and S5207 of the main side MPU 62 in the thirteenth embodiment),
Acquired information storage means (first special figure reservation area 125, second special figure reservation area 126) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Applicability determination is performed to determine whether the special information corresponds to the applicability information, and if a plurality of the special information are stored in the obtained information storage means, the plurality of special information are stored. Giving determination means (function for executing the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) that sequentially performs the giving determination;
Predetermined profit granting means (starting a special electric call in the main MPU 62) that grants a predetermined profit (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the determination that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information function to perform processing) and
A game cycle action is started, and the game cycle action is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game cycle, and the game cycle motion is performed in each game cycle. Game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) to control the game control means (function to execute the processing of step S406 ~ step S408 in the main side MPU62, the processing of steps S1401 ~ step S1406 in the sound and light side MPU82 display side MPU 92), and
In a situation in which predetermined special information, which is the special information corresponding to the addition correspondence information, is stored in the acquired information storage means, the above is triggered by the special information whose digestion order is earlier than the predetermined special information. When a game round is executed, specific period selection means (in the thirteenth embodiment, the processing of step S5404 in the main side MPU 62 is executed a function to execute the processing of steps S5504 to S5506 in the main MPU 62 in the fourteenth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K1, in a situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, a game cycle triggered by the special information whose digestion order is earlier than the predetermined special information is performed. When executed, the execution period of the game round becomes a period longer than the period of the predetermined length. As a result, the period until the game round triggered by the predetermined special information is started is lengthened, and accordingly the period required until the predetermined profit is given is lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined profit from being repeated in a short period of time.

Feature K2. The specific period selection means sets the execution period of the game cycle triggered by the special information that is the order of execution one time before the predetermined special information to be a period longer than the period of the predetermined length. The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized by:

According to the characteristic K2, a game in which the execution period of the game cycle is set to a period longer than a period of a predetermined length due to the fact that the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means. A round is a game round triggered by special information that is one time before the predetermined special information. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive lengthening of the execution period of the game cycle.

Feature K3. Characteristic feature K1 or K2, characterized in that the specific period selection means sets the execution period of the game cycle triggered by the predetermined special information to be a period longer than the period of the predetermined length. game machine.

According to the feature K3, not only the game rounds triggered by the special information whose digestion order is earlier than the predetermined special information corresponding to the provision correspondence information, but also the game rounds triggered by the predetermined special information. is longer than the period of the predetermined length. This makes it possible to lengthen the period required until the predetermined profit is given.

Feature K4. The specific period selection means is configured such that, in a situation where predetermined special information, which is the special information corresponding to the addition correspondence information, is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the consumption order is higher than the predetermined special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein when the game round triggered by the special information is executed, the execution period of the game round is set to be the longest period in the execution period.

According to the feature K4, when the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the game cycle is triggered by the special information whose consumption order is earlier than the predetermined special information. is the longest period in the execution period. As a result, in a situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the predetermined profit is granted after the game cycle triggered by the predetermined special information is completed. It is possible to reliably lengthen the required period, and it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature K5. The game according to feature K4, wherein the longest period is longer than the longest execution period of the game that occurs when the predetermined special information is not stored in the acquired information storage means. machine.

According to the characteristic K5, when the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the game cycle is triggered by the special information whose digestion order is earlier than the predetermined special information. is longer than the longest execution period selected when the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, in a situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the predetermined profit is granted after the game cycle triggered by the predetermined special information is completed. It is possible to reliably lengthen the required period, and to make the execution period different from the case where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not stored in the acquired information storage means.

Feature K6. The specific period selection means is configured such that, in a situation where predetermined special information, which is the special information corresponding to the addition correspondence information, is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the consumption order is higher than the predetermined special information. When the game round triggered by the special information is executed, the execution period of the game round is set to a period longer than the period of the predetermined length and according to the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c). The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, wherein the corresponding periods are set.

According to the feature K6, when the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the game cycle is triggered by the special information whose digestion order is earlier than the predetermined special information. is longer than the predetermined length of time and corresponds to the player's advantage. As a result, in a situation where the predetermined special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the predetermined profit is granted after the game cycle triggered by the predetermined special information is completed. It is possible not only to simply lengthen the required period, but also to lengthen it in a mode according to the player's advantage.

Feature K7. The acquisition information storage means stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (that the game ball enters the first operation opening 33) as the first special information (first 1 special figure side reservation information), and the special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (the game ball entering the second operation port 34) is stored as the second 2 It is configured to be stored as special information (reserved information on the second special figure side),
In this gaming machine, when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the first information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the stored second special information is stored. Priority means (the main MPU 62 executes the processing of step S502 in the main side MPU 62 so that the provision determination by the provision determination means is performed for the second special information even if the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means function),
The specific period selection means, in a situation in which the predetermined second special information, which is the second special information corresponding to the addition correspondence information, is stored in the acquired information storage means, is more efficient than the predetermined second special information. When the game round triggered by the second special information whose order is first is executed, the execution period of the game round is set to be longer than the period of the predetermined length. A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6.

According to the feature K7, the execution period of the game round is lengthened as already explained for the second special information to be preferentially consumed. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive lengthening of the execution period of the game cycle.

Feature K8. The specific period selection means executes the game round triggered by the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the predetermined second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Means for making the period longer than the period of the predetermined length (in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S5409 in the main MPU 62; in the fourteenth embodiment, step S5511 in the main MPU 62 to the function of executing the processing of step S5513).

According to the feature K8, when the predetermined second special information is stored in the obtained information storage means, the execution period of the game cycle triggered by the first special information stored in the obtained information storage means is also a predetermined length. It is longer than the period. Thus, when a game round triggered by the first special information is executed after the game round triggered by the predetermined second special information is completed and a predetermined profit is given, the execution period of the game round is It becomes a period longer than the period of predetermined length. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the predetermined profit will be awarded in quick succession after the predetermined profit is awarded.

For the configuration of features K1 to K8, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. Based on the occurrence of a predetermined grant event (10R low-probability jackpot result or 10R high-probability jackpot result game round end in the 15th embodiment) due to the game being played, the player receives a predetermined profit (high frequency winning mode profit giving means (function for executing the processing of steps S903, S906 and S907 in the main MPU 62) for giving the open/close execution mode with the largest number of rounds;
Either the occurrence of the predetermined granting event or the granting of the predetermined profit between the granting of the predetermined profit and the occurrence of a specific trigger (completion of the standard number of game rounds). Situation setting means (fifteenth embodiment) for setting the subsequent game situation to a specific game situation (situation where "1" is set to the consecutive game occurrence flag of the main side RAM 64) based on the occurrence of the profit-related event. a function of executing the processing of steps S5605, S5703, S5712, S5713, S5803, S5813, S5823 and S5833 of the main MPU 62 in
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature L1, the occurrence of a profit-related event, which is either the occurrence of a predetermined grant event or the grant of a predetermined benefit, occurs between the grant of a predetermined benefit and the occurrence of a specific opportunity. Based on this, the subsequent game situation becomes the specific game situation. As a result, when a predetermined profit is generated repeatedly in a short period of time, it is possible to adjust the game situation accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately give a profit to the player.

Feature L2. By varying the target period (game ball firing cycle, game round fluctuation continuation period, game round final stop period, opening period, interval period, ending period), after the predetermined profit is given, the predetermined A configuration in which the period required for the grant event to occur can vary,
The situation setting means makes the target period longer than before as the specific gaming situation based on the occurrence of the profit-related event between the awarding of the predetermined profit and the occurrence of the specific opportunity. The game machine according to feature L1, which is characterized by setting the situation.

According to the feature L2, the occurrence of a profit-related event, which is either the occurrence of a predetermined granting event or the granting of a predetermined benefit, occurs between the granting of a predetermined benefit and the occurrence of a specific opportunity. Based on this, the target period becomes longer than before due to the specific game situation. As a result, when the predetermined profit is generated repeatedly in a short period of time, the period required until the predetermined profit is given becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature L3. In each game cycle, the game cycle operation is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity, and the game cycle operation is terminated based on the occurrence of the end opportunity. Game control means for controlling the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the circulation operation is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 has a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92),
The predetermined granting event is configured to occur after the game-playing action corresponding to the granting of the predetermined profit is completed,
The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the specific opportunity is execution of the target reference number of times (consecutive game reference number of times) after the predetermined profit is awarded.

According to feature L3, a profit-related event that is either the occurrence of a predetermined grant event or the granting of a predetermined profit between the time when the predetermined profit is awarded and the target reference number of games are played. is generated, the subsequent game situation becomes the specific game situation. As a result, when the predetermined profit is given again in a situation where the number of times of the game played after the given profit is small is small, the game situation can be adjusted accordingly.

Feature L4. The situation setting means terminates the specific game situation (executes the process of step S5615 of the main MPU 62 in the fifteenth embodiment) when the game rounds of the target reference number of times are executed in the specific game situation. function).

According to feature L4, it is possible to set both the execution count of game rounds as the reference for setting the specific game situation and the execution count of game rounds as the reference for releasing the specific game situation as the target reference number of times. As a result, compared to a configuration in which the number of game rounds to be executed as a setting reference and the number of game rounds to be executed as a release reference are individually set, the storage capacity required to store the number of game rounds to be executed as a reference is reduced. can be suppressed.

Feature L5. The situation setting means, even in a situation in which an advantageous period (high-frequency support mode) that is advantageous to the player continues, when an end opportunity (completion of the game times of the standard number of consecutive games) occurs, the specific game The gaming machine according to feature L4, characterized by ending the situation.

According to the feature L5, the specific game situation is ended when the end opportunity occurs even in a situation where the advantageous period continues. This makes it possible to prevent the specific game situation from continuing excessively.

Feature L6. The situation setting means causes the profit-related event to occur after the specific opportunity has occurred after the predetermined profit has been awarded, even in a situation where an advantageous period (high-frequency support mode) advantageous to the player continues. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics L1 to L5, wherein if the player does, the game situation after that is not set to the specific game situation.

According to the feature L6, even if the advantageous period continues, if a profit-related event occurs after the specified profit is granted and the specific opportunity occurs, the subsequent game situation is set to the specific game situation. not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting of the specific game situation from occurring excessively.

Feature L7. Features L1 to L6 characterized in that the profit giving means shifts the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in a high-frequency winning mode) advantageous to the player as the giving of the predetermined profit. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature L7, it is possible to make the game situation corresponding to the repeated occurrence of the special game state in a short period of time.

For the configuration of features L1 to L7, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
Variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control to switch the variable ball entry means to the closed state after being in the open state (function of executing the processing of steps S912, S1003 and S1107 in the main side MPU 62); ,
special transition means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means;
In the special game state, the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs, a predetermined upper limit period elapses, and the number of game balls entered by the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit number. A round generation means (in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S4402 to S4416 in the main side MPU 62) that generates a round game that ends based on the establishment of any condition for reaching,
Without changing the upper limit period in the round game, the predetermined target period (closed period) that is the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state in the round game (the number of target rounds in the embodiment) is varied according to the predetermined period varying means (the function of executing the process at the time of opening the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment and the process of selecting the closing period);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature M1, the game state can shift to a special game state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player plays the game expecting that the game state shifts to the special game state. . In this case, without changing the upper limit period in the round game, the period during which the variable ball entry means is closed in the round game is changed according to the player's advantage, resulting in the round The period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state is varied in the game. As a result, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the round game can be made appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Feature M2. As the round game, a predetermined round game in which the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means occurs a plurality of times (a round game in an opening and closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high probability big hit result in the tenth embodiment). exists and
In the predetermined target period, the variable ball-entering means sandwiched between a period in which one of the variable ball-entering means is in the open state and a period in which the next open state is in the predetermined round game, and the variable ball-entering means is in the closed state. The gaming machine according to feature M1, characterized in that the period is

According to feature M2, in a configuration in which variable ball entry control occurs multiple times in a predetermined round game, a period in which one variable ball entry means is in an open state and the next variable ball entry means is in an open state in the predetermined round game. The period in which the variable ball-entering means sandwiched between the periods in the open state is in the closed state varies according to the player's advantage. Then, the variation of the period in which the variable ball entry means is closed is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, so that the variable ball entry means occurs after the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state. is open, the period will vary. Therefore, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in a predetermined round game can be made appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Feature M3. The predetermined period varying means lengthens the predetermined target period when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to feature M2.

According to the feature M3, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period during which one variable ball entry means is open and the next variable The period in which the variable ball-entering means is in the closed state is lengthened between the periods in which the ball-entering means is in the open state. By lengthening the period during which the variable ball entry means is closed as described above in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, as a result, the period during which the variable ball entry means is closed is lengthened. The period in which the variable ball entering means is in the open state, which occurs later, is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature M4. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game decreases as the predetermined target period lengthens in the predetermined round game. .

According to feature M4, the lengthening of the period in which the variable ball entry means is closed is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, resulting in a period in which the variable ball entry means is closed. The period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state after that is shortened, and based on this, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a predetermined round game is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature M5. The predetermined period varying means determines the number of times the variable ball-entering means is in the open state during the period in which the variable ball-entering means is in the closed state in the round game without varying the upper limit period in the round game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M4, wherein the predetermined target period is varied according to the player's advantage by varying according to the player's advantage.

According to feature M5, the number of occurrences of the period in which the variable ball entry means is open across the period in which the variable ball entry means is closed in the round game without changing the upper limit period in the round game is determined by the player. By changing according to the advantage of , the predetermined target period changes according to the player's advantage. In addition, in this configuration, the length of the period during which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state once during the round game can also vary. As the length of the period in which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state for one time varies, the ease with which a game ball enters the variable ball-entering means also varies. Therefore, it is possible to make the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the round game appropriate according to the player's advantage.

Feature M6. The predetermined period of time variation means is configured to determine when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (first reference value or second reference value), or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (first reference value or second reference value). second reference value) or more, the variable ball entry means is opened across the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state in the round game without changing the upper limit period in the round game. The gaming machine according to feature M5, wherein the predetermined target period is lengthened by increasing the number of times that the state occurs.

According to the feature M6, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the variable ball entry means is activated with a period during which the variable ball entry means is closed in the round game. The number of occurrences of the open state period is increased. Then, the increase in the number of occurrences of the period in which the variable ball entry means is open is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, so that the predetermined target period in the round game becomes longer, and as a result The period during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state in the round game is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature M7. The gaming machine according to feature M6, wherein the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the round game decreases as the predetermined target period lengthens in the round game.

According to feature M7, the lengthening of the period in which the variable ball entry means is closed is performed in a situation where the upper limit period of the round game is not changed, resulting in a period in which the variable ball entry means is closed. The period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state after that is shortened, and based on this, the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a predetermined round game is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

For the configuration of features M1 to M7, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. a payout means (payout device 76) for paying out game media to a player;
Payout control means (payout control device 77) for driving and controlling the payout means so that the game media are paid out based on the occurrence of the giving opportunity;
with
The payout control means includes speed variation means (MPU step of the payout control device 77 in the sixteenth embodiment) for varying the payout speed of the game media by the payout means in accordance with the player's advantage (number of target rounds). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of S6102 to S6106.

According to feature N1, the payout speed of the game media varies according to the player's advantage. As a result, it is possible to properly give a profit to the player.

Feature N2. The speed variation means is configured to change the speed when the player's advantage is greater than or equal to a predetermined advantage (first reference value or second reference value) or when the player's advantage becomes a predetermined advantage (second reference value). 1 reference value or a second reference value), the gaming machine according to feature N1 is characterized in that the payout speed is made slower than before.

According to the feature N2, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the payout speed of the game media becomes slower than before. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature N3. As the predetermined advantages, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) in which the player's advantage is higher than the first predetermined advantage are set. has been
The speed variation means is
Means for slowing the payout speed when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage ( A function of executing the processing of step S6105 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the sixteenth embodiment);
Means for slowing the payout speed when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage ( A function of executing the processing of step S6106 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the sixteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature N2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature N3, the payout speed of game media is slowed down in stages according to the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's advantage, the longer the cycle in which game media are provided. As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being granted to the player in a short period of time.

Feature N4. supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when a supply operation is performed by the player in a state where game balls can be supplied as the game medium; prepared,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein a payout cycle of the game balls according to the payout speed resulting from the variation by the speed varying means is shorter than the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature N4, even if the game ball payout speed is varied according to the player's advantage, the game ball payout cycle based on the game ball payout speed is longer than the predetermined cycle, which is the game ball supply cycle. short. As a result, it is possible to vary the payout speed of the game balls within a range that does not cause problems in supplying the game balls to the game area.

Feature N5. External output means for outputting payout information to the outside of the gaming machine based on the payout of the game media by the payout means (an MPU of the payout control device 77 in the sixteenth embodiment executes step S6111) function).

According to the feature N5, the payout information is externally output based on the fact that the game media are actually paid out by the payout means. As a result, in a configuration in which the number of game media that has been paid out is managed by a management device outside the gaming machine, even in a configuration in which the payout speed of game media is varied according to the player's advantage, It is possible to appropriately perform management in the management device.

Feature N6. The speed variation means is
Information grasping means (target round number area 205 in the tenth embodiment) for grasping predetermined history information (target round number in the tenth embodiment) based on a predetermined game history by playing a game;
Means for determining the subsequent payout speed based on the predetermined history information (function for executing the processing of steps S6102 to S6106 of the MPU of the payout control device 77 in the sixteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature N6, the predetermined history information is grasped based on the predetermined game history by playing the game, and the payout speed of the game medium is changed based on the grasped predetermined history information. As a result, since the payout speed of the game media thereafter changes according to the predetermined game history, it is possible to appropriately award the profit to the player.

Feature N7. The gaming machine according to feature N6, wherein the predetermined history information varies according to the profit given to the player.

According to the feature N7, in the configuration in which the predetermined history information varies according to the profit given to the player, the subsequent payout speed of the game media is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the payout speed of the game media thereafter changes according to the profit given to the player, so that the profit can be appropriately given to the player.

Feature N8. Period generation means (steps S4402 to S4416 of the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment) for generating a second predetermined period (round game) in which the expected value of the benefit is higher than the first predetermined period (other than the round game) function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to feature N7, wherein the predetermined history information varies according to the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period.

According to the feature N8, in the configuration in which the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the expected value of the profit to be given is higher than the first predetermined period, the subsequent game media are determined based on the predetermined history information. The payout speed is changed. As a result, the payout speed of the game media thereafter changes according to the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period, so that profits can be appropriately given to the player.

For the configuration of features N1 to N8, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1. A unit storage area ( 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 in the second embodiment, and 1st to 6th storage areas 203a to 203f in the tenth embodiment). 160, a management area 203 in the tenth embodiment, and
Based on the occurrence of a memory trigger (in the second embodiment, the total number of ejections reaches a predetermined unit number or more, in the tenth embodiment, the calculation trigger period has elapsed), the player's A storage executing means (in the second embodiment, the main MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1906 in the second embodiment) for storing the unit information that enables the degree of advantage to be specified in the unit storage area to be stored among the plurality of unit storage areas. a function to execute the processing of step S3803 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment);
Based on the unit information stored in the plurality of unit storage areas, the degree of advantage of the player in the calculation target period (target ball output rate in the second embodiment, target number of rounds in the tenth embodiment) is calculated. Calculation means for calculating (the function of executing the processing of steps S1908 to S1910 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps S3805 and S3806 in the main MPU 62 in the tenth embodiment); ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature O1, the unit information at that time is stored in the unit storage area to be stored based on the occurrence of the storage trigger, and based on the unit information stored in the plurality of unit storage areas, in the calculation target period A player's advantage is calculated. As a result, it is not necessary to re-specify the unit information every time the player's advantage in the calculation target period is calculated. , can be set as an advantage in a range shifted by the period until one memory opportunity occurs. Therefore, it is possible to finely manage the player's advantage, and accordingly, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with a profit.

Feature O2. The unit information is information corresponding to the game value given to the player until the memory opportunity occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the player's advantage is information corresponding to the game value given to the player during the calculation target period.

According to the feature O2, it is possible to finely manage the information corresponding to the game value given to the player during the calculation target period.

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the memory opportunity is generated based on the number of game values used by the player reaching a unit reference number.

According to the feature O3, the player's advantage in the next calculation target period with respect to the player's advantage in one calculation target period is such that the number of game values used by the player reaches the unit reference number. It is possible to set the advantage in the range shifted by the period up to.

Feature O4. A period generation means (tenth implementation) for generating a second predetermined period (round game in the tenth embodiment) in which the expected value of profit is higher than the first predetermined period (other than the round game in the tenth embodiment) function to execute the processing of steps S4402 to S4416 of the main side MPU 62 in the form),
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the unit information is the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period until the memory opportunity occurs.

According to feature O4, it is possible to finely manage the information corresponding to the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period during the calculation target period.

Feature O5. supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
Variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means (function of executing the processing of steps S4109, S4204 and S4306 in the main side MPU 62); ,
special transition means (function for executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
with
The gaming machine according to feature O4, wherein the second predetermined period is a predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state.

According to feature O5, it is possible to finely manage information corresponding to a predetermined period that occurred in the calculation target period.

Feature O6. As the special game state, the first special game state (opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability big hit result) and the number of times the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the open state are the first special game state The gaming machine according to feature O5, characterized in that there is at least a second special game state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result) different from the above.

According to feature O6, in a configuration in which the number of times the variable ball entry means is open is different between the first special game state and the second special game state, the variable ball entry means is open in the special game state. Information corresponding to the number of occurrences in a predetermined period is stored as unit information. As a result, information corresponding to the profit actually given to the player can be stored as the unit information, compared to the structure in which the information corresponding to the number of occurrences of the special game state is stored as the unit information.

Feature O7. As the predetermined period, a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball-entering means is relatively large and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the number is relatively small. is at least present and
The gaming machine according to feature O5 or O6, wherein the second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to feature O7, information corresponding to the number of occurrences in the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is relatively large is stored as unit information. is not stored as unit information. This makes it possible to store information corresponding to the profit actually awarded to the player as unit information.

Feature O8. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O7, wherein the memory opportunity is generated based on the passage of a unit reference period shorter than the calculation target period.

According to feature O8, the advantage of the player in the next calculation target period can be set to a range shifted by the unit reference period with respect to the player's advantage in one calculation target period. .

Feature O9. The calculation means stores the unit information that enables the player's advantage at that point in time to be specified by the storage execution means based on the occurrence of the storage opportunity in the unit storage area. The game according to any one of the features O1 to O8, wherein the advantage of the player in the calculation target period is calculated based on the unit information stored in the plurality of unit storage areas. machine.

According to feature O9, each time a storage trigger occurs and the unit information at that time is stored in the unit storage area to be stored, based on the unit information stored in the plurality of unit storage areas, in the calculation target period A player's advantage is calculated. As a result, the player's advantage in the next calculation target period is shifted from the player's advantage in one calculation target period by the period until one memory opportunity occurs. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to finely manage the player's advantage, and accordingly, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with a profit.

Feature O10. Means for determining the subsequent game situation according to the player's advantage calculated by the calculating means (in the second embodiment, the function of executing period setting processing and period adjusting processing in the main side MPU 62; In the form, the main side MPU 62 is characterized by having a function of executing the final stop period selection process, the opening period selection process, the opening start process, the closing period selection process, and the ending period selection process). The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O9.

According to the feature O10, since the subsequent game situation is determined according to the player's advantage calculated by the calculating means, it is possible to appropriately give the player a profit. In particular, since the player's advantage is finely managed, it is possible to appropriately adjust the game situation.

For the configuration of features O1 to O10, features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I15, features J1 to J7, features K1 to K8, features L1 to L7, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N8, and features O1 to O10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The feature group A, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature group I, the feature J group, According to the inventions according to the features of the feature group K, the feature group L, the feature group M, the feature group N, and the feature group O, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a changing pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. A configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally displayed on the display screen, and a transition to a special game state advantageous to the player is made. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is preferable that a moderate profit is given to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

10... Pachinko machine, 27... Game ball launching mechanism, 31... General winning opening, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating opening, 34... Second operating opening, 37... Special unit, 41... Symbol display device, 62 Main side MPU 63 Main side ROM 64 Main side RAM 64c Total round number counter 76 Payout device 77 Payout control device 82 Sound and light side MPU 83 Sound and light side ROM 92...Display side MPU 125...First special figure reservation area 126...Second special figure reservation area 160...Management area 161-166...Storage area 173...Target ball payout rate area 181...Rental counter , 185 ... first base array table, 186 ... second base array table, 187 ... third base array table, 188 ... fourth base array table, 191 ... normal period table, 192 ... shortened period table, 195 ... th 1 base array table 196 second base array table 197 third base array table 201 round number counter for measurement 203 management area 203a to 203f storage area G3 remaining time image SA1 to SA9: Standby area.

Claims (1)

special transition means for transitioning the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player;
Predetermined period varying means for varying a predetermined target period included in the special game state according to the player's advantage;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images